For name and fame
; or, Through Afghan passes
George Alfred Henty, Gordon Browne

















FOE NAME AND FAME:
OR,
THROUGH AFGHAN PASSES.
BY
G. A. HENTY,
Author of " True to the Old Flag," " St. George for England," " In Freedom's Giuae,"
"With ('live in India," " By .Sheer Pluck," "Facing Death," Ac. 4c.
WITH EIGHT FULL-PAOE ILLUSTRATIONS
BY GORDON BROWSE.

LONDON:
BLACKIE & SON, 49 & 50 OLD BAILEY, E.C.j
GLASGOW, EDINBURGH, AND DUBLIN.
1886.





PREFACE.
My dear Lads,
In following the hero of this story with the
British army during the last war in Afghanistan, you
will be improving your acquaintance with a country
which is at present, and is likely to be so for a long
time, of supreme interest to Englishmen. Afghan-
istan stands as a dividing line between the two great
empires of England and Russia, and is certain, sooncr
or later, to become the scene of a tremendous struggle
between these nations; possibly the struggle may
have begun before these pages are read by you. Hap-
pily, at the present time the Afghans are on our side.
It is true that we have lately warred with and
beaten them, but our retirement after victory has at
least shown them that we have no desire to take their
country; while, on the other hand, they know that
for those upon whom Russia has once laid her hand
there is no escape. In these pages you will see the
etrength and the weakness of these wild people of the
mountains; their strength lying in their personal
bravery, their determination to preserve their freedom
at all costs, and the nature of their country. Their


iv
PREFACE.
weakness consists in their want of organization, their
tribal jealousies, and their impatience of regular habits,
and of the restraint necessary to render them good sol-
diers. But when led and organized by English officers
there are no better soldiers in the world, as is proved
by the splendid services which have been rendered by
the frontier force, which is composed almost entirely
of Afghan tribesmen. Their history shows that defeat
has little moral effect upon them. Crushed one day,
they will rise again the next; scattered, it would seem
hopelessly, they are ready to reassemble and renew
the conflict at the first summons of their chiefs.
Guided by British advice, led by British officers, and,
it may be, paid by British gold, Afghanistan is likely
to prove an invaluable ally to us when the day comes
that Russia believes herself strong enough to move
forward towards the goal of all her hopes and efforts
for the last fifty years, the conquest of India.
Yours sincerely,
G. A. HENTY.


CONTENTS.
ChAP. Page
I. The Lost Child 9
II. The Foundling 26
III. Life on a Smack 43
IV. Kcn Down 60
V. The Castaways 76
VI. The Attack on the Village, 92
VII. The Fight with the Phahus 103
VIII. The Torpedo 119
IX. The Advance into Afghanistan 136
X. The Peiwab-Khotal 152
XI. A Prisoner, I68
XII. The Advance up the Khyber, 183
XIII. The Massacre at Cabul, 196
XIV. The Advance upon Cabul, 213
XV. The Fighting round Cabul, 230
XVI. The Fight in the Pass 248
XVII. At Candahab, 265
XVIII. On the Helmund 282
XIX. The Battle of Maiwand, 294
XX. Candahab, 314
XXI. The Battle of Candahar, 330
XXII. At Home at Last, 348





ILLUSTRATIONS.
Pago
Sam Dickson finds little Willie Gale, . Frontkpiece. 27
Will and Hans in Search of a Shelter, 85
Captain Herbert saved 159
William Gale in the Hands ok the Afghans 196
"One of the Gunpowder Magazines had exploded," . 237
Letters from the General 270
Will saves Colonel Ripon, 284
Gundi carried by the Bayonet 330





FOR NAME AND FAME:
A TALE OF THE AFGHAN WAR.
CHAPTER I.
THE LOST CHILD.
V poor pets!" a lady exclaimed sorrowfully;
"it is too bad. They all knew me so well,
and ran to meet me when they saw me
coming, and seemed really pleased to see me even when
I had no food to give them."
"Which was not often, my dear," Captain Ripon, her
husband, said. "However, it is, as you say, too bad,
and I will bring the fellow to justice if I can. There
are twelve prize fowls worth a couple of guineas
apiece, not to mention the fact of their being pets of
yours, stolen, probably by tramps, who will eat them,
and for whom the commonest barn-door chickens would
have done as well. There are marks of blood in two
or three places, so they have evidently been killed for
food. The house was locked up last night all right,


10
THE LOST FOWLS.
for you see they got in by breaking in a panel of the
door. Robson, run down to the village at once, and
tell the policeman to come up here, and ask if any
gypsies or tramps have been seen in the neighbour-
hood."
The village lay at the gate of Captain Ripon's park,
and the gardener soon returned with the policeman.
"I've heard say there are some gypsies camped on
Netherwood Common, four miles away," that func-
tionary said in answer to Captain Ripon.
"Put the gray mare in the dog-cart, Sam; we will
drive over at once, they will hardly expect us so soon.
We will pick up another policeman at Netherwood;
they may show fight if we are not in strength."
Five minutes later Captain Ripon was travelling
along the road at the rate of twelve miles an hour,
with Sam by his side, and the policeman sitting
behind. At Netherwood they took up another police-
man, and a few minutes later drove up to the gypsy
encampment.
There was a slight stir when they were seen ap-
proaching, and then the gypsies went on with their
usual work, the women weaving baskets from osiers,
the men cutting up gorse into skewers. There were
four low tents, and a wagon stood near, a bony horse
grazing on the common.
"Now," Captain Ripon said, "I am a magistrate,
and I daresay you know what I have come for. My
fowl-house has been broken open, and some valuable


A GYPSY CAMP.
11
fowls stolen. Now, policeman, look about and see it'
you can find any traces of them."
The gypsies rose to their feet with angry gestures.
"Why do you come to us?" one of the men said.
"When a fowl is stolen you always suspect us, as if
there were no other thieves in the world."
"There are plenty of other thieves, my friend, and
we shall not interfere with you if we find nothing
suspicious."
"There have been some fowls plucked here," one of
the policemen said; "here is a little feather"—and he
showed one of only half an inch in length—"and
there is another on that woman's hair. They have
cleaned them up nicely enough, but it ain't easy to
pick up every feather. I'll be bound we find a fowl in
the pot."
Two of the gypsies leapt forward, stick in hand;
but the oldest man present said a word or two to them
in their own dialect.
"You may look in the pot," he said, turning to
Captain Bipon, " and maybe you will find a fowl there
with other things; we bought 'em at the market at
Hunston yesterday."
The policeman lifted the lid off the great pot which
was hanging over the fire, and stirred up the contents
with a stick.
"There's rabbits here, two or three of them, I should
say, and a fowl, perhaps two, but they are cut up."
"I cannot swear to that," Captain Ripon said, exam-


12
A PIECE OF EVIDENCE.
ining the portions of fowl, " though the plumpness of
the breasts and the size show that they are not ordinary
fowls." He looked round again at the tents. "But I
can pretty well swear to this," he said, as he stooped
and picked up a feather which lay half concealed
between the edge of one of the tents and the grass.
"This is a breast-feather of a Spangled Dorking.
These are not birds which would be sold for eating in
Hunston market, and it will be for these men to show
where they got it from."
A smothered oath broke from one or two of the
men. The elder signed to them to be quiet. "That's
not proof," he said insolently. "You can't convict five
men because the feather of a fowl which you cannot
swear to is found in their camp."
"No," Captain Ripon said quietly. "I do not want
to convict any one but the thief; but the proof is suf-
ficient for taking you in custody, and we shall find out
which was the guilty man afterwards. Now, lads, it
will be worse for you if you make trouble. Constables,
take them up to Mr. Bailey; he lives half a mile away.
Fortunately, we have means of proving which is the
fellow concerned. Now, Sam, you and I will go up
with the Netherwood constable to Mr. Bailey; and do
you," he said to the other policeman, "keep a sharp
watch over these women. You say you can find
nothing in the tents, but it is likely the other fowls
are hid not far off, and I will put all the boys of the
village to search when I come back."


A FOOTMARK.
13
The gypsies, with sullen faces, accompanied Captain
Ripon and the policeman to the magistrate's.
"Is that feather the only proof you have, Ripon?"
Mr. Bailey asked when he had given his evidence.
"I do not think that it will be enough to convict if
unsupported; besides, you cannot bring it home to any
one of them. But it is sufficient for me to have them
locked up for twenty-four hours, and, in the mean-
time, you may find the other fowls."
"But I have means of identification," Captain Ripon
said. "There is a footmark in some earth at the fowl-
house door. It is made by a boot which has got hob-
nails and a horse-shoe heel, and a piece of that heel
has been broken off! Now, which of these men has got
such a boot on? Whichever has he is the man." There
was a sudden movement among the accused.
"It's of no use," one of them said when the policeman
approached to examine their boots. "I'm the man, I'll
admit it. I can't get over the boot;" and he held up
his right foot.
"That is the boot, sir," the constable exclaimed;
"I can swear that it will fit the impression exactly."
"Very well," the magistrate said. "Constable, take
that man to the lock-up, and bring him before the
bench to-morrow for final committal for trial. There
is no evidence against the other four. They can go."
With surly threatening faces the men left the room,
while the constable placed handcuffs on the prisoner.
"Constable," Mr. Bailey said, "you had better not


14
A VISITOR.
put this man in the village lock-up. The place is of
no great strength, and his comrades would as likely as
not get him out to-night. Put him in my dog-cart;
my groom shall drive you over to Hunston."
Captain Ripon returned with his groom to Nether-
wood, and set all the children searching the gorse,
copses, and hedges near the common by the promise of
ten shillings reward if they found the missing fowls.
Half an hour later the gypsies struck their tents,
loaded the van, and went off.
Late that afternoon the ten missing fowls were
discovered in a small copse by the wayside, half a mile
from the common on the road to Captain Ripon's park.
"I cannot bring your fowls back to life, Emma," that
gentleman said when he returned home, "but I have
got the thief. It was one of the gypsies on Nether-
wood Common. We found two of the fowls in their
pot. No doubt they thought that they would have
plenty of time to get their dinner before anyone came,
even if suspicion fell on them; and they have hidden
the rest away somewhere, but I expect that we shall
find them. They had burnt all the feathers, as they
thought; but I found a breast-feather of a Spangled
Dorking, and that was enough for me to give them in
custody. Then, when it came to the question of boots,
the thief found it no good to deny it any longer."
That evening Captain Ripon was told that a woman
wished to speak to him, and on going out into the hall
he saw a gypsy of some thirty years of age.


A THREAT.
If)
"I have come, sir, to beg you not to appear against
my husband."
"But, my good woman, I see no reason why I
should not do so. If he had only stolen a couple of
common fowls for a sick wife or child I might have
been inclined to overlook it, for I am not fond of send-
ing men to prison; but to steal a dozen valuable fowls
for the pot is a little too much. Besides, the matter
has gone too far now for me to retract, even if I
wished to, which I certainly do not."
"He is a good husband, sir."
"He may be," Captain Ripon said, "though that
black eye you have got does not speak in his favour.
But that has nothing to do with it; matters must take
their course."
The woman changed her tone.
"I have asked you fairly, sir; and it will be better
for you if you don't prosecute BeubeD."
"Oh, nonsense, my good woman! Don't let me
have any threats, or it will be worse for you."
"I tell you," the woman exclaimed fiercely, "it will
be the worse for you if you appear against my Beuben."
"There, go out," Captain Ripon said, opening the
front door of the hall. "As if I cared for your ridicu-
lous threats! Your husband will get what he deserves
—five years, if I am not mistaken."
"You will repent this," the gypsy said as she
passed out.
Captain Ripon closed thedoorafter her without a word.


1G
A NERVOUS WIIK
"Well, who was it?" his wife inquired when he
returned to the drawing-room.
"An insolent gypsy woman, wife of the man who
stole the fowls. She had the impudence to threaten
me if I appeared against him."
"Oh, Robert!" the young wife exclaimed apprehen-
sively, "what could she do? Perhaps you had better
not appear."
"Nonsense, my dear!" her husband laughed. "Not
appear because an impudent gypsy woman has threat-
ened me? A nice magistrate I should be! Why, half
the fellows who are committed swear that they will
pay off the magistrate some day, but nothing ever
comes of it. Here we have been married six months,
and you are wanting me to neglect my duty, especially
when it is your pet fowls which have been stolen.
"Why, at the worst, my dear," he went on, seeing that
his wife still looked pale, "they could burn down a
rick or two on a windy night in winter; and to satisfy
you I will have an extra sharp look-out kept in that
direction, and have a watch-dog chained up near them.
Come, my love, it is not worth giving a second thought
about, and I shall not tell you about my work on the
bench if you are going to take matters to heart like
this."
The winter came and went, and the ricks were un-
touched, and Captain Ripon forgot all about the gypsy's
threats. At the assizes a previous conviction was
proved against her husband, and he got five years'
(274 )


A BLOOD-MARK.
17
penal servitude, and after the trial was over the matter
passed out of the minds of both husband and wife.
They had indeed other matters to think about, for soon
after Christmas a baby boy was born and monopolized
the greater portion of his mother's thoughts. When in
due time he was taken out for walks the old women of
the village, perhaps with an eye to presents from the
Park, were unanimous in declaring that he was the
finest boy ever seen, and the image both of his father
and mother. He certainly was a fine baby, and his
mother lamented sorely over the fact that he had a
dark blood-mark about the size of a threepenny piece
upon his shoulder. Her husband, however, consoled
her by pointing out that, as it was a boy, the mark did
not matter in the slightest, whereas, had it been a girl,
the mark would have been a disfigurement when she at-
tained to the dignified age at which low dresses are worn.
"Yes, of course, that would have been dreadful,
Robert; still, you know, it is a pity."
"I really cannot see that it is even a pity, little
woman; and it would have made no great difference if
he had been spotted all over like a leopard, so that his
face and arms were free; the only drawback would
have been he would have got some nickname or other,
such as ' the Leopard,' or' Spotty,' or something of that
sort when he went to bathe with his school-fellows.
But this little spot does not matter in the slightest.
Some clay or other Tom will laugh when I tell him
what a fuss you made over it."
(274) B


18
TOM RIPON'S PROGRESS.
Mrs. Ripon was silenced, but although she said noth-
ing more about it, she was grieved in her heart at this
little blemish on her boy, and lamented that it would
spoil his appearance when he began to run about in
little short frocks, and she determined at once that he
should wear long curls until he got into jackets.
Summer, autumn, and winter came and passed. In
the spring Tom Ripon was toddling about, but he had
not yet begun to talk, although his mother declared
that certain incoherent sounds which he made were
quite plain and distinct words; but her husband, while
willing to allow that they might be perfectly intelligible
to her, insisted that to the male ear they in no way
resembled words.
"But he ought to begin to talk, Robert," his wife
urged. "He is sixteen months old now, and can run
about quite well. He really ought to begin to talk."
"He will talk before long," her husband said care-
lessly. "Many children do not talk till they are
eighteen months old, some not till they are two years.
Besides, you say he does begin already."
"Yes, Robert, but not quite plainly."
"No, indeed, not plainly at all," her husband laughed.
"Don't trouble, my dear, he will talk soon enough, and
if he only talks as loud as he roars sometimes, you will
regret the hurry you have been in about it."
"Oh, Robert, how can you talk so? I am sure he
does not cry more than other children. Nurse says he
is the best child she ever knew."


A PRODIGY.
19
"Of course she does, my dear; nurses always do.
But I don't say he roars more than other children.
I only say he roars, and that loudly; so you need not
be afraid of there being anything the matter with his
tongue or his lungs. What fidgets you young mothers
are, to be sure!"
"And what heartless things you young fathers are,
to be sure!" his wife retorted, laughing. "Men don't
deserve to have children, they do not appreciate them
one bit."
"We appreciate them in our way, little woman, but
it is not a fussy way. We are content with them as
they are, and are not in any hurry for them to run, or
to walk, or to cut their first teeth. Tom is a fine little
chap, and I am very fond of him in his way, princi-
pally, perhaps, because he is your Tom; but I cannot
see that he is a prodigy."
"He is a prodigy," Mrs. Ripon said, with a little toss
of her head, "and I shall go up to the nursery to
admire him." So saying she walked off with dignity,
and Captain Ripon went out to look at his horses, and
thought to himself what a wonderful dispensation of
providence it was that mothers were so fond of their
babies.
"I don't know what the poor little beggars would
do," he muttered, "if they had only their fathers to
look after them; but I suppose we should take to it,
just as the old goose in the yard has taken to that
brood of chickens whose mother was carried off by the


20
TOM MISSING.
fox. By the way, I must order some wire-netting; I
forgot to write for it yesterday."
Another two months. It was June; and now even
Captain Ripon allowed that Tom could say " Pa" and
"Ma" with tolerable distinctness, but as yet he had
got no farther. He could now run about sturdily; and
as the season was warm and bright, and Mrs. Ripon
believed in fresh air, the child spent a considerable
portion of his time in the garden. One day his mother
was out with him, and he had been running about for
some time. Mrs. Ripon was picking flowers, for she
had a dinner-party that evening, and she enjoyed
getting her flowers and arranging her vases herself.
Presently she looked round, but Tom was missing.
There were many clumps of ornamental shrubs on the
lawn, and Mrs. Ripon thought nothing of his disap-
pearance.
"Tom," she called, " come to mamma, she wants you,"
and went on with her work.
A minute or two passed.
"Where is that little pickle?" she said. "Hiding, I
suppose;" and she went off in search. Nowhere was
Tom to be seen. She called loudly, and searched in
the bushes.
"He must have gone up to the house. Oh, here
comes nurse. Nurse, have you seen Master Tom? he
has just run away," she called.
"No, ma'am, I have seen nothing of him."
"He must be about the garden then, somewhere.


AN ANXIOUS SEARCH.
21
Look about, nurse; where can the child have hidden
itself?"
Nurse and mother ran about, calling loudly the name
of the missing child. Five minutes later Mrs. Ripon
ran into the study, where her husband was going
through his farm accounts.
"Oh, Robert," she said, "I can't find Tom!" and she
burst into tears.
"Not find Tom?" her husband said, rising in sur-
prise. "Why, how long have you missed him?"
"He was out in the garden with me; I was picking
flowers for the dinner-table, and when I looked round
he was gone. Nurse and I have been looking every-
where, and calling, but we cannot find him."
"Oh, he is all right," Captain Ripon said cheerfully;
"do not alarm yourself, little woman; he must have
wandered into the shrubbery; we shall hear him howl-
ing directly. But I will come and look for him."
No better success attended Captain Ripon's search
than that which his wife had met with. He looked
anxious now. The gardeners and servants were called,
and soon every place in the garden was ransacked.
"He must have got through the gate somehow into
the park," Captain Ripon said, hurrying in that direc-
tion. "He certainly is not in the garden or in any of
the hothouses."
Some of the men had already gone in that direction.
Presently Captain Ripon met one running back.
"I have been down to the gate, sir, and can see


ENERGETIC MEASURES.
23
was required; and on no account to mention to a soul
where he put it.
Before riding off, he ran in to his wife, who was half
wild with grief, to tell her that he was going to search
outside the park, and that she must keep up her
spirits, for no doubt Tom would turn up all right in
no time.
He admitted to himself, however, as he galloped
away, that he was not altogether sure that Tom would
be so speedily recovered. The woman would never
have dared to place the boot on the road, and so give a
clue against herself, unless she felt very confident that
she could get away or conceal herself.
"She has probably some hiding-place close by the
park," he said to himself, "where she will lie hid till
night, and will then make across country."
He paused at the village, and set the whole popula-
tion at work by telling them that his child was miss-
ing, and had, he believed, been carried off by a gypsy
woman; and that he would give fifty pounds to any-
one who would find him. She could not be far off, as
it was only about half an hour since the child had
been missed.
Then he galloped to Hunston, set the police at work;
and, going to a printer, told him instantly to set up
and strike off placards offering five hundred pounds
reward for the recovery of the child. This was to be
done in an hour or two, and then taken to the police
station for distribution throughout the countiy round.


24
A CHEERING REFLECTION.
Having now done all in his power, Captain Ripon
rode back as rapidly as he had come, in hopes that the
child might already have been found.
No news had, however, been obtained of him, nor had
anyone seen any strange woman in the neighbourhood.
On reaching the house he found his wife prostrated
with grief; and, in answer to her questions, he thought
it better to tell her about the discovery of the boot.
"We may be some little time before we find the
boy," he said, " but we shall find him sooner or later.
I have got placards out already, offering five hundred
pounds reward; and this evening I will send adver-
tisements to all the papers in this and the neighbour-
ing counties. Do not fret, darling. The woman has
done it out of spite, no doubt; but she will not risk
putting her neck in a noose by harming the child.
It is a terrible grief, but it will only be for a time; we
are sure to find him before long."
Later in the evening, when Mrs. Ripon had some-
what recovered her composure, she said to her husband:
"How strange are God's ways, Robert; how wicked
and wrong in us to grumble! I was foolish enough to
fret over that mark on the darling's neck, and now the
thought of it is my greatest comfort. If it should be
God's will that months or years should pass over before
we find him, there is a sign by which we shall always
know him. No other child can be palmed off upon us
as our own; when we find Tom we shall know him,
however changed he may be!"


NO NEWS.
25
"Yes, dear," her husband said, "God is very good,
and this trial may be sent us for the best. As you say,
we can take comfort now from what we were disposed
to think at the time a little cross. After that, dear,
we may surely trust in God. That mark "was placed
there that we might know our boy again; and were it
not decreed that we should again see him, that mark
would have been useless."
The thought, for a time, greatly cheered Mrs. Ripon;
but gradually the hope that she should ever see her
boy again faded away, and Captain Ripon became
much alarmed at the manifest change in her health.
In spite of all Captain Ripon could do, no news was
obtained of the gypsy or Tom. For weeks he rode
about the country asking questions in every village, or
hurried away to distant parts of England, where the
police thought they had a clue.
It was all in vain. Every gypsy encampment in the
kingdom was searched, but without avail; and even
the police, sharp-eyed as they are, could not guess that
the decent-looking Irishwoman, speaking—when she
did speak, which was seldom, for she was a taciturn
woman—with a strong brogue, working in a laundry
in a small street in the Potteries, Notting Hill, was the
gypsy they were looking for; or that the little boy,
whose father she said was at sea, was the child for
whose discovery a thousand pounds was continually
advertised.



CHAPTER II.
THE FOUNDLING.

T was a bitterly cold night in January. The
wind was roaring across the flats and fens
of Cambridgeshire, driving tiny flakes of
snow before it. But few people had been about all
day, and those whose business compelled them to face
the weather had hurried along muffled up to the chin.
It was ten at night, and the porter and his wife at
the workhouse at Ely had just gone to bed, when the
woman exclaimed, "Sam, 1 hear a child crying."
"Oh, nonsense!" the man replied, drawing the bed-
clothes higher over his head; "it is the wind; it's been
whistling all day."
The woman was silent but not convinced. Presently
she sat up in bed. "I tell you, Sam, it's a child; don't
you hear it, man? It's a child outside the gate. On
such a night as this too. Get up, man, and see; if you
won't I will go myself."
"Lie still, woman, it's all thy fancy."
"You are a fool, Sam Dickson," his wife said sharply.
"Do you think I have lived to the age of forty-five,


THE WORKHOUSE GATE.
27
and don't know a child's cry when I hear it? Now
are you going to get up, or am I?"
With much grumbling the porter turned out of bed,
slipped on a pair of trousers and a greatcoat, took
down the key from the wall, lighted a lantern, and
went out. He opened the gate and looked out. There
was nothing to be seen, and he was about to close the
gate again with a curse on his wife's fancies, when a
fresh cry broke on his ears. He hurried out now, and,
directed by the voice, found lying near the gate a child
wrapped in a dark-coloured shawl, which had pre-
vented him from seeing it at his first glance. There
was no one else in sight. The man lifted his lantern
above his head and gave a shout. There was no an-
swer. Then he raised the child and carried it in,
locked the door, and entered the lodge.
"You are right for once," he said. "Here is a child,
and a pretty heavy one too. It has been deserted by
some one; and a heartless creature she must have
been, for in another half-hour it would have been
frozen to death if you had not heard it."
The woman was out of bed now. "It is a boy," she
said, opening the shawl, "about two years old, I should
say. Don't cry, my boy—don't cry. It's half-frozen,
Sam. The best thing will be to put it into our bed,
that has just got warm. I will warm it up a little
milk. It's no use taking it into the ward to-night."
Ten minutes later the child was sound asleep, the
porter, who was a good-natured man, having gone over


28
THE WAIF.
to sleep in an empty bed in the house, leaving the
child to share his wife's bed.
In the morning the foundling opened its eyes and
looked round. Seeing everything strange it began
to cry.
"Don't cry, dear," the woman said. "I will get you
some nice breakfast directly."
The kindness of tone at once pacified the child. It
looked round.
"Where's mother?" he asked.
"I don't know, dear, we shall find her soon enough,
no doubt; don't you fret."
The child did not seem inclined to fret; on the con-
trary, he brightened up visibly.
"Will she beat Billy when she comes back?"
"No, my dear, she shan't beat you. Does she often
beat you?"
The child nodded its head several times emphatically.
"Then she's a bad lot," the woman said indignantly.
The child ate its breakfast contentedly, and was
then carried by the porter's wife to the master, who
had already heard the circumstance of its entry.
"It's of no use asking such a baby whether it has
any name," he said; "of course it would not know.
It had better go into the infants' ward; the guardians
will settle what its name shall be. We will set the
police at work and try and find out something about
its mother. It is a fine-looking little chap, and she
must be either a thoroughly bad one, or terribly


THE DEAD TRAMP.
29
pressed, to desert it like this. Most likely it is a tramp,
and in that case it's odds we shall never hear further
about it. Any distinguishing mark on its clothes?"
"None at all, sir. It is poorly dressed, and seems
to have been very bad treated; its skin is dirty, and
its little back is black and blue with bruises; but
it has a blood-mark on the neck, which will enable its
mother to swear to it, if it's fifty years hence; but I
don't suppose we shall ever hear of her again."
That afternoon, however, the news came that the
body of a tramp had been found frozen to death in a
ditch near the town. She had apparently lost her
way, and when she had fallen in was so numbed and
cold that she was unable to rise, and so had been
drowned in the shallow water. When the master
heard of it he sent for the porter's wife.
"Mrs. Dickson," he said, "you had better take that
child down and let it see the tramp they have found
frozen to death. The child is too young to be shocked
at death, and will suppose she is asleep. But you will
be able to see if he recognizes her."
There was no doubt as to the recognition. The
child started in terror when he saw the woman lying
in the shed into which she had been carried. It
checked its first impulse to cry out, but struggled to
get further off. "Moder asleep," he said in a whisper.
"If she wake she beat Billy."
That was enough. The woman carried him back to
the house. "She's his mother, sir, sure enough," she


30
WILLIAM GALE.
said to the master, " though how she should be puzzles
me. She is dressed in pretty decent clothes, but she
is as dark as a gypsy, with black hair. This child is
fair, with a skin as white as milk, now he is washed."
"I daresay he takes after his father," the master,
who was a practical man, said. "I hear that there is
no name on her things, no paper or other article which
would identify her in her pockets; but there is £2,12s.
in her purse, so she was not absolutely in want . It
will pay the parish for her funeral"
An hour later the guardians assembled, and upon
hearing the circumstances of the new-comer's admis-
sion and the death of the tramp, they decided that the
child should be entered in the books as "William
Gale," the name being chosen with a reference to the
weather during which he came into the house; and
against his name a note was written to the effect that
his mother, a tramp, name unknown, had, after leaving
him at the door of the workhouse, been found frozen
to death next day. William Gale grew and throve.
He was a quiet and contented child; accustomed to be
shut up all day alone, while his mother was out wash-
ing, the companionship of other children in the work-
house was a pleasant novelty, and if the food was not
such as a dainty child would fancy, it was at least as
good as he had been accustomed to. The porter's wife
continued to be the fast friend of the child whom she
had saved from death. The fact that she had done so
gave her an interest in it. Her own children were


A WARM FRIEND.
31
out in service or at work in the fields, and the child
was a pleasure to her. Scarce a day passed then that
she would not go across the yard up to the infants'
ward and bring Billy down to the lodge, where he
would play contentedly by the hour, or sit watching
her and sucking at a cake while she washed or pre-
pared her husband's dinner.
Billy was seldom heard to cry. Perhaps he had
wept all his stock of tears away before he entered the
house; he had seldom fits of bad temper, and was
a really lovable child. Mrs. Dickson never wavered
in the opinion she had first formed, that the dead
tramp was not Billy's mother; but as no one else
agreed with her she kept her thoughts to herself.
The years passed on, and William Gale was now no
longer in the infants' ward, but took his place in the
boys' school. Here he at once showed an intelligence
beyond that of the other boys of his own age. The
hours which he had each day spent in the porter's
lodge had not been wasted. The affection of the good
woman had brightened his life, and he had none of the
dull, down-cast look so common among children in
workhouses. She had encouraged him to talk and
play, had taught him the alphabet, and supplied him
with an occasional picture-book with easy words;
indeed she devoted far more time to him than many
mothers in her class of life can give to their children.
The guardians, as they went in and out to board-
meeting, would delight her by remarking:—


sa
MRS. DICKSON'S BELIEF.
"That is really a fine little fellow, Mrs. Dickson; he
really does you credit. A fine sturdy, independent
little chap."
The child of course wore the regular uniform of
workhouse children; but Mrs. Dickson, who was
handy with her needle, used to cut and alter the
clothes to fit him, and thus entirely changed their
appearance.
"He looks like a gentleman's child," one of the
guardians said one day.
"I believe he is a gentleman's child, sir. Look at
his white skin; see how upright he is, with his head
far back as if he was somebody; he is different alto-
gether from the run of them. I always said he came
of good blood, and I shall say so to my dying day."
"It may be so, Mrs. Dickson; but the woman who
left him here, if I remember right, did not look as if
she had any good blood in her."
"Not likely, sir. She never came by him honestly,
I am sure; I couldn't have believed she was his
mother, not if she had sworn to it with her dying
breath."
Mrs. Dickson's belief was not without influence
upon the boy. When he was old enough to under-
stand she told him the circumstances of his having
been found at the workhouse door, and of the dis-
covery of the woman who had brought him there; and
impressed upon him her own strong conviction that
this was not his mother.


GOOD ADVICE.
33
"I believe, Billy," she said over and over again,
"that your parents were gentlefolk. Now, mind, it
does not make one bit of difference to you, for it ain't
likely you will ever hear of them. Still, please God, you
may do so; and it is for you to bear it in mind, and to
act so as, if you were to meet them, they need not be
ashamed of you. You have got to earn your living
just like all the other boys here, but you can act
right and straight and honourable. Never tell a lie,
Billy, not if it's to save yourself from being thrashed
ever so much; always speak out manful and straight,
no matter what comes of it. Don't never use no bad
words, work hard at your books and try to improve
yourself. Keep it always before you that you mean
to be a good man and a gentleman some day; and,
mark my words, you will do it."
"You're spoiling that child," her husband would
say, "filling his head with your ridiculous notions."
"No, I am not spoiling him, Sam; I'm doing him
good. It will help keep him straight, if he thinks
that he is of gentle blood and must not shame it.
Why, the matron said only yesterday she could not
make him out, he was so different from other boys."
"Mores the pity," grumbled the porter; "it mayn't
do him harm now—I don't say as it does; but when
he leaves the house he'll be above his work, and will
be discontented, and never keep a place."
"No, he won't," his wife asserted stoutly, although
in her heart she feared that there was some risk of her
(274) c


34 willy's master.
teaching having that effect. So far, however, there
could be no doubt that her teaching had been of great
advantage to the boy, and his steadiness and diligence
soon attracted the attention of the schoolmaster.
Schoolmasters are always ready to help pupils for-
ward who promise to be a credit to them, and William
Gale's teacher was no exception. He was not a learned
man, very far from it. He had been a grocer who had
failed in business, and having no other resource had
accepted the very small salary offered by the guardians
of Ely workhouse, as the only means which presented
itself of keeping out of one of the pauper wards of that
institution. However, he was not a bad reader, and
wrote an excellent hand. With books of geography
and history before him he could make no blunders in
his teaching, and although he might have been failing
in method, he was not harsh or unkind; and the boys,
therefore, learned as much with him as they might
have done with a more learned master of a harsher
disposition. He soon recognized not only William's
anxiety to learn, but the fearlessness and spirit with
which he was always ready to own a fault and to beat-
its punishment. On several occasions he brought the
boy before the notice of the guardians when they came
round the school; and when questions had to be asked
before visitors, William Gale was always called up as
the show boy. This prominence would have made him
an object of dislike among the other lads of his own
age, had it not been that William was a lively good-


A boy's library.
36
tempered boy; and if, as sometimes happened on these
occasions, a sixpence or shilling was slipped into his
hand by some visitor who was taken by his frank open
face and bright intelligent manner, it was always shared
among his school-fellows. At one of the examinations,
the wife of a guardian, who was present with her hus-
band, said on returning home:
"It must be very dull for those poor boys: I will
pack up some of the boys' books and send them. Now
they have gone to college they will never want them
again, and they would make quite a library for the
workhouse boys. There must be twenty or thirty of
them at least."
If ladies could but know what brightness they can
infuse into the lives of lads placed like these in Ely
workhouse, by a simple act of kindness of this kind,
there would not be an institution in the kingdom with-
out a well-supplied library.
The gift infused a new life into the school. Hitherto
the world outside had been a sealed book to the boys.
They knew of no world save that included within the
walls of the house. Their geography told them of other
lands and people, but these were mere names until now.
Among the books were "Robinson Crusoe," "Midship-
man Easy," " Peter Simple," three or four of Cooper's
Indian tales, Dana's " Life before the Mast," and several
of Kingston's and Ballantyne's books. These opened
a wonderland of life and adventure to the boys. The
schoolmaster used to give them out at twelve o'clock,


36
THE CHOICE OF A TRADE.
and they were returned at two when school re-com-
menced; and only such boys as obtained full marks for
their lessons were allowed to have them. In this way,
instead of the "library" being a cause of idleness, as
some of the guardians predicted when they heard of
its presentation, it was an incentive to work. Cer-
tainly its perusal filled the minds of most of the boys
with an intense longing to go to sea, but as there is
always a demand for apprentices for the Yarmouth
and Lowestoft smacks, the guardians did not disapprove
of this bent being given to their wishes; indeed, as no
premium had to be paid with apprentices to smack-
owners, while in most trades a premium is required, a
preference was given to the sea by the guardians.
When William Gale reached the age of fifteen, and
was brought before the board to choose the trade to
which he would be apprenticed, he at once said that
he would go to sea. There were applications from
several smack-masters for apprentices, and he, with the
five other boys brought up with him, were all of one
opinion in the matter.
"Mind, lads," the chairman said, "the life of an
apprentice on board a North Sea smack is a hard one.
You will get a great many more kicks than halfpence.
It will be no use grumbling when you have once made
your choice. It is a rough hard life, none rougher or
harder. When you have served your time it will be
open to you either to continue as smacksmen or to ship
as seamen in sea-going ships. Sailors who hail from


THE LAST DAY.
37
the eastern fishing ports are always regarded as amongst
the best of our seamen. Still it is a rough life and a
dangerous one; the hardest life on shore is easy in com-
parison. There is time to change your minds before
you sign; when you have done so it will be too late.
Are you all determined?"
None of them wavered. Their signatures were at-
tached to the indentures, and they were told that the
porter would take them to Yarmouth on the following
day. William Gale obtained leave to spend his last
evening at the porter's lodge, and there he talked very
seriously with Mrs. Dickson over his future prospects.
"I know," he said, "from Dana's book, that the life
is a very rough one, but that will not matter. A sailor,
when he has been four years at sea, can pass his exa-
mination as a mate, and I mean to work hard and pass
as soon as I can. I don't care how much I am knocked
about, that's nothing; there's a good chance of getting
on in the end."
"You will meet a great many bad boys, Bill; don't
you let them lead you into their ways."
"Don't be afraid of that," he answered, " I won't do
anything I should be ashamed of afterwards. You
have taught me better."
"I suppose the guardians gave you a Bible to-day;
they always do when boys goes out."
Will nodded.
"Be sure you read it often, my boy. You read that
and stick to it, and you won't go far wrong. You know


38
A PROMISE.
what the parson said last Sunday, 'No one is strong
in himself, but God gives strength.'"
"I remember," Will said. "I made up my mind
then that I'd bear it in mind and act upon it when I
could. I think the thought of God, and the thought
that I may meet my parents, and they must not be
ashamed of me, will help me to be honest and firm."
"I hope, Bill, you will come sometimes and see me
when you are ashore."
"I shall be sure to do that when I can," he answered.
"But, of course, I shall have no money at first; and it
may be a long time before I can pay my railway fare
here; but you may be sure I will come. Whoever may
be my real mother, you are the only mother I ever
knew, and no mother could have been kinder. When
I grow to be a man, and go to sea in big ships, I will
bring you all sorts of pretty things from abroad; and
if ever you should want it, you may be sure that my
wages will be quite as much yours as if I had been
really your son!"
Sam Dickson gave a snort. It was very good of the
boy, but he considered it his duty to snub him in order
to counteract what he considered to be the pernicious
counsels and treatment of his wife.
"Fine talk," he said, "fine talk We shall see."
"You ought to be ashamed of yourself, Sam Dick-
son," his wife said wrathfully. "The boy means what
he says, and I believe him. If anything was to happen
to you, and that boy was growed-up, I believe he


WILL STARTS IN LIFE.
39
would come forward to lend me a helping hand, just
as he says, as if he were my son. The gals is good
gals, but gals in service have plenty to do with their
wages, what with dress and one thing or another; we
must never look for much help from them; but if Bill
is doing well, and I ever come to want, I believe as his
heart would be good to help a bit."
"Well," the porter said dryly, " there's time enough
to see about it yet. I ain't dead, you ain't a pauper,
and he ain't a man, not by a long way."
"Well, you needn't go to be short-tempered over it,
Sam. The boy says as he'll be as good as a son to me
if the time ever comes as how I may want it. There
is no call for you to fly out as if he'd said as he'd
poison me if he'd the chance. Anyhow, you'll write
to me regular, won't you, Bill?"
"That I will," the boy said. "Every time I gets
back to port I'll write; and you'll write sometimes,
won't you? and tell me how you are, and how every
one is, schoolmaster and all. They have all been very
kind to me, and I have nothing to say against any of
them."
The next morning William Gale laid aside for ever
his workhouse dress, and put on a suit of rough blue
cloth, fitted for his future work. Then, bidding adieu
to all his friends, he, with his five fellow-apprentices,
started by rail under charge of Sam Dickson for Yar-
mouth. The journey itself was to them a most excit-
ing event. They had in all their remembrance never


40
AT YARMOUTH.
been a mile from the workhouse, and the swift motion
of the train, the changing scenery, the villages and
stations, were a source of immense interest. As they
neared Yarmouth their excitement increased, for now
they were nearing the sea, of which they had read so
much, but could form so little idea They were dis-
appointed, however, inasmuch as no glimpse was
obtained of it as they crossed the flat country leading
to the town; but, failing the sea, Yarmouth itself—
the town which was henceforth to be their head-
quarters — was in the highest degree interesting.
Presently the train reached the station, and then Sam
Dickson, who had made many annual journeys to Yar-
mouth on the same errand, at once started off with
them to the smack-owners who had written to the
workhouse. These lived at Gorleston, a large village
on the south side of the river. Walking down from
the station, the boys caught a glimpse of the river, and
were delighted at the sight of the long line of smacks
and coasters lying by the wharves opposite.
Presently they left the road and made their way
down to the river side. Their guardian had great
difficulty in getting them along, so interested were they
in the smacks lying alongside. Presently they stopped
at a large wooden building, over which was the name
of "James Eastrey."
"Here we are," Sam Dickson said. "Now stop
quietly outside, I will call three of you up when I have
spoken to Mr. Eastrey."


will's master.
41
Presently the porter re-appeared at the door, and
called three of the boys in. William Gale was one of
the number, James Eastrey being the name of the
owner to whom he had signed his indentures. A smell
of tar pervaded the whole place. Nets, sails, and
cordage were piled in great heaps in the store; iron
bolts and buckets, iron heads for trawls, and ship's
stores of all kinds.
Mr. Eastrey came out from a little wooden office.
"So," he said, " you are the three lads who are going
to be my apprentices. Well, boys, it is a rough life;
but if you take the ups and downs as they come, it is
not a bad one. I always tell my captains to be kind
to the boys; but when they are at sea they do not
always act as I wish them. When you are on shore,
between the voyages, I give you eight shillings a week
to keep yourselves, or I put you in the Smack-boys'
Home and pay for you there. The last is the best place
for you, but some boys prefer to go their own way.
I suppose you are all anxious to go to sea—boys always
are for the first time. One of my boats is going out
to-morrow. You," he said, pointing to William Gale,
"shall go in her. What is your name?"
"William Gale, sir."
"Very well, William Gale, then you shall be off first.
The others will only have a day or two to wait. I can
only send one new hand in each smack. The others
will go to the Home till the smacks are ready. I will
send a man with them at once. They can have a day


42
SCATTERED.
to run about the town; I shall find plenty of work for
them afterwards. You, Gale, will stop on the smack.
I will take you on board in half-an-hour when I have
finished my letter."
The three lads said good-bye to their comrades and
to Sam Dickson. A sailor was called up and took two
off to the Smack-boys' Home, and Will Gale sat down
on a coil of rope to wait till his employer was ready to
take him down to the craft to which he was henceforth
to belong.


CHAPTER III.
LIFE ON A SMACK.
OW come along, Gale," Mr. Eastrey said at
last, "the Kitty is close by."
Following his master the lad went out
from the store, and along the wharf, and presently
stepped upon a smack on which several men and a boy
were at work.
"Harvey," Mr. Eastrey said, " I have brought you a
new lad. He will sail with you to-morrow. I have
a very good account of him, an 1 I think you will find
him quick and ready."
"So as he's not up to tricks I shall do very well with
him, I don't doubt," the skipper said; "but boys are an
awful trouble the first voyage or two. However, I will
do my best for him. Are you ready to begin work at
once, young 'un? what is your name?"
"William Gale, and I am quite ready."
"Very well, Bill, chuck off your jacket then, and pass
those basjs along from the wharf."
The boy was soon hard at work. He was a little
disappointed at finding that the skipper was in dress


TAKIN8 IN STORES.
and manner in no way superior to the rest of the crew.
The Kitty was a yawl of forty-five tons, deep in the
water and broad in the beam. Her deck was dirty
and at present in disorder, and she did not come up to
the perfection of neatness and cleanliness which William
Gale had read of in the pages of his favourite author.
However, as he told himself, there must of course be a
good deal of difference between a man-of-war, where
the crew have little to do but to keep things neat and
bright, and a fishing-smack. The work upon which he
was at present engaged was the transferring of the
provisions for the voyage from the quay to the hold.
These consisted principally of barrels of salt meat and
bags of biscuits, but there were a large tin of tea, a
keg of sugar, a small barrel of molasses—or treacle—
two or three sacks of potatoes, pepper and salt. Then
there was a barrel of oil for the lamps, coils of spare
rope of different sizes, and a number of articles of
whose use William Gale had not the most remote idea.
After two hours' work the skipper looked at his
watch. "Time to knock off work," he said, "and we've
got pretty near everything on board. Now be sure
you are all here by six in the morning. Tide will
begin to run out at eight, and I don't want to lose any
of it. Bill, you are to come home with me for the
night."
It was but a hundred yards to the sailor's cottage,
which stood on the edge of the sharp rise a short dis-
tance back from the river.


A SNUG HOME.
45
"Here, wife," he said as he entered, "I've got a new
apprentice, and I expect he's pretty hungry; I am, I
can tell you, and I hope tea's ready. His name's Bill,
and he's going to stop here to-night."
"Tea is quite ready, John, and there's plenty of
mackerel. I thought you would not be getting them
again for a spell. Do you like fish ?" she asked the boy.
"I don't know, ma'am—I never tasted them."
"Bless me!" the woman cried in astonishment; "never
tasted fish! To think now!"
"I've been brought up in a workhouse," William
said, colouring a little as he spoke, for he knew the
prejudice against the House.
"Ah!" she said," we have had a good many of that sort,
and I can't say as I likes 'em for the most part. But
you haven't got the look about you. You don't seem
that sort."
"I hope I shall turn out none the worse for it," the
boy said; "at any rate I'll do my best."
"And none can't do more," the good woman said
briskly. "I like your looks, Bill, and you've a nice
way of talking; well, we shall see."
In a few minutes tea was upon the table, and Will sat
down with the skipper, his wife, and two daughters,
girls of ten and twelve. The lad enjoyed his meal im-
mensely, and did full justice to the fish.
"You will have plenty of them before you eat your
next tea on shore. We pretty nigh live on them when
we are on the fishing grounds."


46
THE SKIPPER'S WIFE.
"The same kind of fish as this?"
"No, mackerel are caught in small boats with a dif-
ferent sort of gear altogether. We get them sometimes
in the trawl, not shoals of 'em, but single fish, which
we call horse-mackerel."
After tea the skipper lit his pipe, and his wife, after
clearing up, took some knitting and sat down and
began to question the new apprentice.
"It's lucky for you, you found such a good friend,"
she said when he had finished his story. "That's how
it is you are so different from other boys who have
been apprenticed from the House. I should never
have thought you had come from there. And she gave
you good advice as to how you should go on, I'll be
bound."
"Yes, ma'am," Will said, "and I hope I shall act
up to it."
"I hope so, Bill; but you'll find it hard work to
keep yourself as you should do among them boys.
They are an awful lot, them smack-boys."
"Not worse nor other boys," her husband said.
"Not worse than might be looked for, John, but
they are most of 'em pretty bad. The language they
use make my blood run cold often. They seems to
take a delight in it. The hands are bad enough, but
the boys are dreadful. I suppose you don't swear,
Will; they look too sharp after you in the House; but
if you take my advice, boy, don't you ever get into the
way of bad language. If you once begin, it will grow


BEWARE OF DRINK.
47
on you. There ain't no use in it, and it's awful to
hear it."
"I will try not to do so," Will said firmly. "Mother
—I always call her mother—told me how bad it was,
and I said I'd try."
"That's right, Will, you stick to that, and make up
your mind to keep from liquor, and you'll do."
"What's the use of talking that way?" the skipper
said. "The boy's sure to do it. They all do."
"Not all, John; there's some teetotalers in the
fleet."
"I won't say I'll never touch it," Will said, "for I
don't know yet how I may want it; they say when
you are cold and wet through at sea it is really good;
but I have made up my mind I'll never drink for the
sake of drinking. Half the men—ay, nineteen out of
twenty in the House—would never have been there,
I've heard mother say, if it hadn't been for drink; and
I told her she need never fear I'd take to that."
"If you can do without it on shore, you can do with-
out it at sea," the skipper said. "I take it when I'm
on shore, but there's not a drop goes out on the Kitty.
Some boats carries spirits, some don't. We don't. The
old man puts chocolate on board instead, and of a wet
night a drink of hot chocolate's worth all the rum in
the world . As for giving it up altogether, I see no
call for it . There are men who can't touch liquor but
they must go on till they get drunk. That sort ought
to swear off and never touch it at all. It's worse than


48
WILLS RESOLUTION.
poison to some. But for a man who is content with
his pint of beer with his dinner, and a glass of grog of
an evening, I see no harm in it."
"Except that the money might be better spent,
John."
"It might be, or it might not. In my case the saving
would be of no account. The beer costs threepence,
and the rum as much more. That's sixpence a day.
I'm only at home ten days once every two months, so
it come to thirty shillings a year, and I enjoy my
dinner and my evening pipe all the better for them."
"The thing is this, Will, you don't know, when you
begin, whether you are going to be one of the men
who, like my John, is content with his pint of beer
'and his glass of grog, or whether you will be one of
them as can't touch liquor without wanting to make
beasts of themselves. Therefore the safest plan is,
don't touch it at all—leastways till you've served your
time. The others may laugh at you at first, but they
won't like you any the worse for it."
"Thank you, ma'am. I will make up my mind to
that—not to touch liquor till I am out of my appren-
ticeship. After that, I can see for myself."
"That's right, lad. When you come back from your
first trip, you can join the lodge if you like. I and
my girls are members."
"Thank you, ma'am," Will said; "but I won't take
any pledge. I have said I will not do it, and I don't
see any use in taking an oath about it. If I am so


A PRESENT.
49
weak as to break my word, I should break my oath.
I don't know why I shouldn't be able to trust myself
to do as I am willed, in that way as in any other. If
I'd a craving after it, it might be different; but I
never have tasted it, and don't want to taste it; so I
don't see why I can't trust myself."
"Yes, I think as how you can trust yourself, Will,"
the woman said, looking at him; "and I've noticed
often that it isn't them who say most as do most. Now,
I daresay, you are sleepy. There's my boy's bed for
you. He is fourth hand in one of the smacks at sea."
The next morning Will was out of bed the instant
he was called, excited at the thought that he was
going really to sea. The skipper's wife had tea made
and the table laid.
"Here," she said, " are some oilskin suits my boy has
given up. They will suit you well enough for size;
and although they are not as good as they were, they
will keep out a good deal of water yet. You will get
half-a-crown a week while you are at sea, so by the
time you get back you will have enough to buy your-
self a fresh suit."
Half an hour later Will was at work getting two
spare sails and the last of the stores on board.
"Now, Bill, come below," the skipper said. "I will
;-how you your bunk."
The cabin was larger than Will had expected. It
was about twelve feet square, and lofty enough for a
tall man to stand upright. By the side of the COm-
^t) 'D


50
THE "KITTY."
panion stairs was a grate, on which a kettle was boil-
ing; and this, as he afterwards learned, was a fixture,
except when cooking was going on, and the men could
have tea whenever they chose. Round three sides of
the cabin extended lockers, the tops forming seats.
Above were what looked like cupboards running round
the sides, but the skipper pushed open a sliding door
and showed a bed-place.
"That is your bunk," he said. "You see there are
two at the end, and one each side, above, and as many
under them—eight bunks in all. You will have to
help Jack, that is the other boy, in cooking, and make
yourself useful generally in the day. The crew are
divided into two watches, but you will not have much
to do on deck. If the night is clear you can sleep,
except when the trawl is being got up. Of a thick or
stormy night you will keep your watch. Now, as the
other lad is more handy on deck than you are, you can
take charge here. All you have to do is to see that
the kettle is kept boiling. You can come on deck and
lend a hand if wanted, but you must come down some-
times and see the fire is all right."
After inspecting the contents of the kettle, and see-
ing that it was full, Will climbed up the steep ladder
again, and was soon working away coiling down the
ropes with the other lad, while the crew hoisted sails
and got the boat under weigh.
"Are there only two hands under the captain?" he
asked the other boy.


A BAD BEGINNING. 51
"There are two others," the boy said. "They will
come on board after we get out of the river, and you'll
see they will be just as drunk as they can stand."
"What, drunk at this time in the morning?"
"Yes, they got drunk last night, and as they won't
have fairly slept it off they will be beginning again
this morning. The old man will look them up and get
them off."
"Who is the old man?"
"Old Eastrey, of course, stupid. I wish they were
all on board. There's a fine breeze, and I hate wasting
four or five hours off the bar waiting for the hands to
come off."
"I wonder the old man stands it," Will said.
"He can't help it," the other answered. "Scarce a
smack goes out of Yarmouth without half the hands
being drunk when she starts. They don't get much
chance afterwards, you see, and they sleep it off by
night, so it don't make any odds. Our skipper is
always sober, and that's more than many of them are.
I have gone out when me and the other boy were the
only two sober on board."
"But isn't it very dangerous?"
"Dangerous! no," the boy said; "one of them is sure
to be sober enough to manage to stand at the helm,
and though I've bumped pretty heavy on the sands
sometimes we generally strike the channel. There is
no fear of anything else. We never start if a gale is
blowing, and the smacks are safe in anything but a


52
AT SEA.
gale. They are too deep to capsize, and at sea there's
no more drinking."
The smack dropped down the river, and stood off
and on near its entrance. Will was delighted with the
bright sea, dotted with ships and fishing-craft. The
sun was shining, and there was just enough wind to
send the smack along briskly through the water
without raising any waves sufficiently high to give her
a perceptible motion. At eight o'clock the captain
went on shore in the boat with a man to look after the
absent sailors, leaving only one hand and the two boys
on board. At ten the boat was again seen coming out.
"One, two, three, four," the boy said, "he has got
them both. Now we shall be off."
The boat was soon alongside, the two drunken men
were helped on board, and at once went below to sleep
themselves sober. Then the boat was hoisted on board,
and the second hand taking the helm, the Kitty started
fairly on her way.
"Now," the captain said, " let us get her a little tidy."
It took some hours' work before the deck was washed,
the ropes coiled down, and everything ship-shape. By
the time all was done the low coast of Norfolk had
sunk below the horizon, and the smack was far out at
sea. There was more motion now, but the wind was
still light. The skipper was pleased with the earnest-
ness and alacrity which the new apprentice showed.
"Now, Jack," he said to the other boy, "take Will
below with you and show him how to make tea."


MAKING TEA.
53
The process of tea-iuaking on board a smack is not
a difficult one to master; the sole operation consisting
in putting a few more spoonfuls of tea into the kettle
boiling over the tire when it begins to get low, and
tilling up with fresh water. But simple as the thing
was, William Gale did not learn it on that occasion.
He had been feeling somewhat shaky even while on
deck, and the heat of the cabin and the smell of some
grease which Jack had just put in the frying-pan pre-
paratory to cooking some fish brought off from shore,
completed the effect of the rising sea. Until next
morning he was not in a condition to care even had
the tea remained unmade to the end ot time. He did
not go below, but lay under the shelter of a tar-
paulin on deck. In the morning the skipper roused
- him up.
"Now; lad, just take off your coat and shirt; here is
a bucket of water, put your head in that, and give your-
self a good sluice, and then come down and have a cup
of tea and a bit of biscuit, and you will find yourself
all right again.''
Will followed the instructions and found himself
wonderfully better.
"Now, lad, lend a hand in tidying up on deck; there
is nothing like work for keeping off" sea-sickness. Jack
shall cook for to-day."
The boy set to work with a will, and felt so re-
freshed that by one o'clock he was able to go below
and take his share of the dinner. At present, while


f>4
THE FISHING FLEET.
on their way to the fishing-grounds, their meals were
taken at the same time as on shore; but once at work,
there were only two meals a day: of these the first
was taken when the fishing was over, the fish cleaned,
picked, weighed, and packed—the hour varying be-
tween nine and eleven. The second meal was taken
before the trawl was lowered at six or seven o'clock in
the evening.
After five days' sailing the smack arrived off the
fishing-ground, but another two days were spent in
finding the fleet, as the fishing-grounds extend over a
distance of some hundreds of miles. When they came
up with it William Gale was astonished at the vast
number of boats that dotted the sea
In the Yarmouth fleet there are between four and
five hundred vessels; and, were it not that the most
perfect order and discipline reign, the number of acci-
dents which would occur, from so many boats fishing
close to each other at night, would be terrible. The
fleet is commanded by one of the most experienced
skippers, who is termed the admiral. His authority is
absolute: he leads the fleet to the grounds he selects for
fishing, and by signals by day and rockets by night
issues his orders:—when the nets are to be lowered
down and drawn up, the course which is to be steered,
and the tack on which they are to stand.
The fishing is entirely done at night. The trawls
are let down about dusk, and the fleet attached to
these moving anchors forge slowly ahead and to leeward


LIFE ON BOARD.
55
until daybreak. Then the trawls are got in and the
fleet sail in a body to the spot where the admiral de-
cides that fishing shall be continued in the evening.
At 10 o'clock at night the trawls are hauled in and the
nets emptied. All hands are called up for this opera-
tion; when it is concluded the trawl is again lowered
and the fish cleaned and packed, by the light of a torch
formed of rope dipped in tar. The watch who have
hitherto been on deck, turn in, and the others remain
on deck until morning, when the nets are again
hauled in.
There is not, indeed, much for the watch to do, as
the smack needs no steering, and the attention of the
men on deck is directed chiefly to see that no other
smack drifts down upon them. Should there appear
any danger of this, a flare is lit to warn the other
smacksmen. The trawl rope is slacked out or hauled
in as the case may require, and generally volleys of
strong language pass between the respective crews.
The trawl-beam is a heavy pole, some 30 or 35 feet
long; at each end are fitted strong iron hoops of about
three feet in diameter. These keep the pole from
touching the ground and keep open the mouth of the
nfet, one side of which is attached to the pole while the
other drags along the bottom.
The net resembles in shape a long deep purse, and
has various pockets and other contrivances by which,
when a fish has once entered its mouth, it is prevented
from returning.


56
THE CONTENTS OK THE NET.
The trawl-rope, which is from 40 to 80 yards in
length, according to the depth of water, is hauled in
by means of a winch, and its great weight taxes the
united strength of the crew to get it level with the
bulwark. When it is up, the net is hauled on board,
the small end is opened, and the fish tumble on to the
deck; they are then separated and packed in trunks,
as the wooden cases in which they are sent to market
are called. Soles fetch by far the highest price, and
fortunate are the crew who get a good haul of this
fish, for the men work upon shares, an account being
kept of all the sales made during the fishing trip. The
owner deducts the cost of the provisions and stores
which have been put on board and takes one or more
shares for the vessel. Each man has one share, the
skipper and mate receiving rather a larger proportion
than the others; thus the men have a lively interest
in each haul, and great is the satisfaction when the
net comes up well filled, and there is seen to be a good
proportion of soles among the contents.
The coarse fish, as they are called, include brill,
haddock, hake, ling, whiting, and many others. Turbot
are also caught.
In each haul there would probably be a vast number
of objects which would delight the heart of a naturalist.
Dog-fish, too, are sometimes taken, as are conger-eels
and horse-mackerel; stones and oysters too come up
in the nets, and the latter are the be'tes-noirs of the
fishing. Sometimes when the fleet gets over a bed of


A smacksman's fare.
57
oysters a score of nets will be lost in a single night;
for when the bag becomes full of oysters, its weight
is so great that the utmost power of the fishermen's
exertions on the winch is insufficient to lift it from the
bottom, and there is nothing to be done but to cut the
rope and abandon trawl and net. Upon these occasions
the language applied to the admiral is scarcely of a
kind for polite ears.
The food of the crews, when once upon the fishing-
ground, consists almost wholly of fish. With the
exception of soles, each man may select any fish he
fancies from the glistening mass upon the deck, and
the amount which each consumed at a meal at first
astonished William Gale, accustomed as he was to
meagre workhouse rations. He soon, however, found
himself able to keep up with the rest, but the operation
of frying seemed sometimes interminable, so many
times had the pan to be filled and emptied.
Hard biscuits were eaten with the fish, and the
whole washed down with copious draughts of tea with-
out milk. Two or three times a week the men would,
as a change, have a meal of salt meat; and on Sun-
days a duff or pudding of flour and currants was
made.
A few days after joining the fleet the weather
changed, the sky became gloomy and threatening. The
wind blew hard and a heavy sea got up. Will found
that keeping watch at night, which was pleasant
enough on a fine star-light night, was a very different


58
WATCH AT SEA.
thing now. It was no joke looking ahead with the
wind blowing fiercely and showers of spray dashing
into the eyes; and yet a vigilant watch must be kept,
for if the rockets which ordered the hauling of the
trawl were not noticed, some other smack moving
rapidly when released from the drag of its net might
at any moment come into collision with the smack.
Still more important was it to notice upon which
side the trawl was to be lowered, after being emptied,
and upon which tack the vessel was to proceed. For
a mistake in this respect would be certain to bring the
smack across another, in which case the trawl-ropes
would become entangled, involving, in a heavy sea, the
certain loss of one or the other. Many of the smacks
carry dogs, and it is found that these become even
better watchers than their masters; for they can be
relied on to call the attention of the watch, by sharp
barking, to the letting up of the rocket, however
distant.
A rocket may seem to be an easy thing to see, but
in a large fleet the sternmost smacks may be three or
four miles away from the leaders, and in a dark thick
night it is exceedingly difficult to make out even a
rocket at that distance.
The wind increased to a gale; the trawls were up
now, and the fleet lay-to. It may be explained that
this operation is performed by bringing a ship nearly
into the eye of the wind, and then hauling the foresail
across, and belaying the sheet. The aft sail or mizcn


LAYING-TO.
5'J
is then hauled tight, and the tiller lashed amidships.
As the fore-sail pays the vessel off from the wind, the
after sail brings her up again, and she is thus kept
nearly head to sea, and the crew go below and wait
till the storm abates.


CHAPTER IV.
RUN DOWN.
ILLIAM GALE was astonished at the iury
of the tempest and the wildness of the sea.
Although at the workhouse he had often
heard the wind roaring round the walls, there was
nothing to show him the force that was beinji exerted.
There were but few trees in the neighbourhood, and
William had hardly ever been without the walls except
in fine summer weather. He was, therefore, almost
bewildered by the force and fury of the gale, and by
the noise as it shrieked through the rifrjrinir and howled
across the water. The occasional flapping of the sails
and the rattling of the heavy blocks added to the din,
and it seemed to him that the Kitty, which, like all
fishing-smacks, was very deep in the water, must be
completely engulfed by the great waves which swept
down upon her.
Several times, indeed, he was obliged to leap down
into the cabin to avoid being swept away by the great
masses of green water which, pouring over her bows,
swept aft, carrying away all before them.


FINE WEATHER.
Gl
But the Yarmouth smacks are admirable sea boats,
and, pounded and belaboured as she was, the Kitty
always shook off the water that smothered her, and
rose again for the next wave. In twenty-four hours
the gale abated, the scattered fleet were assembled,
each flying its flag, and it was found that three were
missing, having either foundered, or been driven away
from their consorts.
With the return of fine weather the fishing began
again, and William thoroughly enjoyed his life. The
skipper was kind and forbearing; he neither ill-treated
the boys himself nor permitted any of the crew to do
so, and everything went on regularly and comfortably.
There were a few books on board, and of an evening
after the trawl was lowered, and before the watch
below turned into their bunks, William, who was the
best reader on board, would be asked to read aloud for
an hour. Sometimes there were songs, and as the
Kitty was fortunate, and her taking of fish good, the
men were all cheerful and good-tempered.
Once every three or four days the collecting steamer
came in sight, then there was a general race in the
fleet to put the trunks of fish on board her. Each did
his best to be in good time, for when the catch had
been heavy the steamer was sometimes unable to take
the whole of it, in which case the portion left behind
would be wholly spoilt before the arrival of another
steamer.
The whole of the fleet, therefore, ran down towards


62
THE COLLECTING STEAMER.
the steamer as soon as she was seen; the heavy boats
were tossed overboard, and the trunks lowered into
them, and two hands jumped in to row them to the
steamer. Round her a swarm of boats would soon be
collected, each striving to get alongside to deliver the
fish.
In calm weather the scene was simply amusing, but
when the sea was high it was exciting and even
dangerous; indeed, in the course of a year more lives
are lost in the process of taking the fish from the
smack to the steamer than in vessels foundered by
gales.
Sometimes the fleet will be joined by Dutch trading-
smacks, who exchange fresh bread and meat, tobacco,
and spirits, for fish. This traffic is the cause alike of
loss to the owners by the fish thus parted with, and
of injury to the men by the use of spirits. Fortunately
the skipper of the Kitty, although not averse to the
use of spirits on shore, was a strict man at sea, and
saw that no one took more than a single glass of grog
of an evening.
Over and over again Will congratulated himself
that he had the good fortune to make his first voyage
under such a skipper, for he shuddered at the stories
Jack told him of the cruelties and barbarities with
which apprentices are treated on board some of the
smacks. Although, however, there is no doubt many
brutal skippers hail from Yarmouth, the fleet from
that town bears a good reputation in comparison with


A COLLISION.
63
that of Grimsby, where the number of apprentices
returned as drowned each year is appalling.
One night when the wind was high and the fleet traw-
ling lower down the North Sea than usual, Will, who
was on deck, was startled at seeing a great ship bearing
down upon the smack. He gave a shout of terror and
warning, which was joined in by the crew on deck.
One ran for the hatchet to cut the trawl, and thus give
steerage-way to the smack. It was too late; in another
moment the great ship bore down upon them with a
crash, and the Kitty sunk beneath the waves.
The bowsprit of the vessel projected across the deck,
just at the point where William Gale was standing;
and in a moment he caught at the bob-stay, and quickly
hauled himself on to the bowsprit. Climbing along
this he was soon on board. Two or three sailors were
leaning over the bows, peering into the darkness.
They had not seen the smack, until too late to avoid
it; and the collision which had proved fatal to the
Kitty had scarcely been felt by the ship. Will was at
once taken to the captain, who spoke English; the boy
implored him to turn back, but the captain shook his
head.
"It would be useless," he said; "the sea is heavy,
and in these long boots "—and he pointed to the sea-
boots up to the thigh which all fishermen wear—" no
man could swim for two minutes, nor would there be
a chance, if they could, of our finding them on so dark
a night. I am very sorry, my lad, but it cannot be


64
ON BOARD A DUTCHMAN.
helped; it would take half-an-hour to bring the ship
about and go back to the spot where the smack sunk,
and we might not get within half-a-mile of it. You
know that as well as I do."
Will had been long enough at sea to recognize the
truth of what the captain said. As he was led forward
he burst into tears at the thought of the loss of his
kind friend the captain, and the rest of his mates.
The sailor who accompanied him patted him on the
back, and spoke cheeringly to him in a foreign language,
and he was soon between decks with the crew. Several
of these could speak English, and Will found that he
was on board a Dutch merchantman, bound with troops
for Java. The wind got up, and in the morning it
was blowing a heavy gale from the east, and the
vessel with reefed topsails was running for the straits
between Dover and Calais at twelve knots an hour.
After breakfast the captain sent for William.
"I am sorry, for your sake, that the state of the
weather will prevent our communicating with any ship
we may meet. But I promise you that if the gale breaks
before we are fairly out from the channel, I will heave
to and put you on board a homeward-bound ship."
Such a chance did not occur. For four or five days
the gale continued with great severity, and before it
ceased the ship was well down the coast of Spain on
her way south. When the captain saw that there was
but small chance of his being able to tranship his
involuntary passenger, he said to him:


SHIPPED AS A HAND.
65
"Look you, my lad. I fear that you will have to
make the voyage with me, for we shall not touch at
any port until we arrive at our destination. If you
like, I will ship you as a hand on board as from the
day of the collision. A hand, more or less, will make
no difference to the owners, and the money will be
useful to you when you leave the ship. Of course,
you can return in her if you think fit; but it is likely
enough that when we reach Java, we may be sent up
to China for a homeward cargo, in which case I will
procure you a passage in the first ship sailing for your
home."
Will gladly accepted the offer. He was, however,
by no means penniless; for upon the morning after his
coming on board, the Dutch officers and passengers,
hearing what had happened in the night, made a col-
lection among themselves, and presented the boy with
a purse containing fifteen pounds.
It was a long voyage, but not an unpleasant one fol
William; his duties were not very heavy—he had far
less to do than had been the case on board the smack.
A month on board the Kitty had done much towards
making a sailor of him, for there are no better seamen
in the world than the Yarmouth smacksmen. Going
aloft was at first a trial, but he soon learned his duties;
and being a strong and active lad, he was quickly able to
do efficient work, and speedily gained the good opinion
of the Dutch sailors by his good temper and anxiety
to please.
(274) K


A STORM BREWING.
C7
of Dutch and English, and when words failed, they
would eke out their words by gestures. The vessel
had sailed but a few days from Java, when there were
signs of a change of weather. Hitherto it had been
lovely; now a slight mist seemed to hang over the sea,
while overhead it was clear and bright. There was
not a breath of wind, and the sails hung listlessly
against the masts. Will, who was leaning against the
bulwarks chatting to Hans, observed the captain, after
looking round at the horizon, go into his cabin; he re-
appeared in a minute, and spoke to the officer, who
immediately shouted an order for "all hands to shorten
sail."
"What is that for?" Will said, wonderingly; "there
is not a breath of wind."
"I egzpect oaptain haz looked at glass," Hans said;
"find him fall; I egzpect we going to have ztorm; very
bad ztorms in dese zeas."
Will ran aloft with the sailors, and in ten minutes
every inch of canvas, with the exception of a small
stay-sail, was stript from the ship; still there was not
a breath of wind. The sea was as smooth as glass,
save for a slight ground-swell. Although the mist did
not seem to thicken, a strange darkness hung over the
sky, as if high up a thick fog had gathered. Darker
and darker it grew, until there was little more than a
pale twilight. The men stood in twos and threes,
watching the sea and sky, and talking together in low
tones.


68
A BIG STORM.
"I don't like this, Hans," Will said . "There is
something awful about it.''
"We have big ztorni," Hans replied, "zyclone they
call him."
Scarcely had Hans spoken when the sky above
seemed to open with a crash, a roar of thunder louder
than ten thousand pieces of artillery pealed around
them, while at the same moment a blinding flash of
lightning struck the mainmast, shivering it into splin-
ters, and prostrating to the deck five seamen who were
standing round its foot. As if a signal had been given
by the peal of thunder, a tremendous blast of wind
smote the vessel, and, stripped though she was of sails,
heaved her over almost to the gunwale.
For a moment the crew were paralysed by the
suddenness of the catastrophe, stunned by the terrible
thunder, and blinded by the lightning. None seemed
capable of moving. Will had instinctively covered his
eyes with his hands—it seemed to him for a moment
that his sight was gone. Then the voice of the cap-
tain was heard shouting:
"Helm hard up; out axes and cut away the wreck
at once!"
Those who were least stupefied by the shock sprang
in a dazed and stupid way to obey the order. Will drew
out his knife, and, feeling rather than seeing what he
was doing, tried to assist in cutting away the shrouds
of the fallen mast—it had gone a few feet above the
deck. Presently he seemed, as he worked, to recover


A NEAR SQUEAK.
69
from his stupor, and the power of sight came back to
him. Then he saw that the vessel, taken on the broad-
side by the gale, was lying far over, with several feet
of her lee deck under water.
So furious was the wind that he could not show his
head over the weather bulwark. The sea was still
smooth, as if the water was flattened by the force of
the wind. The stay-sail had been blown into ribbons.
In order to get the ship's head off the wind the head
of the jib was hauled up a few feet. It happened to
be a new and strong one; and, although it bellied
and lashed as if it would tear itself into fragments,
it still stood. Again the captain gave an order, and
the sail was hauled up to its full height. Still fur-
ther the vessel heaved over, and Will expected every
moment that she would capsize; then gradually her
head paid off, and slowly she righted and flew before
the gale.
"That was a near squeak," Will said.
"What is zqueak?" Hans shouted.
"I mean a close shave," Will replied.
Hans' blue eyes opened wider than usual.
"A zhave!" he repeated; "what are you talking
about zhaving?"
"No, no," Will said laughing, "I mean a narrow
escape of being capsized."
Hans nodded. There was no time for talk, for
orders were given for getting preventer stays on the
foremast. The jib, having done its work, had been


70
THE CYCLONE.
hauled down the instant the ship payed off, and a
small storm-sail set in its place. The men now had
time to attend to those who had been struck by light-
ning: three of them were found to be dead, but the
other two, who were stunned and senseless, still lived,
and were lifted and carried below.
Serious as the disaster had been, Will felt that the
stroke of lightning had saved the ship. The pressure
of the wind upon two masts and hull had nearly suf-
ficed to capsize her; had the main-mast stood, he felt
that she must have gone over. The sea got up in a
very few minutes, but being now only in light ballast,
the vessel rose easily over them. Four men were at
the helm, for the waves soon became so high that the
ship yawed dangerously on her course.
The gale seemed to increase rather than diminish in
fury, and the sea, instead of following in regular
waves, became a perfect chaos of tossing water, such
as Will had never before seen. He understood it,
however, when half an hour after the outburst of the
gale, he heard one of the men, who had just been re-
lieved at the wheel, say that in that time the ship had
already run twice round the compass. She was there-
fore in the very centre of the cyclone, and the strangely
tossed sea was accounted for. The motion of the ship
was extraordinary, sometimes she was thrown on one
side, sometimes on the other. Mountains of water
seemed to rise suddenly beside her, and tumbled in
great green masses over the bulwarks. So wild and


THE MIZEN CUT AWAY.
71
sudden were her movements, that even the oldest
sailors were unable to keep their feet, and all clung on
to shrouds or belaying-pins.
Will and Hans had lashed themselves by the slack
of a rope to the bulwarks close to each other, and
there clung on; sometimes half drowned by the waves
which poured in above them, sometimes torn from
their feet by the rush of green water as the ship
plunged head-foremost into a wave or shipped one
over her poop.
Presently there was a crash that sounded even above
the fury of the gale—the fore topmast had gone at the
cap. The axes were again called into requisition, for
a blow from the floating spar would have instantly
stove in the side. While engaged upon this the cap-
tain called two of the men with axes aft. These were
set to work to chop through the shrouds of the mizen,
and in a minute later the mast snapped asunder on
the level of the deck and went over the side with a
crash, carrying away several feet of the bulwark.
This act was necessitated by the loss of the fore-
topmast, as the pressure of the wind upon the mizen
would have brought her head up and laid her broad-
side to the gale.
The motion of the vessel was now considerably
easier, and there was no longer any difficulty in keep-
ing her dead before the wind. She was now describ-
ing much larger circles in her course, showing that she
was farther removed from the centre of the cyclone.


72
BREAKERS AHEAD.
After five or six hours the extreme violence of the
wind somewhat abated, and it seemed to settle down
into a heavy gale.
For two days the vessel ran before it. She had
made a good deal of water from the opening of the
seams by straining, and the pumps were kept going.
They were, they found, able to prevent the water from
gaining upon them, and all felt that they should
weather the tempest, provided that they were not
dashed upon any of the islands in which this portion
of the ocean abounds.
The crew had had no regular meals since the gale
began, for the caboose had been broken up and washed
overboard soon after the commencement of the storm,
and they had been obliged to be content with biscuits;
there was little to be done on deck, and the watch
over, they passed their time in their bunks.
In the afternoon of the third day of the tempest the
cry was raised of "Breakers ahead!" Will, with his
comrades of the watch below, sprang from their berths
and hurried on deck.
Far ahead, as the vessel lifted on the waves, could
be seen a gleam of white water. In anticipation of
such a danger, a small spar had been erected upon the
stump of the mizen and steadied with strong stays.
Sail was now hoisted upon this, and an effort was made
to bring the vessel's head to wind. Watching for a
favourable moment between the passage of the heavy
seas, the helm was put down and slowly her head


THE LAST CHANCE.
73
came up into the wind. Under such sail the captain
had no hope of being able to reach out in the teeth of
the gale; but he hoped to be able to claw off the shore
until clear of the land which lay to leeward of him.
That hope soon vanished. One of the mates was
sent to the top of the foremast, and descended with
news that as far as could be seen the line of breakers
stretched away, both on her beam and quarter. As
the minutes went by the anxious crew could see but
too clearly that the ship was drifting down upon the
land, and that she must inevitably be wrecked upon it.
The outlines of the shore could now be seen—a
forest of tossing trees, behind which high land could
be made out through the driving clouds. Orders were
now given to prepare to anchor; but all knew that the
chances were slight indeed. The water is, for the most
part, deep close alongside the islands of the Eastern
Archipelago; and even were the holding-ground good,
hemp and iron would hardly hold the vessel head to
the gale and tremendous sea.
When within a quarter of a mile of the breakers the
man with the lead proclaimed a depth of ten fathoms.
This was better than they had expected. The jib was
lowered and her head brought dead to wind. The
captain shouted "cut," and in an instant the stoppers
were severed and two heavy anchors dropt into the
sea. One had a heavy chain-cable, the other hemp, and
these were allowed to run out to the bits. The vessel
brought up with less shock than could be expected.


74
ON THE ROCKS.
A wave or two passed under her and still her cable
held.
A gleam of hope began to reign, when a mountainous
sea was seen approaching; higher and higher it rose,
and just as it reached the ship it curled over and
crashed down upon her deck. The cables snapped
like pack-thread, and a cry of despair arose from the
crew. The captain was calm and collected, and shouted
orders for the jib to be again hoisted and the helm put
up, so as to run her head-first on to the shore.
As they neared the line of breakers they could
see heads of jagged rocks rising among them, while
beyond a belt of smooth water, a quarter of a mile
wide, extended to the land. The ship's head was
directed towards a point where no rocks appeared
above the surface. Everyone held their breath, and
clinging to the bulwarks awaited the shock.
The vessel lifted on a great wave just as she came
to the line of broken water, and as she settled down
struck with a tremendous crash.
So great was the shock that she broke in two
amidships as if she had been made of paper, the por-
tion aft going instantly to pieces, and at once the sea
around was covered with fragments of wreck, bales,
boxes, and casks. Another great sea followed, filling
the now open ship, forcing up the deck, and sweeping
everything before it.
William Gale and Hans had gone as far forward as
possible. "Come out to the end of the bowsprit," Will


CAST ON SHORE.
75
said to Hans, and the two lads crawled out together
and sat on the end of the spar.
The sea beneath them was white as milk with the
foam which poured over the reef, but Will thought
that they were beyond the rocks. Every sea which
struck the wreck added to the disaster, until a larger
one than usual struck it and broke it into fragments.
The lads clung to the spar as it fell; it sank deep in
the water, but they retained their hold until it came
to the surface, and Will looked round. They were
safely beyond the edge of the reef. The sea was still
rough and broken, but it was quiet compared to that
beyond the reef. He saw that the fore-mast was
floating near, and to it several were clinging.
In a quarter of an hour the spar floated to land, the
boys felt the bottom with their feet, and soon scram-
bled ashore. A few minutes later the fore-mast also
drifted up, and several men clinging to fragments of
the wreck were also cast ashore. In all eleven men,
including the first mate, were saved.


CHAPTER V.
THE CASTAWAYS.
FTER waiting on the shore until all hope
that any more of their shipmates sur-
vived was at an end, the party, by the
mate's orders, detached a sail from a yard that had
drifted ashore, and carried it well into the wood,
where they were sheltered to some extent from the
force of the gale. A stout pole was then cut and
lashed between two trees; the sail was thrown over
this and pegged down at both sides. A fire was lit
with some difficulty; then a quantity of ferns and
branches of trees were cut: these made a soft and
elastic bed, and the whole party slept heavily until
the morning. Then they went back to the shore; it
was littered thickly with fragments of wreck, casks,
boxes, and other articles: here too were nearly a score
of the corpses of their shipmates. The first duty was
to dig a long shallow trench in the sand, beyond high-
water mark, and in this the bodies of their drowned
comrades were laid.
The storm was now breaking, glimpses of blue sky


78
PROGRESS OF THE BOAT.
these, young trees of flexible wood were cut down and
split; a keel was laid 25 feet in length; cross-pieces
12 feet long were pegged to this by trenails—nails
formed of tough and hard wood. The cross-pieces were
then bent upwards and fastened to the strips which
were to form the gunwale. Strengthening pieces were
placed along at distances of 7 or 8 inches apart, and
firmly lashed. When the whole was finished after three
days' labour the framework of a boat 25 feet long,
3 feet deep, and 7 feet in beam stood upon the beach.
A barrel of oil had been thrown ashore, and with this
the mate intended thoroughly to soak the canvas with
which the frame was to be covered. The boat would,
he calculated, carry the whole of the men with an
ample store of food and water for the voyage.
Upon the morning of the fourth day, as on their
way to work they emerged from the wood upon the
open beach, the mate gave a low cry and pointed along
the shore. There, between the reef and the island, was
a large Malay prahu. The party instantly fell back
among the trees. The Malays were apparently cruis-
ing along the reef to see if the late storm had thrown
up the wreckage, which might be useful to them; and
a loud shout proclaimed their satisfaction as they saw
the shore strewn with the remains of the Dutch ship.
The prahu was rowed to the shore, and fifty or sixty
Malays sprang from the bows on to the sand.
Scarcely had they done so when a shout from one of
them called the attention of the others to the frame-


CHASED BY MALAYS.
79
work of the boat. There was a minute's loud and ex-
cited chatter among them. Then they dashed forward
to the wood, the deep footsteps in the sand showing
plainly enough the direction from which the builders
of the boat had come and gone. The latter, as the
Malay boat neared the shore, had retired further into
the wood, but from the screen of leaves they were
able to see what was going on. As they saw the Malays
rush in an excited and yelling throng towards the
wood, the little party took to their heels.
"Scatter," the mate said; "together, they are sure to
overtake us; singly, we may escape."
"Let us keep together, Hans," Will said as they
dashed along through the wild jungle. Torn by thorns,
often thrown down by projecting roots and low creepers,
they kept on, their pace at times quickening as shouts
and screams told them that some of their comrades
had fallen into the hands of the Malays. Presently
they came upon the little stream which flowed into
the sea close to where they had been cast ashore.
"Let us follow this up," Will said; "they can track
us through the forest, but the water will set them off
our scent."
For a quarter of a mile they followed the course of
the stream, stopping breathlessly many times as they
heard voices in the wood not far off. Presently Will
pointed to a tree rising from a clump of bushes close
to the bank.
"Let us get through those bushes," he said; "be care-


80
IN THE THICKET.
ful, Hans, not to break a twig as you go; we can climb
that tree; there are plants with stems like cords wind-
ing round it. The top is so thick and bushy that I
don't think they can see us there."
Very carefully they parted the bushes that overhung
the stream, and entered the thicket; then they made
their way with great difficulty to the foot of the tree.
It was a very large one, with a trunk fully 15 feet in
diameter, rising some forty feet without a branch,
then a number of great arms grew out at right angles;
these were covered thickly with parasitic vegetation.
Round the trunk, like a snake embracing its victim, a
great climber had wound itself; its main stem was
as thick as a man's arm, and there were dozens of
smaller cord-like climbers. Thus the lads had no diffi-
culty in climbing to the point where the branches grew
out. Above these was a mass of foliage completely'
covered by the climbers, whose drooping sprays and
clusters gave the tree the appearance of a solid mass
of verdure. The boys continued to climb until they
were nearly at the top of the tree.
"There!" Will said, wiping away the perspiration
which streamed from his face, "if they do not track us
through the bushes to the very foot of this tree, I defy
them to find us."
For some hours the wood was alive with noises; the
Malays were evidently beating every foot of it, and
were determined that none of their victims should
escape. Several times parties of men came up the


A SNUG HIDING-PLACE.
81
stream searching the banks on both sides; but, hap-
pily, even their sharp eyes did not detect the spot
where the boys had entered the bushes, and gradually
the noises ceased, and at night a great glare by the sea-
shore told the lads that their enemies had gathered
again there, and were continuing by fire-light the work
of breaking open and examining the treasures which
the sea had cast up for them.
"What do you zay, Will? Zhall we get down and
go furder into wood, or zhall we wait here?"
"I think anyhow we had better wait till to-morrow
night," Will answered. "They may search again to-
morrow, and might come upon our tracks. If they
don't find us they may suppose that they have caught
us all, or that we have escaped right into the interior.
If they find no traces of us they will likely enough set
sail before night."
There was no difficulty in finding a place in which
they could sleep, for the cord-like climbers from bough
to bough formed natural cradles, in which they lay as
securely as if in a hammock on board a ship. In the
morning they were woke at daybreak by the cries of
the many birds which throng the forests of the Eastern
Archipelago. No one approached them during the
day, and they doubted not that the Malays were all
hard at work on the shore.
That night there was no reflection of a fire on the
beach. In the morning they descended from their
perches and made their way carefully, and as noise-
(274) * F
•


82
DEVASTATION.
lessly as possible, through the wood, to a point upon
the shore a mile distant from the point where they
landed . Going to the edge of the trees they were
enabled to take a view along the shore. It was de-
serted; the Malay prahu was gone.
Confident that none of their enemies would have
remained behind, they walked boldly along the shore
to the spot where the Malays had landed. Every box
and barrel had been broken open, and the contents
carried away; planks and beams had been split asunder
to obtain the copper bolts and fastenings. The frame-
work of the boat had been destroyed, and every por-
tion of canvas and rope carried away. The lads sat
down on the shore.
"What shall we do next, Hans?"
Hans shook his head.
"Perhaps some of the others may have got away
and may join us here to-day or to-morrow. If any are
alive they would be certain to come back here when
they thought the Malays had left."
Hans grunted an assent.
"Anyhow, the first thing to do," Will went on, "is
to gather up the pieces of biscuits; they have wasted
lots in breaking open the barrels, and I am famishing."
Hans rose with alacrity, and they soon were at work
collecting pieces of biscuits.
"Let us gather up all the pieces carefully; there are
a good lot altogether, and we may want them badly
before we have done."


ALONE.
83
In half an hour they had collected about 30 pounds
of biscuits, and having gone to the stream and taken
a drink they made for the spot where their tent had
stood. As they expected, they found the canvas was
gone. They set to work with their knives, and cutting
a number of boughs, erected a shelter sufficient to
shield them from the night air. All day they hoped,
but in vain, that some of their comrades would return,
and listened eagerly to every sound in the forest, but
no call or footstep met their ears. They had no means
of lighting a fire, the first having been lit by the mate,
who, being a smoker, had had a small tin-box of
matches in his pocket. This had fitted closely and
kept out the water.
"What had we better do if no one comes back?"
Will said as they sat in their little hut.
"Build anoder boat," Hans answered.
"But how are we to do that, Hans? We might make
the framework, but we have no canvas to cover it with;
besides, even if we had, I have no idea of the direction
of Singapore, and I doubt if we pnnld find our way
back to Java."
Hans had no further suggestion to offer.
"I suppose we could live in the forest for some
time," Will said . "I read a book called Robinson
Crusoe, and a sailor there lived on a desert island
for years; but then he had a gun and all sorts of
things. There are plenty of birds, but even if we
could make bows and arrows I suppose we should be


84
DWINDLING OF FOOD.
months before we could shoot straight enough to hit
them."
Several days passed; the lads found plenty of fruit;
but the season was advancing, and Will said one day
to Hans:
"What on earth are we to do when the fruit and
biscuits are all finished?"
Wandering in the woods they found the bodies of
the whole of their companions. All were headless, the
Malays having carried off these coveted trophies. They
did not attempt to bury the bodies, for in such a
climate decomposition sets in rapidly, and swarms of
insects complete the work. In the grass near the hut
they found one treasure—the mate's axe—which had
evidently fallen from his belt in his flight, and had
been overlooked by the Malays.
"I tell you what, Hans," Will said one day, "fruit is
getting scarcer and scarcer, and there are not more
than five or six pounds of biscuits left. I vote that we
make through the forest into the interior of the island;
there must be some villages scattered about. If we
enter one boldly they may not kill us. I don't know
whether they have any respect for the laws of hospi-
tality as some savages have; but even if they did kill
us it's better than being starved to death here. It's a
chance anyhow. What do you say, Hans?"
"I don't zay noding," Hans answered. "I don't have
no obinion at all; if you dink zat is ze best plan let us
do it."



WILL AND HANS IN SEARCH OF A SHELTER.





THE INTERIOR.
85
So saying Hans collected the biscuit, tied it up in
his handkerchief, and was ready to start at once.
"There is no hurry, Hans," Will said laughing; "still,
if we are to make a start, we may as well go at
once."
Turning their backs upon the sea they struck into
the wood. They had never before gone farther than
a mile from the shore. After an hour's walking they
found that the character of the forest was changing:
the ground rose rapidly, the thick tangled undergrowth
disappeared, and they were able to walk briskly for-
ward under the shade of the large trees. The hill
became steeper and steeper as they advanced, and
Will knew that they were ascending the hill that they
had seen from the ship wThen she was coming towards
the shore. Three hours after leaving the coast they
were upon its top. The ground was rocky here, and
in some places bare of trees. Inland they saw hill
rising behind hill, and knew that the island must be a
large one.
"Look, Hans, there is smoke curling up at the foot
of that hill over there; don't you see it? It is very
faint, but it is certainly smoke. There must be a house
there, and most likely a village. Come on, we shall
get there before the sun sets. I don't think it can be
more than a mile and a half away."
Hans as usual assented, and in about half an hour
they arrived at a Malay village.
The aspect was curious, each hut being built in a


86
A MALAY VILLAGE.
tree. At the point where the lower branches started
a platform was made; the tree above this was cut
down, and on the platform the hut was erected, access
being obtained to it by a ladder. Several of the
inhabitants were walking about; these, upon seeing
the lads, uttered cries of warning, and instantly flying
to the ladders, which were constructed of light bamboo,
climbed to the huts and raised the ladders after them.
Then at every door men appeared with bent bows and
pointed arrows threatening the invaders. Will had
cut a green bough, and this he waved as a token of
peace, while Hans threw up his hands to show that he
was unarmed. Then they bowed several times almost
to the ground, held out their arms with outstretched
hands, and finally sat down upon the ground.
The Malays apparently understood that their visitors
came in peace. They held a long conversation among
themselves, and at last the ladder of one of the huts,
which appeared larger and better finished than the
others, was lowered and four men descended. One of
these carried a kriss in his hand, his bow was slung
behind his back; the others kept their bows bent in
readiness for instant action.
The chief was a tall and well-built man of about
forty years of age. He, like his followers, was dressed
only in a loin-cloth; he had copper bracelets round his
wrists. As he approached, the lads rose and bowed
deeply; then Will held out to him the axe, and placing
it in his hand motioned to him that it was a present.


KINDNESS OF THE PEOPLE.
87
The chief looked pleased at the gift, placed his hands
on Will's shoulder and nodded, and performed the
same gesture to Hans; then he led them towards his
hut and motioned to them to sit down at the foot of
the tree.
Curious faces were watching from eveiy hut, and
as soon as it was seen that peace was established, the
ladders were lowered and a swarm of men, women,
and children soon surrounded the visitors. At the
chief's order a woman approached them bringing a
dish of food. This was composed, the boys found,
principally of birds cut up and stewed with some sort
of vegetable. The dish was by no means bad, and
after living for nearly a fortnight upon biscuit and
fruit, they much enjoyed it.
Presently women brought bundles of dried fern and
spread them at the foot of the tree, and soon after it
was dark the boys lay down upon them. It was long,
however, before they went to sleep; for the din and
chatter in the village continued until far into the night.
The lads guessed that the reason and manner of their
coming was warmly debated, and judged by their re-
ception that the prevailing opinions were favourable,
and that the visit from the two white men was con-
sidered to be a fortunate omen.
The next day they were again amply supplied with
food, and were constantly surrounded by a little group
of women and children, to whom their white skins
appeared a source of constant wonder. Their move-


88
A NIGHT ATTACK.
ments were entirely unchecked, and they were evi-
dently considered in the light of guests rather than
prisoners.
The next night the village retired to rest early.
The boys sat talking together for a long time, and
then lay down to sleep. Presently Will thought that
he heard a noise, and looking up saw in the moonlight
a number of savages stealthily approaching. They
carried with them ladders, and intended, he had no
doubt, to surprise the sleeping villagers. They were
already close at hand. Will shook Hans, who had
already gone off to sleep, and pointed out to him the
advancing foes. These were already in the village,
and separating, fixed a ladder against each of the huts.
So far the boys, who lay in the shadow of the hut, had
not been noticed. The Malays, who belonged to a
hostile village, began to climb the ladders, when the
lads, grasping the heavy sticks which they always
carried, and springing to their feet with loud shouts,
ran to the ladders before the Malays could recover from
their astonishment at the approach of the white-faced
men rushing upon them.
Half a dozen of the ladders were upset, the men who
had mounted them coming heavily to the ground.
Some of these as they rose at once took to their heels;
others, drawing their krisses, rushed at their assailants.
But the lads were no longer alone. At the first shout
the doors of the huts had opened, and the inhabitants
rushed out with their arms, the remaining ladders


DEFEAT OF THE ASSAILANTS.
89
were instantly overthrown, and a shower of arrows
poured upon their assailants.
Will and Hans knocked down the foremost of their
assailants, and the whole body, foiled in their attempted
surprise, discomfited at the appearance of the strange
white-faced men, and exposed to the arrows of the
defenders, at once darted away, several of their number
having already fallen under the shafts from above.
With exulting shouts the warriors of the village poured
down their ladders from the huts and took up the pur-
suit, and soon no one remained in the village save the
white lads and the women and children. Towards
morning the warriors returned, several of them bring-
ing with them gory heads, showing that their pursuit
had not been in vain.
The village was now the scene of great rejoicings;
huge fires were lighted, and a feast held in honour of
the victory. The chief solemnly placed the white men,
one on each side of him, and made them a speech, in
which, by his bowing and placing his hand on their
heads, they judged he was thanking them for having
preserved their village from massacre. Indeed, it was
clear, from the respectful manner of all towards them,
that they were regarded in the light of genii who had
come specially to protect the village from the assaults
of its enemies.
After the feast was over the chief, after a consulta-
tion with the rest, pointed to a tree close to that in
which his own hut was situated. The whole village


90
SNUGLY HOUSED.
set to work, ladders were fixed against it, and the men
ascending hacked away with krisses and stone hatchets
at the trunk. Hans, seeing their object, made signs to
the chief to lend him his axe, and ascending to the tree
set to work with it, doing in five minutes more work
than the whole of the natives employed could have
accomplished in an hour. After working for some
time he handed the axe to one of the natives, who con-
tinued the work.
The tree was not a large one, the trunk at this
point being about 18 inches in diameter. Half an
hour's work sufficed to cut it through, and the upper
part of the tree fell with a crash. In the meantime
the women had brought in from the forest a quantity
of bamboos, and with these the men set to work and
speedily formed a platform. Upon this a hut was
erected, the roof and sides being covered with palm-
leaves laid closely together, forming a roof impervious
to rain. Two large bundles of fern for beds were then
taken up, and the chief ascending solemnly invited
the boys to come up and take possession.
A woman was told off to prepare food for them and
attend to their wants, and by nightfall the lads found
themselves in a comfortable abode of their own. Pull-
ing up the ladder after the manner of the natives they
sat down to chat over their altered prospects. They
were now clearly regarded as adopted into the village
community, and need have no further fear as to their
personal security or means of living.


AN UNPLEASANT PROSPECT.
91
"For the time we are safe," Will said; "but as 1
don't want to turn Malay and live all my life with no
other amusement than keeping my own head on and
hunting for those of the enemies of the village, we
must think of making our escape somehow, though, at
present, I own I don't see how."


CHAPTER VI.
THE ATTACK ON THE VILLAGE.
DAY or two later a Malay ran at full speed
into the village, and said a few words
which caused a perfect hubbub of excite-
ment. The men shouted, the women screamed, and,
running up the ladders to their tree abodes, began
gathering together the various articles of value in
their eyes. The chief came up to the boys, and by
signs intimated that a large number of hostile natives
belonging to several villages were advancing to attack
them, and that they must fly into the interior.
This was very unwelcome news for the lads. Once
removed farther from the sea the tribe might not
improbably take up their abode there, as they would
fear to return to the neighbourhood of their enemies.
This would be fatal to any chance of the lads being
taken off by a passing ship.
After a few words together they determined to
oppose the movement. Will, in a loud voice and with
threatening gestures, intimated that he disapproved of
the plan, and that he and his companion would assist


PREPARATIONS FOR DEFENCE.
93
them in defending their village. The Malays paused
in their preparations. Their faith in their white
visitors was very great, and after a few minutes' talk
among themselves they intimated to the boys that
they would obey their orders. Will at once signed to
a few men to stand as guards round the village to
warn them of the approaching enemy, and then set the
whole of the rest of the population to work cutting
sharp-pointed poles, boughs, and thorny bushes. With
these a circle was made around the trees upon which
the village was built.
Fortunately the hostile Malays had halted in the
forest two or three miles away, intending to make
their attack by night; and as the news of their coming
had arrived at noon, the villagers had, before they
ceased work late in the evening, erected a formidable
hedge round the village. Some of the women had
been set to work manufacturing a number of torches,
similar to those used by them for lighting their dwel-
lings but much larger. They were formed of the
stringy bark of a tree dipped in the resinous juice
obtained from another. Will had one of these fastened
to each of the trees nearest to the hedge. They were
fixed to the trunks on the outside, so that their flame
would throw a light on the whole circle beyond the
hedge, while within all would be shadow and darkness.
It was very late before all preparations were com-
pleted. Will then placed a few men as outposts some
hundred yards in the forest, in the direction from


94
AWAITING THE ASSAULT.
which the enemy were likely to approach. They were
ordered to give the alarm the moment they heard a
noise, and were then to run in and enter the circle by
a small gap, which had been left in the abbatis for the
purpose. Many of the men then took their posts, with
their bows and arrows, in the trees near the hedge.
The others remained on the ground ready to rush to
any point assailed.
For several hours no sound, save the calls of the
night birds and the occasional distant howls of beasts
of prey were heard in the forest; and it was not until
within an hour of morning—the hour generally selected
by Malays for an attack, as men sleep at that time the
heaviest—that a loud yell at one of the outposts told
that the enemy were close at hand.
Two or three minutes later the scouts ran in, and
the gap through which they had entered was at once
filled up with bushes, which had been piled close at
hand for the purpose. Aware that their approach
was discovered, the enemy abandoned all further con-
cealment, and advanced with wild yells, intending to
strike terror into the defenders of the village. As
they advanced the torches were all lighted, and as the
assailants came within their circle of light a shower
of aiTows from the Malays on the ground and in the
trees above was poured into them.
Yells and screams told that the volley had been a
successful one; but, discharging their arrows in turn,
the Malays with demoniac yells rushed against the


THE ATTACK.
95
villaga The advance, however, was arrested suddenly
when they arrived at the abbatis. From behind its
shelter so deadly a rain of arrows was poured in that
they soon shrank back, and bounded away beyond the
circle of light, while taunting shouts rose from its
defenders.
For a time they contented themselves by distant
shouting, and then with a wild yell charged forward
again. Several dropped from the fire of arrows from
those in the trees and behind the abbatis; but, dis-
charging their arrows in return, the assailants kept on
until they again reached the impediment. Here they
strove furiously to break through, hacking with their
krisses and endeavouring to pull up the stakes with
their hands; but the defenders in the shade behind
sent their arrows so fast and thick that the assailants
again shrank back and darted away to shelter.
Throughout the night there was no renewal of the
attack, and in the morning not a foe was visible. Two
or three scouts went out to reconnoitre, but no sooner
did they enter the forest than one of them was shot
down and the rest sent flying back.
"I believe the scoundrels are going to try to starve
us out," Will said. "Let us speak to the chief and
ask how much provisions they have got."
After much pantomime Will succeeded in conveying
his meaning to the chief, and the latter at once ordered
all the inhabitants to produce their stock of food. This
was unexpectedly large, and Will thought that there


96
NO WATKR.
was sufficient for a fortnight's consumption. He now
made signs of drinking, but the reply to this was dis-
heartening in the extreme. A few gourds full of
water were brought forward, and two or three of the
close-woven baskets in which water is often carried in
this country: there was, in fact, scarce enough to last
the defenders for a day.
The stream from which the village drew itd supply
of water was about a couple of hundred yards away;
consequently the villagers fetched up their water as
they needed it, and no one thought of keeping a store.
Will looked in dismay at the smallness of the supply.
"If they really intend to starve us out, Hans, we
are done for. No doubt they reckon on our water
falling short. They would know that it was not likely
that there would be a supply here."
The natives were not slow to recognize the weak
point of their defence. One or two of the men, taking
water baskets, were about to go to the stream, but
Will made signs to the chief that they must not do
this.
The only hope was that the enemies would draw
off; but if they saw that water was already short, they
would be encouraged to continue to beleaguer the
place. Will was unable to explain his reasons to the
chief, but the latter seeing how great was the advantage
that they had already gained by following the counsel
of their white visitors in the matter of the hedge,
acquiesced at once in their wishes.


will's plan.
97
Will then ascended to one of the huts, and carefully
reconnoitred the whole ground. There was, he saw,
at the end farthest from the stream a slight dip in the
land extending into the forest. Beckoning the chief
to join him, he made signs that at night the warriors
should issue silently from the village at this point,
and make noiselessly through the wood; they would
then take a wide circuit till they came upon the
stream, and would then, working up it, fall upon the
enemy in the rear.
The chief was dubious, but Will made an imperative
gesture, and the chief in a humble manner agreed to
do as he was ordered. The day passed slowly, and
before nightfall the supply of water was entirely
finished. Once or twice scouts had gone out to see if
the enemy were still round the village, but returned
each time with the news that they were there.
The last time, just before nightfall, Will directed
two or three of them to take water-buckets, and to go
in the direction of the stream; signing to them, how-
ever, to return the moment they saw signs of the
enemy. They were soon back; and, as Will had ex-
pected, the sight of the water-buckets showed the
enemy that the garrison of the village were badly
supplied in that respect, and taunting shouts arose
from the woods asking them why they did not go
down to drink.
Will felt certain that the Malays would now draw
the greater part of their number down to the side of
Ci74) u


98
A NIGHT SORTIE.
the stream, and that there would therefore be the more
chance of the garrison making their way out at the
other end of the village.
Three hours after it was dark the chief mustered all
las men, they were about five-and-forty in all . Will
signed that each should take with him a water-basket
or large gourd, so that, in case they failed in defeating
the enemy and breaking up the blockade, they might
at least be able to bring a supply of water into the
village. Will then, with much difficulty, explained to
the chief that the old men, boys, and women remaining
in the village were, the moment they heard the sound
of the attack upon the enemy's rear, to shout and yell
their loudest, and to shoot arrows in the direction of
the enemy.
A few sticks had already been pulled up at the
point of the hedge through which Will intended to
make a sally, and the band now passed noiselessly out.
The chief himself led the way, the white boys following
behind him. Lying upon their stomachs they crawled
noiselessly along down the little depression, and in
ten minutes were well in the wood without having
met with an enemy, although they had several times
heard voices among the trees near them. They now
rose to their feet, and, making a wide detour, came
down, after a quarter of an hour's walk, upon the
stream. Here the gourds and baskets were filled; and
then, keeping along by the waterside, they continued
their march.


A SURPRISE.
99
Presently they saw a number of fires, round which
many Malays were sitting. They crept noiselessly up
until within a few yards, and then with a yell burst
upon the enemy. Numbers were cut down at once,
and the rest, appalled by this attack on their rear, and
supposing that the inhabitants of some other village
must have arrived to the assistance of those they were
besieging, at once fled in all directions. Those remaining
in the village had seconded the attack by wild shouts,
so loud and continuous that their besiegers had no
reason to suppose that their number had been weak-
ened.
For a few minutes the pursuit was kept up; then
the chief recalled his followers with a shout. The
water-baskets, many of which had been thrown down
in the attack, were refilled, and the party made their
way up to the village, where they were received with
shouts of triumph.
The panic of the Malays had been in no slight
degree caused by the appearance of the two boys, who
had purposely stripped to the waist, and had shouted
at the top of their voices, as, waving the krisses which
they had borrowed, they fell upon the foe.
The idea that white devils were leagued with the
enemies against them had excited the superstitious
fear of the Malays to the utmost, and when in the
morning scouts again sallied from the village, they
found that the enemy had entirely gone, the fact that
they had not even returned to carry off the effects


100
A TERRIBLE MESSAGE.
which had been abandoned in the first panic, showing
that they had continued their flight, without stopping,
to their distant villages.
The chief, like an able politician, took advantage of
the impression which his white visitors had created,
and the same day sent off messengers to the villages
which had combined in the attack against them, saying
that the white men, his guests, were very angry; and
that unless peace was made and a solemn promise given
that there should be no renewal of the late attempts,
they were going to lay a dreadful spell upon the vil-
lages. Women and children would be seized by disease
and the right arms of the warriors wither up.
This terrible threat carried consternation into the
Malay villages. The women burst into prolonged
wailings, and the bravest of the men trembled. The
messenger said that the white men had consented to
abstain from using their magical powers until the fol-
lowing day, and that the only chance to propitiate
them was for deputations from the villages to come in
early the next morning with promises of peace and
offerings for the offended white men.
It was not for some time afterwards that the lads
learned enough of the language to understand what
had been done, but they guessed (from the exidtation of
the chief and the signs which he made that their late
enemies would shortly come in, in an attitude of
humiliation) that he had in some way succeeded in
establishing a scare among them.


A SUBMISSIVE DEPUTATION.
101
On the following morning deputations consisting of
six warriors, and women bearing trays with fruit,
birds, and other offerings, arrived at the village. The
men were unarmed. At their approach the chief made
signs to the boys to take a seat at the foot of the prin-
cipal tree; and then, accompanied by his leading war-
riors, led the deputation with much ceremony before
them. The women placed their trays at their feet, and
the men addressed them in long speeches and with
many signs of submission. The boys played their part
well. As soon as they saw what was required of them
they signified with an air of much dignity that they
accepted the offerings, and then went through the
ceremony of shaking hands solemnly with each of the
warriors. Then they made a speech, in which with
much gesticulation they signified to the visitors that a
terrible fate would befall them should they again ven-
ture to meddle with the village.
Much awed and impressed the Malays withdrew. The
boys made a selection from the baskets of fruit for
their own eating, and then signified to the chief that
he should divide the rest among the inhabitants of the
village. When this was done the boys ascended to
their tree and passed the day there quietly, the vil-
lagers indulging in feasting, singing, and rejoicing over
their victory.
"The worst of all this is," Will said to Hans, "that
the more they reverence us, and the more useful they
find us, the more anxious they will be to keep us


102
NATIVE SUPERSTITION.
always with them. However, there is one comfort, we
are safe as long as we choose to remain here, and that
is more than we could have hoped for when we first
landed from the wreck. It is curious that the Malays,
who have no hesitation in attacking English ships and
murdering their crews, have yet a sort of superstitious
dread of us. But I suppose it is something the same
way as it was in England in the days of the persecution
of old women as witches: they believed that, if left to
themselves, they could cast deadly spells, and yet they
had no hesitation in putting them to death. I suppose
that it is something of the same feeling here."



CHAPTER VII.
THE FIGHT WITH THE PRAHUS.
ERY frequently, in the days that followed,
William Gale and his friend Hans talked
over the possibility of effecting an escape,
but the difficulties appeared almost invincible. The
various villages which, so far as the boys could under-
stand, were scattered at some distance apart, had little
dealings with each other, and indeed were frequently
engaged in feuds. The particular people with whom
they lived had nothing whatever to do with the sea.
They used—at least so the boys understood by their
signs—to fish at one time; but they had been robbed
of their boats and maltreated by some of the cruising
tribes who lived in villages on the coast or on creeks
and rivers.
The possibility of escape seemed small indeed. To
escape they must get on board a ship, and to do this
they must first go out to sea, and this could only be
done in a boat of their own or in one of the piratical
prahus. The latter course could not be thought of,
for the coast pirates were bloodthirsty in the extreme;


104
PLANS OF ESCAPE.
and even could they change their residence to one of
the sea-side villages, and gain the friendship of the in-
habitants, they would be no nearer to their end. For
as these go out to attack and not to trade with Euro-
pean ships, there would be no chance of escaping in
that way.
Upon the other hand, they might build a boat of
their own; but they considered it improbable that the
Malays would allow them to depart, for they evidently
regarded their presence as a prodigy, and revered
them as having miraculously arrived at the moment
when a great danger threatened the village; but, even
should they be allowed to build a boat and depart,
they knew not whither to go. They knew nothing of
navigation, and were ignorant of the geography of the
Archipelago, and the chances of their striking upon
the one or two spots where alone they could land with
safety were so small that it would be madness to under-
take the voyage.
For six months they lived quietly in the Malay
village. The people instructed them in the use of their
blow-guns, in which they are wonderfully skilful,
being able to bring down a bird sitting on a lofty
bough of a tree with almost an unerring accuracy. They
also taught them to shoot with the bow and arrow, and
they found that the natives used the roots of various
kinds of plants for food. The time did not pass un-
pleasantly, and had they known that it would last but
a few months only, they would have enjoyed it much.


THE FIRST STEP.
105
At last, after much deliberation, they determined
that they would, as a first step towards escape, con-
struct a little boat under pretence of wanting to fish.
Accordingly, one day when out with the chief and two
or three of his men in the direction of the sea, they
pointed there and signified that they wished to go
there, for they had picked up a good many Malay
words. The chief shook his head, but they insisted in
so authoritative a manner that he gave way and fol-
lowed them.
When they reached the shore they made signs that
they wanted to construct a boat. Again the chief shook
his head vehemently, and enforced his meaning by
pointing along shore and going through the action first
of rowing, then of fighting, intimating that they would
certainly be killed, if they ventured out, by the fierce
coast tribes. The boys nodded to show that they
understood what he wished to say; but pointing to
the water a few yards from shore, went through the
action of fishing; then, burdening themselves with
imaginary fish, they pointed to the village and showed
that they would supply it with food.
The Malays talked for some time among themselves.
They had so vast a respect for the white men that they
did not like to thwart their wishes. The thought too
of a supply of fish, of which they had been long de-
prived owing to their feuds with some of the coast vil-
lages, also operated strongly in favour of their yielding
an assent; and at last the chief made signs that he


106
MAKING A CANOE.
agreed, and pointing to the village intimated that as-
sistance should be given in building a boat.
The next day, accordingly, ten or twelve men came
down to the shore with them. A tree was felled,
the ends were pointed, and the whole formed roughly
into the shape of a canoe; fires were lighted on the
top, and by dint of flame and axe a hollow was dug
out. The operation lasted three days, the men having
brought provisions with them so as to avoid making
the journey—two and a half hours long—to and from
the village each day. The boat when finished was but
a rough construction, and would have excited the
mockery of any of the coast villagers, as they are
expert boat-builders; still, it was amply sufficient for
the purpose for which it was intended, namely, for
fishing inside the line of reefs.
It was heavy and paddled slowly, and the lads had
a strong suspicion that the Malays had purposely
made it more clumsy and unseaworthy than need be
in order that they should have no temptation to at-
tempt a distant journey in it. There was no diffi-
culty about lines, the Malays being skilled in making
string and ropes from the fibres of trees. The hooks
were more difficult; but, upon searching very carefully
along the shore, the lads found some fragments of one
of the ship boats, and in these were several copper
nails, which, hammered and bent, would serve their
purpose well. The lines were ready on the day the
canoe was finished, and as soon as she was launched the


SUCCESSFUL FISHING.
107
chief and one of the other Malays and the boys took
their seats in her.
The natives paddled her out nearly to the edge of
the reef; four lines, baited with pieces of raw birds'-
flesh, were thrown overboard. A few minutes passed
rather anxiously for the lads, who were most desirous
that the fishing should be successful so as to afford
them an excuse for frequently pursuing it. Then there
was a bite, and Hans, who held the line, found that it
taxed his strength to haul in the fish which tugged and
strained upon it. When it was got into the boat it
proved to be some fourteen pounds in weight. By
this time two of the other baits had been taken, and in
less than an hour they had caught upwards of thirty
fish, most of them of considerable size.
The natives were delighted; and, paddling to shore,
the burden was distributed among the whole party,
with the exception of the chief and the two whites.
Before starting, a young tree was cut down and chopped
into lengths of a few feet each, and on these rollers the
canoe was hauled high up the beach. Then the party
set out for the village, where their arrival with so
large a supply of food occasioned great rejoicing
After this the boys went down regularly every day
to fish. At first three or four of the natives always
accompanied them, under pretence of carrying back
the fish, but really, as they thought, to keep a watch
over them. To lessen their hosts' suspicions, sometimes
one or other stayed in the village. As time went on


106
LULLING SUSPICIONS.
the suspicion of the Malays abated. The number of
the guard was lessened, and finally, as the men disliked
so long a tramp, some of the boys were told off to ac-
company the white men and assist in bringing back
their fish. They were in the habit of starting soon
after daybreak, and of not returning till late in the
evening, accounting for their long absence by pointing
to the sun.
The fishing was always performed immediately they
reached the coast. When they had caught as many as
they and the boys could carry, these were placed in a
large covered basket, which was sunk in the water
close to the shore to keep the fish in good condition
until they started. Then they would paddle about
within the reef; or, during the extreme heat of the
day, lie in the boat, shaded by bunches of palm leaves.
The Malay boys, who were set on shore after the
fishing, were left alone, and amused themselves by
bathing, or passed the time asleep under the trees.
After the first day or two it had struck the boys
that it was dangerous to leave the canoe high on the
sand, as it would be observed even at a distance by a
passing prahu. Consequently, a deep trench had been
dug from the sea, far enough up to allow the canoe, when
floating in it, to lie below the level of the beach. Before
leaving her she was each day roughly covered with
sea-weed, and might therefore escape observation by
any craft passing at a short distance from the shore.
In their expeditions along the reef the boys dis-


A SAIL.
109
covered a passage through it. It was of about double
the width of a ship, and of amply sufficient depth to
allow a vessel of any size to cross. At all other points,
for a distance of a mile or two either way, which was
the extent of their excursions, the reef came very near
to the surface, its jagged points for the most part show-
ing above it.
Several months passed, and still no sail which pro-
mised a hope of deliverance had shown over the sur-
face of the sea. Scarce a day passed without their
seeing the Malay prahus passing up and down the
coast, but these always kept some distance out, and
caused no uneasiness to the fishermen. They had
during this time completed the hollowing out of the
boat, until her sides were extremely thin, and she was
so light that she could be paddled at a high rate of
speed.
They were both now expert with the paddle, and
felt that if in a light wind a vessel should be seen off
the coast, they would be enabled to row out and reach
her. It might be, they knew, months or even years
before such a ship could be seen. Still, as there were
many vessels trading among the islands, at any moment
an occurrence might arise.
One afternoon they had been dozing under their
leafy shade, when Will, who first awoke, sat up and
uttered a cry. Almost abreast of them, and but a
quarter of a mile outside the reef, was a large brig.
The wind was light, and with every stitch of canvas


110
CHASED BY PIRATES.
set she was making but slow progress through the
water.
Hans leaped up, echoed the cry, and, seizing their
paddles, they rowed with all their strengh away to the
opening through the reef, passed through, and headed
for the ship. They now saw what they had not at
first observed . At a distance of some three miles
astern were five large prahus with their sails set, and
the banks of oars rising and falling rapidly. The brig
was chased by the pirates. The boys rested on their
paddles for a moment
.
"They are more than a match for her, I am afraid,"
Will said. "What do you say, Hans, shall we go on
or not?"
Hans made no reply. He was never quick at coming
to a decision.
"We had better go," Will went on. "We can see
whether they mean to fight or not."
The boys were naked to the waist, for the thorns of
the forest had long since torn in pieces the shirts which
they had on when they landed from the wreck, and
their skins were bronzed to a deep copper colour.
Still they differed in hue from the natives of the
island, and the men on board the brig regarded them
with some surprise as they approached it.
"Throw us a rope!" Will shouted as they neared
her.
There was a cry of surprise from the crew at being
addressed in English, but a rope was thrown and the


LONG ODDS.
Ill
boys soon sprang on board. They saw at once that
the ship was an English one.
"Hallo! where do you spring from?" asked the
captain.
"We were shipwrecked here ten months ago," Will
said, "and have been living with the natives."
"At any other time I should have been glad to see
you," the captain said; "but just at present, if you
will take my advice, you will get into your canoe and
row on shore again. As you see," and he pointed to
the prahus, "we are chased; and although I mean to
fight to the last, for there is no mercy to be expected
from these bloodthirsty scoundrels, I fear the chances
are small."
Will looked round and saw that the six cannons
which the brig carried—for vessels trading in the
Eastern Archipelago are always armed—had already
been loosened ready for action, and that a group of
men were at work mounting a long gun which had
just been raised from the hold. Knowing the number
of men that the prahus carried Will felt that the
chance of a successful resistance was slight.
There were about eighteen men on deck, a number
larger than the brig would carry in other seas, but
necessary in so dangerous a trading ground as this.
The prahus, however, would each carry from eighty
to one hundred men, and these attacking at once from
opposite sides would be likely to bear down all opposi-
tion. Suddenly an idea occurred to him.


112
A VANTAGE POST.
"Look, sir, there is a passage through the reef there,
with plenty of water and width enough for your ship.
I can take her through. There is no other passage for
some distance. If you take her inside and lay her across
the channel the prahus can only attack on one side,
and you can place all your guns and strength there."
The captain at once saw the advantage of this
scheme.
"Capital!" he exclaimed. "Take the helm at once,
my lad. Ease off the sheets, men."
They were now nearly opposite the entrance, and
the light wind was blowing towards the shore. The
captain ordered all hands to reduce sail, only keeping
on enough to give the vessel steerage-way. Two boats
were lowered and an anchor and cable passed into
each, and as the brig passed through the opening the
rest of the sail was lowered.
The boats rowed to the reef, one on either side.
The anchors were firmly fixed into the rock, and one
being taken from the head and the other from the
stern, the crews set to work at the capstan and speedily
had the vessel safely moored, broadside on, across the
entrance to the reef.
The Malay boats were now about a mile astern.
They had ceased rowing when they saw the vessel
headed for the land, supposing that the captain was
about to run on shore. When, to their astonishment,
they saw her pass the reef with safety, they again set
to at their work. The guns were now all brought


THE ATTACK liV THK PRAHUS.
113
over to the side facing the entrance and were loaded
to the muzzle with bullets. A number of shots be-
longing to the long gun were placed by the bulwarks
in readiness to hurl down into the prafiua should they
get alongside.
The sailors, though determined to fight till the last,
had, when the boys came on board, been making their
preparations with the silence of despair. They were
now in high spirits, for they felt that they could beat off
any attempt of the enemy to attack them. When the
Malays were abreast of the ship they ceased rowing
and drew close together, and evidently held a consul-
tation.
The brig at once opened fire with her long gun, and
the first shot hulled one of the prahus close to the
water's edge.
"That's right, Tom," the captain said, "stick to the
same craft: if you can sink her there is one the less."
Several more shots were fired, with such effect that
the Malays were observed jumping overboard in great
numbers and swimming towards the other boats, their
own being in a sinking condition. The other four
prahus at once turned their heads towards shore, and
rowed with full speed towards the ship.
They knew that the entrance, of whose existence
they had been previously unaware, was an exceedingly
narrow one; and, as they neared the shore, could see
by the line of breaking surf that it could at most be
wide enough for one to pass at a time. Accordingly.
(274 ) II


114
A HEAVY CANNONADE.
one drew ahead, and discharging the cannon which it
carried in its bow, rowed at full speed for the entrance,
another following so close behind that its bow almost
touched the stern.
"Train the guns to bear on the centre of the channel,"
the captain said; "let the three bow-guns take the first
boat, the other three the second. Do you, Tom, work
away at the two behind."
The prahus came along at a great rate, the sweeps
churning up the water into foam. The leading boat
dashed through the channel, the sweeps grating on the
rocks on either side; her bow was but two yards dis-
tant from the side of the ship when the captain gave
the word. The three cannon poured their contents
into her, sweeping her crowded decks and tearing out
her bottom. Great as was her speed, she sank below
the water just as her bow touched the side of the ship.
Ten seconds later the command was a<rain given, and
a broadside as destructive was poured into the second
boat. The damage done was somewhat less, and her
bow reached the side of the ship.
A dozen Malays sprang on board as their boat sank
under their feet; but the sailors were ready, and with
musket, pistol, and cutlass fell upon them, and either
cut down or drove them overboard. The sea around
was covered with swimmers, but the ship was too
high out of the water for them to attempt to board
her, and the Malays at once struck out for the shore,
the sailors keeping up the musketry fire upon them


THE DEFEAT OF THE MALAYS.
115
until out of range. The other two boats had not fol-
lowed: the mate had plumped a shot from the long gun
full into the bow of the first; and, seeing the destruc-
tion which had fallen upon their leaders, both turned
their heads and made for sea, the mate continuing his
fire until they were out of range, one shot carrying
away the greater part of the oars on one side of the
boat previously struck.
When at a distance of upwards of a mile they ceased
rowing and for some time lay close together. The men
of the injured boat were observed to be stopping the
yawning hole in her bows a few inches above the water
level, the other started off at full speed up the coast.
It was now evening, and there was scarcely a breath
of wind. The men crowded round the lads and
thanked them warmly for having been the means of
saving them from destruction.
"I am afraid you are not out of danger yet," Will
said, as the captain shook him by the hand. "No doubt
that boat has gone off with the news, and before morn-
ing you will have half a dozen fresh enemies coming
down inside the reef to attack you."
"If we had but a breath of wind we might do," the
captain said.
"I fear you will have none before morning; then it
generally blows fresh for two or three hours. I don't
know how far it is to the village, which is the head-
quarters of the pirates. As far as I could make out
from the Malays with whom we have been living it is


116
THE PROSPECT OK ESCAPE.
about six hours' walking, but the boats will row twice
as fast as a man would walk through the forest. In
that case you may be attacked at two or three o'clock
in the morning, and you won't get the breeze till after
sunrise."
"Are there any other channels through the reef ("
the captain asked.
"I do not know," Will replied. "We have never
explored it very far either way; but as I should think
from the action of the Malays that they did not know
of this, they might not know of any other did it exist."
"Then," the captain said, "I will warp the brig out
through the channel again, and anchor her, stem and
stern, across it outside. They will find it as hard to
attack us there as they did before. Then, when the
breeze comes, we will slip our cable and run for it.
She is a fast sailer, and can, I think, get away from
the pirates even with their sails and oars; besides, by
shifting the long gun and two of the others to her
stern we can give it them so hot that even if they are
the fastest we may sicken them."
"I do not know, sir,'' Will said. "They would be
likely to hang about you until the breeze drops, and
then to attack you on all sides at once. If we could
but keep them from coming through the channel in
pursuit we should be safe."
"Ah! but how on earth are we to do that?" the cap-
tain asked.
William Gale was silent for a minute or tw o.


will's proposal.
117
"Have you plenty of powder on board the ship,
sir?"
"Plenty—we use it for barter."
"It seems to me"—Will went on—"that if, before
sailing, you could sink a couple of barrels of powder
in the channel, with a fuse to explode them a few
minutes after we had left, the Malays would be so
astonished at the explosion that they would not ven-
ture to pass through."
"Your idea is a capital one," the captain said warmly;
"but how about a fuse which would burn under water?
What do you think, Tom; could it be managed?"
"I should think so, sir," the mate answered. "Suppose
we take one of those empty 30-gallon beer casks, and
fill that up with powder—it will hold ten or twelve
of the little barrels; and then we might bung it up
and make a hole in its head. Over the hole we might
fix a wine-bottle with the bottom knocked out, and so
fastened with tow and oakum that the water won't
get in. Then we might shove down, through the
mouth of the bottle and through the hole below it into
the powder, a long strip of paper dipped in saltpetre
to make touch-paper of it. I don't know as a regular
fuse would do, as it might go out for want of air; but
there would be plenty to keep touch-paper alight . We
could sling three or four 18-pounder shots under the
bottom of the cask to make it sink upright. Just
before we slip our cables, we might lower it down with
the boats, lighting the fuse the last thing, and sticking


118
A TORPEDO.
in the cork. If we don't put too much saltpetre it
might burn for some minutes before it reached the
powder."
"It's worth trying, at any rate," the captain said,
"but I fear it would not burn long enough. I think
that, instead of a bottle, we might jam a piece of iron
tube, six or eight feet long, into the head of the cask,
and cut a bung to fit it. In that way we could get a
good length of fuse."
This plan was carried out. A large cask was filled
with powder, and an iron tube three inches in diameter
and six feet long, fitted into it, and made water-tight.
A long strip of paper, after being dipped in water in
which gunpowder had been dissolved, was then dried,
rolled tight, and lowered down the tube until it touched
the powder. A bung was cut to fit the top of the
tube, a piece of wash-leather being placed over it to
ensure its being perfectly water-tight; the top of the
fuse was then cut level with the pipe. Several bits of
iron were lashed to the lower end of the cask to make
it sink upright, and the cask was steadily lowered into
a -boat lying alongside the ship, in readiness for use.
The sailors entered into the preparations with the
glee of schoolboys, but the machine was not ready
until long after the ship had been towed out again
through the channel, and moored broadside to it just
outside.


CHAPTER VIII.
THE TORPEDO.
T was about two o'clock in the morning when
the watch awoke the crew with the news
that they could hear the distant sound of
oars coming along the shore. All took their places in
silence. After a time the rowing ceased and all was
quiet again. Half an hour passed and then there was
a slight sound close alongside, and in the channel they
could dimly make out a small boat which was rapidly
rowed away into the darkness again; several musket-
shots beinji fired after it.
"They have sent on ahead to find if we were lying
in the same berth," the captain said "I expect they
will be puzzled when they hear that we are outside
and that the entrance is guarded. I should not be
surprised if they did not attack before morning. They
had such a lesson yesterday, that I don't think they
will try to force the channel in our teeth again; but
will play the waiting game, sure that they will secure
us sooner or later."
So it turned out. The hours passed slowly on, but


120
THE PIUATE FLEET.
no sound was heard. Then in the dim morning light
a pirate fleet of eight prahus was seen lying at a
distance of half a mile within the reef. As the day
broke, the breeze sprang up, the sails were hoisted, and
the captain prepared to slip his cables. A similar
preparation could, through the glasses, be observed on
board the Malay fleet.
"That will do very well," the captain said. "Those
fellows will be along in about eight or ten minutes
after we have started, and the fuse, according to the
experiments we made as to its rate of burning, will
last about seven. Now, quick, lads, into the boat. Tom,
you take charge of the sinking."
In another minute the boat was rowed to the
channel and the cask lowered over the side. It was
held there for a minute while the mate struck a light
and applied it to the touch-paper. Then he pressed
the bung firmly into the top of the tube, the lashings
of the cask were cut, and the boat rowed back to the
ship. The anchors were already on board, and the brig
was getting way on her as the boat rowed alongside. The
men jumped on board, and the boat was suffered to tow
behind, while all hands set the whole of the sails. The
vessel was soon running briskly before the land-breeze.
The pirate fleet was instantly in motion. Every eye
in the ship was directed towards them.
"They will be there in less than ten minutes from
the moment I lowered the cask," the mate said, looking
at his watch.


122
WIT.T. GALE'S PLANS.
no pursuit, but, so long as they could be seen, remained
inactive near the scene of the sudden and, to them,
inexplicable catastrophe which had befallen their
consort. Once fairly freed from all fear of pursuit,
the captain invited the two lads into his cabin, and
there heard from them an account of all the adventures
through which they had passed. When they had
finished he questioned them as to their plans. Hans
said that he intended to take the first ship bound for
Holland.
"And you?" he asked Will.
"I have no particular plan," Will said. "I am in no
hurry to return to England, having no relatives there.
After being so long absent—for it is now a year since
I sailed from Yarmouth—I should not care to return
and take up my apprenticeship as a fisherman."
"Will you ship regularly on board the Sea Belle?"
the captain asked.
"Thank you, sir, I think I would rather not decide
upon anything until we get to Calcutta. I have £30
in money, £15 of which were given me on board the
Dutch ship, and the rest I received as wages for the
voyage from England to Java. I carried the money
in a belt round my waist, and have kept it ever since.
So I need not be in any great hurry to settle upon
what I shall do; but certainly, after a regular sea life,
I should not like to go back to being a fisherman. I
am now past sixteen, and in another three years
shall be able to earn more wages."


AT CALCUTTA.
123
"I should have taken you for at least two years
older," the captain said; "you are as big and strong
as many lads of eighteen."
"I have done a good lot of hard work in the last
two years," Will said; "for on board the Dutch ship,
although, of course, I was only rated as a boy, I used
to do man's work aloft."'
Other people would have been deceived as well as
the captain. Hard work and exposure to the air had
done much to age the boy. He had been tall and slight
for his age when he left the workhouse, and while he
had not ceased growing in height, he had widened out
considerably; and, had he asserted himself to be eigh-
teen years of age, few would have questioned the state-
ment.
The Sea Belle for some time kept south, touching at
some of the islands where a trade was done with the
Papuans; then her head was turned north, and after
an eventful voyage she reached Calcutta, where the
captain had been ordered to fill up with cotton or grain
for England.
The captain at once landed, and proceeded to the
office of the agent of the firm who owned the Sea Belle.
He was shown into that gentleman's private room,
where at the time two gentlemen were seated chatting.
The agent was personally acquainted with the captain,
and asked him to sit down and smoke a cigar.
"This is Captain Mayhew of the Sea Belle," he said
to his friends. "He has been trading for the last


124
THE "SEA BELLE'S" ADVENTURES.
three months down among the islands. These gentle-
men, Captain Mayhew, are Major Harrison and Captain
Edwards, who have just arrived from China with their
regiment in the Euphrates. Has your voyage been a
pleasant one, captain?"
"Pleasant enough, sir, on the whole; but we were
attacked by the Malay pirates, and I should certainly
not be here to tell the tale at present had it not been
for the quickness and shrewdness of a lad who had
been shipwrecked on the coast."
"How is that, Mayhew? Tell us all about it."
Captain Mayhew related the whole story of the fight
with the pirates, saying that, unquestionably, had it
not been for Will's pointing out the passage through
the reef in the first place, and his idea of burying a
submarine mine in the second, the Sea Belle would have
fallen into the hands of the pirates.
"But where did the boy spring from? how on earth
came he to be there?"
Captain Mayhew then related the story of William
Gale's adventures as he had them from his own lips.
"He must be a cool and plucky young fellow, in-
deed," Major Harrison exclaimed. "I should like to
see him. What style and type is he, captain? a rough
sort of chap?"
"By no means," the captain answered. "He is sur-
prisingly well-mannered. Had I met him elsewhere,
and in gentleman's clothes, I do not think that I should
have suspected that he was not what he appeared. His


AN INVITATION.
125
features, too, somehow or other, strike one as being
those of a gentleman; which is all the more singular
when, as a fact, he told me he had been brought up in
a workhouse."
"In a workhouse!" Major Harrison repeated. "Then
I suppose his parents were farm labourers."
"No," the captain answered; "he was left at the
door on a stormy night by a tramp who was found
drowned next morning in a ditch near. He had, when
found, a gold trinket of some kind round his neck;
and he tells me that, from that and other circum-
stances, it was generally supposed by the workhouse
authorities that he did not belong to the tramp, but
that he had been stolen by her, and that he belonged
at least to a respectable family."
"All this is very interesting," Captain Edwards said.
"I should like much to see the boy. Will you come and
dine with us this evening on board the Euphrates—
Mr. Reynolds here is coming—and have the boy sent
on board, say at nine o'clock, when we can have him
in and'have a chat with him?"
Captain Mayhew readily agreed. William was even
then waiting outside for him, having landed with him;
and the captain, when he entered the office, had told
him to walk about for an hour and amuse himself with
the sights of Calcutta and then return and wait for
him. He said nothing about his being close at hand,
as he did not wish the officers to see him in the rough
outfit which had been furnished him on board ship,


126
RECOGNITION OF SERVICES.
intending to surprise them by his appearance in decent
clothes. Accordingly, on leaving Mr. Reynolds' office
he took him to one of the numerous shops in the town
where clothes of any kind can be procured.
"Now, Will," he said, "I want you to get a suit of
shore-going clothes. You can get your sea outfit to-
morrow at your leisure; but I want you to show up
well at the mess this evening, and a suit of good clothes
will always be useful to you."
Captain Mayhew had intended to pay for the outfit
himself, but this Will would not hear of, and Captain
Mayhew was the less reluctant to let the lad have his
own way, as he had in the course of the interview
with the agent agreed that the lad's services deserved
a handsome recognition from the firm, and that the
sum of one hundred guineas should be given to him at
once. The agent felt no doubt that the firm would
thoroughly approve of the payment. Twenty pounds
were to be given to Hans for his share of the services;
but the two suggestions which had saved the Sea
Belle had both originated with Will.
By Captain Mayhew's advice Will purchased a suit
of dark-coloured tweed, a black tie, and some white
shirts and collars. At other shops he bought some
boots and a panama straw-hat. Having completed
their purchases they walked for some hours about Cal-
cutta, Will being delighted with the variety of the
native costumes and the newness and singularity of
everything which met his eye.


WILL IS "RIUGED OUT."
127
On their return to the ghaut, as the landing-stage
is called, they found their various purchases already
stowed in the Sea Belle's boat, which had about an
hour before come to shore to fetch them off. At
seven o'clock Captain Mayhew went off to the Eu-
phrates, leaving orders that the boat was to bring
Will over at nine. At that hour the lad was dressed
in his new clothes, which fortunately fitted him
well.
"By jingo, Will," the first mate said as he entered
the cabin, "you look a tip-topper, and no mistake."
The mate was right; the lad with his sun-burnt
face, quiet manner, and easy carriage, looked thoroughly
at home in his attire.
"I don't know who your parents were, but I would
bet a month's pay that the old tramp you were telling
us of had nothing to do with it; for you look every
inch a gentleman from head to foot."
Will found, on gaining the deck of the Euphrates,
that orders had been left by the officer in command
that he was to be shown into the saloon cabin upon
his giving his name to the sergeant, who came up at
the sentry's call. He was at once conducted below.
For a moment he felt almost bewildered as he entered;
the size of the cabin, the handsomeness of its fittings,
the well-laid table decked with fragrant flowers, so far
surpassed anything he had ever seen or thought of.
He was conducted to the head of the table, where
Major Harrison, with Mr. Reynolds on one hand and


128
THE MESS ON THE TROOPSHIP.
Captain Mayhew on the other, sat, near the colonel
commanding the regiment.
Captain Mayhew, who had already told the outline
of the story, smiled quietly to himself at the expres-
sion of surprise which crossed the faces of the major
and Mr. Reynolds, as well as of the other officers sit-
ting near, at the appearance of the lad he introduced
to them. The colonel ordered a chair to be placed
next to himself, and told the servant to fill a glass of
wine for Will, and entered into conversation with him.
"I think, gentlemen," he said after a minute or two,
seeing that the lad did not touch the wine that was
poured out for him, " it will be pleasanter on deck; for
it is terribly hot here, and 1 see that most of you
have finished your wine." An adjournment was at
once made to the deck. Here cigars were lighted, and
the colonel and senior officers taking their places in
some of the easy-chairs which were still about, the rest
gathered round to hear the story, which Major Harri-
son had promised them would be an interesting one.
Captain Mayhew first gave his account of the fight
between the Sea Belle and the pirates, beginning at
the point when, as he was hotly chased and despairing
of making a successful defence, the canoe with the two
lads in it came out to him. Then Will was called upon
to explain how he came to be there at that moment.
He told briefly how the fishing-smack was sunk, how
he had saved himself by clinging to the bob-stay
of the Dutch Indiaman, and how he had sailed in this


INTERESTED AUDITORS.
129
vessel to Java, and was on his way in her to China,
when wrecked in the cyclone. Here his audience in-
sisted upon his giving them full details; and he ac-
cordingly told them the manner in which he and a few
of the crew had escaped; how, when they were build-
ing a boat, they had been attacked by Malays, and all
—except another lad and himself, who were hiding in
a tree—were massacred by the pirates; how they had
gone inland to a village, where, having aided the
natives when attacked by a hostile tribe, they had
been most kindly received; how they had finally ob-
tained a canoe and spent their time in fishing in hopes
of seeing a passing sail, until the Sea Belle, chased by
the Malay pirates, had appeared off the shore.
There was a genuine murmur of approval from those
thickly clustered round as the lad finished his story,
and the colonel warmly expressed his approval of his
conduct under such exciting circumstances.
"What are you going to do now?" he asked.
"I have not made up my mind, sir," the lad said. "I
expect that I shall ship in some vessel sailing for Eng-
land shortly."
"Major Harrison," the colonel said, "will you and
Captain Mayhew come with me to my cabin? I should
like to have a few minutes' private chat with you,"
he went on, putting his hand on Will's shoulder. A
minute or two later the three gentlemen and Will were
seated in the private cabin.
"Look here, my boy," the colonel said; "I have
(274) * * I


130
A KIND OFFER.
heard from Major Harrison what you had told Captain
Mayhew concerning your birth; and certainly your
appearance and manner go far to sustain the belief
that the tramp who left you was not your mother, and
that your parents were of gentle birth. I do not say
that a man's birth makes much difference to him; still,
it does go for something, and in nine cases out of ten
the difference both in face and figure is unmistakable.
Unless I am very wrong your father was a gentleman.
However, that is not to the point: it is your quickness
and activity, your coolness in danger, and the adven-
tures which you have gone through which interest us
in you. Now I think it is a pity that a lad who has
shown that there is so much in him should remain a
sailor before the mast. You have not been so long at
sea as to become wedded to it, and to be unable to
turn your hands to anything else. Now, what do you
say to enlisting? In the ranks are men of all sorts—
gentlemen, honest men, and blackguards. The steady
respectable man is sure to rise. You can, the captain
tells me, read and write well. There is a chance of
active service at present, and when there is active ser-
vice a man who distinguishes himself gets rapid pro-
motion . The regiment land to-morrow and go straight
through by train to the North. There is trouble in
Afghanistan, and an ultimatum has just been sent to
the Ameer that if he does not comply with our terms
it will be war, and we hope to be there in time for the
beginning of it. I can only say, that if you like to join,


132
SMOOTHING WILLS WAY.
William Gale left the cabin with a new prospect of
life before him. He had of late rather shrunk from
the thought of again taking his place as a ship-boy;
and the prospect of adventures, to say nothing of the
advancement which might befall him through the in-
terest taken in him by the colonel, was delightful to
him.
The last words the colonel had said when he left the
cabin were: "Say nothing about the workhouse, and
as little as possible of anything which happened before
you were wrecked on the island, in the barrack-room."
When William and Captain Mayhew had left the
cabin Colonel Shepherd sent for Sergeant Bingwood.
"Sergeant," he said, "a young fellow will come on
board to-morrow at eight o'clock to join the regiment
as a recruit. Take him at once to the surgeon and get
him passed. I know we shall be able to give him but
little drill before we get to the frontier; but do all you
can for liim and I will make it up to you. He is a
smart young fellow, and I have a good deal of interest
in him. He was on his way to China and was wrecked
among the Malays, and has gone through a good deal.
Finding himself here with nothing to do, and with a
prospect of active service on the frontier, he has decided
to enlist; and, as he is a gallant young fellow, I do not
wish to balk his fancy."
The sergeant saluted and took his leave, impressed
with the idea—although the colonel had not said so—
that the new recruit was a young gentleman who had


134
A JOURNEY BY TRAIN.
form was served out to him, and the usual articles of
kit. The sergeant saw that his belts were put on pro-
perly and his knapsack packed; and half an hour after-
wards he fell in, with his musket on his shoulder,
among the troops paraded on the deck of the Euphrates
prior to embarkation.
So quickly had it all been managed that Will could
hardly believe that he was awake, as, feeling strangely
hampered by his belts and accoutrements, he descended
the accommodation ladder and took his place with his
new comrades on board one of the great native boats
and rowed to the shore.
The regiment was marched direct to the railway-
station, where the heavy baggage had been sent on the
previous day. The men took their places in the long
train which stood in readiness, and half an hour later
steamed north from Calcutta.
Hitherto none of his comrades had spoken to Will.
In the bustle of landing all had enough to do to look
to themselves, and it was not until he found himself
with eight comrades and a corporal in the railway-
carriage that he was addressed.
"Well, young 'un," one said, "what's yer name, and
where do you come from? Calcutta isn't much of a
place for recruiting."
"I was on my way to China," Will replied, "and
got wrecked among the Malays; then I got picked up
by a vessel, and we had some hot fighting. Then I
was landed at Calcutta, and seeing nothing much to do,


A POPULAR CHARACTER.
135
and hearing that there was a chance of a fight with the
Afghans, I thought the best thing to do was to enlist.
My name is William Gale."
"I wasn't quite sure that you were an Englishman;
you are pretty nigh as dark as them copper-coloured
niggers here."
"So would you be," Will laughed, "if you had been
living, as I have, for ten months among savages without
even a shirt to your back."
"Tell us all about it," the soldier said. "This is a
bit of luck, mates, our having someone who can tell us
a tale when we have got such a long journey before us."
Will made his story as full as he could, and it lasted
a long time. When it was finished the men expressed
their opinion that he was a good sort; and Will having
handed over to the corporal a sovereign to be expended
on drinks by the way, as his footing in the regiment, he
became quite a popular character, and soon felt at home
in his new position.


CHAPTER IX.
THE ADVANCE INTO AFGHANISTAN.
HERE was but little talking in the middle
of the day in the train, for the heat was
excessive. All the men had taken off their
coats and sat in their shirt-sleeves. But they were,
nevertheless, bathed in perspiration. Late at night the
train arrived at Allahabad. Here there was a stop till
morning. The men alighted from the train, and lay
down on their folded blankets, with their knapsacks
for pillows, on the platform or in the waiting-rooms.
A plentiful supply of water had been prepared for their
use at the station, and outside were several water-
carriers, and many of the men stripped off their shirts
and had water poured over their heads and bodies.
Will Gale was among these, and, greatly refreshed,
he enjoyed some fruit and cakes which he purchased
from native vendors; and then lying down on a bench
in the station was soon asleep. Four days' travelling
brought them to the end of the railway. They were
ferried across the Attock, and then their real work
began.


A HOT MARCH.
137
Although it was now late in September the heat was
still intense. Tents were struck an hour before day-
break, and by eleven o'clock each day the column
was at its halting-place. It was, however, hours before
the tents and baggage arrived. Many of the draft
cattle were very poor, forage was scarce, and the ar-
rangements far from good. The consequence was that
great numbers of the oxen broke down and died, and
many of the troops were often obliged to sleep in the
air owing to the non-arrival of their tents. The defects
of the transport were aggravated as the time went on,
and the Norfolk Rangers fared much better than some
of the troops which followed them.
The regiment was destined to operate in the Khuram
valley under the command of General Roberts. The
advanced column of this division consisted of the 7th
company of Bengal Sappers, the 23d Bengal Pioneers,
a battery of horse artillery, one of Royal Artillery, and
two mountain batteries, a squadron of the 10th Hussars,
and the 12th Bengal Cavalry. The first brigade of
infantry comprised the 2d battalion of the 8th Foot,
the 29th Bengal Native Infantry, and the 5th Pun-
jaub Infantry. The second brigade consisted of the
72d Highlanders, the 21st Native Infantry, the 2d
Punjaub Infantry, and the oth Goorkhas. The place of
assembly was Kohat. The Norfolk Rangers were to
act as a reserve.
It was on the 2d of October that the Rangers ar-
rived at Kohat, heartily glad that their march across


138
HEAVY DRILL.
the sandy plains of the Punjaub was at an end. The
other regiments comprising the force poured in rapidly,
and on the 9th the general arrived and assumed the
command. The next day the Punjaub regiments were
sent forward to Thull. It was not until the middle of
November that the European regiments followed them,
and the six weeks were by the Rangers for the most
part employed in drill; for, after their voyage and
journey up the country, their commanding officer con-
sidered it necessary to work them hard to get them to
the highest state of discipline.
William Gale was worked exceptionally hard, as he
had in that short time to learn the manual and "platoon
exercises, and to pick up enough of drill to enable him
to take his place in the ranks. Fortunately he carried
himself well and required far less drilling than the
majority of the recruits. By the time that the regi-
ment moved forward he was able to take his place in
his company, and had mastered all the movements
which were likely to be necessary in the campaign.
The road between Kohat and Thull runs in a valley
between mountains, those on the right being inhabited
by the Waziries, a fierce and independent tribe. The
regiment which had first marched had exercised every
precaution against an attack. The convoys of stores
and provisions sent forward had always been accom-
panied by strong escorts, and orders were issued that
officers going forward on duty should not travel without
protection. The Waziries, however, contrary to expec-


ON THE MARCH.
139
tation, remained quiet, probably waiting to see the
turn which matters took; for had we suffered a repulse
they would assuredly have taken part at once against
us, and would have aided in massacring fugitives and
robbing baggage-waggons.
The march to Thull occupied five days, which were
very pleasant ones to William Gale. His heavy work
at drill was now over: he was no longer considered a
recruit, but ranked as a soldier. The marches were not
long, and for many hours in the afternoon the high
hills threw the valley in shade; and the soldiers, after
pitching their tents, were able to stroll about or to lie
under the trees in which the valley abounded. The
regiment reached Thull on the 18th of November, and
on the morning of the 21st the column advanced.
The river, whose bed was 500 yards wide, was for-
tunately now low, being reduced to a stream of 40
yards wide by 3 deep. A trestle-bridge had been
thrown across it for the use of the infantry. The river
was distant a mile and a half from the town. No op-
position was expected; but as a small Afghan garrison
was stationed in a fort at Kapizang, a short distance
beyond the river, an attempt was to be made to cap-
ture it. The 29th Punjaub Infantry first crossed the
river at the bridge. The 10th Huzzars forded the
river and extended in skirmishing order to cut off the
retreat of the garrison. When they reached the fort,
however, which was a square inclosure with round
towers at the corners, it was found that the garrison,


140
ACROSS THE AFGHAN FRONTIER.
who had doubtless received warning from spies in Thull,
had abandoned the place in the night.
The cavalry were now sent forward to reconnoitre,
the infantry following, and the advanced force halted
at Ahmed-I-shama for the night. Not a single habi-
tation was passed during the nine miles march. The
road was generally a mere track, 6 feet wide, passing
through tangled brakes of dwarf palms, intersected by
stony gullies except when it ran along the steep bank
of the river.
The following day the rest of the first brigade
marched up to Ahmed-I-shama, while the advanced
force under Colonel Gordon moved on to Hazir-pir.
The Rangers were with the first brigade, but not with
the advanced party. This was composed wholly of
native troops, consisting of the Pioneer regiments and
the Sappers and Miners; these had hard work, for the
road, which was fifteen miles in length, was scarcely pas-
sable for wheeled carriages, and the guns could not be
taken along until the boulders and blocks of stone
which strewed the way were removed or blasted into
pieces.
On the 23d the Rangers, with the Horse Artillery
battery and two native regiments, marched towards
Hazir-pir; but the difficulties of the road were so great
that they had to camp for the night four miles short
of that place. General Roberts and the headquarters
went forward the same day.
As the general passed along the road the head-men


THE KHURAM VALLEY.
141
of all the villages near came and paid their respects, and
the villagers lined the roads as the troops passed, offer-
ing fowls, eggs, milk, and dried fruit for sale. As
William Gale had brought a supply of money with him,
he was able to indulge in all those luxuries; and, indeed,
as the men had had few opportunities of spending
money at Thull, all were well supplied with cash. The
halt at Hazir-pir was then a very pleasant one. Sup-
plies of grass, fuel, and provisions were brought in in
considerable quantities there; but much difficulty arose
in settling the terms of purchase, as coin was almost
unknown in the valley, and therefore there was no
established price; one native being ready to sell for a
few coppers, articles for which another demanded as
many pieces of silver. On the hills around a consider-
able number of sheep were seen grazing, but the natives
did not care about selling these, which indeed be-
longed for the most part, not to the Turis, the tribe
which inhabit the valley, but to nomad Ghilzais, who,
like the Swiss shepherds, move about with their
charges among the mountains wherever fodder is to be
obtained. Khuram valley itself is bare and monoto-
nous. With the exception of fruit-trees planted round
the villages, scarce a tree is to be found; but each vil-
lage is marked by a huge chunar or oriental plane, be-
neath which the villagers rest during the noonday heat.
But if the valley itself was bare and desolate, the
scenery around was lovely. The great range of moun-
tains known as the Safaid-Koh bound the valley on


142
A STONY VALLEY.
the east and north. This range averages 14,000 feet
high, from which spurs run out at right angles, in-
closing narrower valleys with broiling torrents rushing
through boulders. The slopes of these valleys are
covered with luxuriant vegetation till the limit of trees
is reached at a height of about 11,000 feet, above
which in winter the snow lies thick, while in summer
it furnishes the finest pasture to the Ghilzai flocks and
herds.
The valley lands and the lower slopes of the hills
are laid out in terraces, and irrigated rice-fields extend
near the rivers. Valley and hill are alike covered
with stones and boulders, Afghanistan being probably
the most stony country in the world.
On the 24th the headquarters with the cavalry and
two regiments moved forward ten miles and encamped
at the south end of the Darwazi Pass, the road leading
to open broad valleys covered with dwarf palms and
wholly uncultivated. On the 25th the advanced force
crossed the pass, which was a gentle slope and offered
no great difficulty, and at night encamped at the
Khuram fort, which had been evacuated by the enemy.
The buildings, which would have been useful for the
troops, had however been wrecked by the Turis, who
have a deadly hate for the Afghans their masters, and
who were also animated in their work of destruction
by a desire to obtain wood, which is exceedingly scarce
there.
At Khuram there are two forts, the one 120 yards


RECONNOITRING.
143
and the other 100 yards square. Inside these were
quarters for the governor, and huts for the garrison
and officers, and in the smaller forts were stables for
the cavalry forces. This place was made the head-
quarters of the forces in the Khuram valley. The
general now rode on with two squadrons of the 12th
Bengal Cavalry to reconnoitre in the direction of the
Peiwar-Khotal, towards which the enemy were sup-
posed to be retreating, and where they were expected
to make a stand. As they approached the village of
Peiwar two villages were seen in flames, and news
was brought in that three Afghan regiments, with
twelve guns, had lately passed through.
The natives reported that they were encumbered by
their guns, and that forced labour was procured for
the purpose of removing them. Later on a rumour
came that the twelve guns were stuck in the ravine at
the foot of the Khotal or pass.
With but a small force of cavalry at his command
the general could do nothing, and so returned to
Khuram and determined to hurry up the troops faster
than he had intended so as to capture the guns re-
ported—as was afterwards proved falsely—to have
been left behind by the Afghans. The sick and all
superfluous baggage were left behind at Khuram, and
on the 28th the troops moved at daybreak, the two
brigades marching in parallel columns.
The cold was now severe at night although it was
hot in the daytime. It had been intended to halt at


144 THE ADVANCE TOWARDS THE PASS.
Halid-Kitta, four miles from the Khotal; but the intel-
ligence arriving that the Ameer's troops had aban-
doned their guns and were in disorderly retreat, de-
cided the general to push forward at once to the Pei-
war-Khotal, seven miles further, instead of waiting
and giving the enemy time to strengthen their position.
A mile from the foot of the actual ascent of the Khotal
lies the village of Turrai, two miles and a half beyond
Peiwar. Turrai is situated in a valley, the ground at
whose entrance is very much broken up by the shoul-
ders and spurs of the hill. The left column—the
5th and 29th Punjaub in advance, with the 2d bat-
talion of the 8th, and the 23d Pioneers, the Rangers,
and two guns of the No. 1 mountain battery in support
—were sent to the left with instructions to turn a ridge
forming the south boundary of the valley, and to seize
the village of Turrai. They were also to follow up
closely any body of retreating Afghan troops that they
might come across. The light brigade were to march
up the regular road to the Peiwar, thus supporting the
attack of the left brigade.
The left brigade followed out its orders, except that
the regiment in support did not go round the southern
side of the spur, but kept to the north. No enemy was
seen on the south side of the spur, so when a track
leading across to Turrai was reached the troops moved
down towards the village, the regiments in support
advancing at the foot of the open on the north side.
The mountain path that the advanced troops were now


THE SKIRMISH AT TURRAI.
145
filing down did not lead directly to the village, but
fell into the valley ahead of it at a point where it
widens out into what was known as the "punch-bowl
valley" at the foot of the Peiwar-Khotal.
As soon as the head of the column reached this spot
they came in sight of the Afghans, who showed them-
selves in great numbers on the crest of the mountain
far above their heads. As the troops had no orders to
attack so formidable a position, they fell back towards
Turrai, which was about a quarter of a mile to the
rear. At the sight of this movement the Afghans
swarmed down a spur of the hill and commenced an
attack on the regiments that were moving towards the
village. The 29th Punjaubees climbed the hill, and a
sharp skirmish ensued, the two mounted guns coming
into action.
While this was going on, the main body of the troops
arrived at Turrai. The advanced troops were recalled
and the 5th Ghoorkas were advanced to cover the move-
ment. As it was now seen that the story of the aban-
donment of the guns was false, orders were given to
pile arms in the village and to encamp there. This
step was an imprudent one, as the Afghans speedily
showed. While our men were sitting or lying upon
the ground waiting for the baggage to arrive the
Afghans brought up a mountain-gun from the main
ridge, about three-quarters of a mile distant, to the
point of the spur overlooking the village of Turrai, and
opened fire at 1700 yards range.
(274) K


146
SHELLED OUT OF CAMP.
The astonishment of the troops when the first shell
fell among them was great. Every one jumped to his
feet and seized his rifle, and the guns of the Royal
Horse Artillery were brought at once into action. It
was four o'clock in the afternoon when the Afghans
opened fire. Had they waited for a few hours, brought
up another gun or two, and made a night attack imme-
diately after opening fire, it is morally certain that the
imprudence of camping in such a position would have
been punished by a disaster which might have vied
with that of Isandula. Huddled together in a small
village surrounded by scrub, and impeded as the troops
would have been by the baggage animals and native
followers rushing in terror in all directions, our men
would have been taken at an immense disadvantage.
Fortunate was it that the enemy opened fire before the
darkness set in. The troops were at once ordered to fall
back a mile and a half and to pitch on fresh ground.
There was much confusion in the retreat, as the road
in the rear was crowded with the baggage animals.
The spot chosen for the camp was a rough one, for the
ground was covered with scrub and a scattered growth
of hill oak and thorny bushes, and was broken by the
remains of some ancient terraces, but as the jungle and
broken ground extended for three and a half miles,
there was nothing for it but to take up the best posi-
tion possible under the circumstances. The troops
bivouacked on the ridge of a ravine with steep banks
which formed a line of defence in front of the camp,


A WRETCHED NIGHT.
147
while the view in every other direction was obscured by-
trees. The regiments passed a wretched night on the
rough ground. Most of them were unable to find their
baggage, which was wandering in the scrub in the dark,
and the greater part of the troops lay down on the
bare ground and went supperless to sleep after their
fatiguing march of twenty-one miles.
In the morning both men and cattle were greatly
exhausted by their long marches and almost sleepless
nights, and General Roberts determined to wait for a
day or two to reconnoitre the formidable position of
the enemy before undertaking its attack. The camp
was shifted to a more secure site, the brushwood and
trees were cleared away, the tents pitched, and the
troops were again comfortable.
A reconnaissance was made by Colonel Perkins,
commanding the Royal Engineers, with two companies
of the Pioneers. He ascertained that a deep ravine
lay between the ridge on which they were encamped
and the Khotal itself, and that it was impossible to
direct an attack on that side. Major Collett also, with
two companies of the 23d, proceeded to reconnoitre the
route known as the Spingawi or Cow Pass. This, in-
stead of going straight up the hill in front, wound
round its foot to the right of the valley.
Ascending the mountain at a point some three or
four miles to the east of the Peiwar-Khotal, the recon-
naissance reached the summit of a ridge about five
miles distant from the camp and overlooking the


148
THE SPINGAWI PASS.
Spingawi-Khotal. It was ascertained that the road
up the pass seemed easy and practicable for all arms,
that the top of the pass appeared to be on the same
ridge as the Peiwar-Khotal, and that a force working
from it towards the Peiwar would pass over a series of
dominating positions. It did not appear to Major
Collett that the enemy held the Peiwar-Khotal in force,
although there was a gun on a commanding knoll on
the south, and there seemed to be one at the top of the
pass. The road from the village of Peiwar to the top
of the Spingawi Pass seemed perfectly easy for troops
of all arms.
The next two days were spent in clearing the camp,
and so far as possible improving its military position;
but it was still surrounded by thick oak jungle, which
would have afforded cover for an enemy making a
sudden attack. A further reconnaisance was made of
the Spingawi Pass, and as the examination confirmed
Major Collett's report it was determined to attack by
it. Orders were issued on the 1st of December for a
march that night. The regiments which were to form
the main attack by the Spingawi plateau route were
the 29th Punjaub Infantry and the 5th Ghoorkas, com-
manded by Colonel Gordon in advance; these were to
be followed by the mountain battery, a wing of the
72d Highlanders, a company of the Rangers, the 2d
Punjaubees, and the 23d Highlanders, under Brigadier-
general Thelwell. Four guns on elephants were to
proceed with the column. The 5th Punjaub Infantry,


A WELL-KEPT SECRET.
149
the 8th Eegiment, two guns Royal Horse Artillery,
three guns Royal Artillery, and the 5th Bengal Cavalry,
the whole under the command of Brigadier-general
Cobbe, were to make an attack on the Peiwar-Khotal
direct.
The rest of the force was to remain to guard the
camp, and in order to convince the enemy that a front
attack upon the Peiwar-Khotal was intended, a party
of pioneers with an engineer officer, and a covering
party of the 8th Regiment, were to construct a battery
near the village of Turrai. Frequent reconnoitring
parties had also been sent out in this direction, and so
well was the secret of the general's intention to attack
by the Spingawi Khotal kept that everyone in camp
who had not been let into the secret was confident that
the Peiwar-Khotal would be stormed on the morrow.
The enemy, although those in camp were ignorant of
the fact, were reinforced on the 1st by four regiments
of infantry with a mountain battery, and on their side
were meditating an attack upon the British camp.
The regiments which had freshly arrived were, how-
ever, fatigued by their long march, and the assault on
our camp was postponed until the next day, and the
chance of its coming off was therefore lost for ever. To
William Gale's great satisfaction a company of the
Rangers, that to which he had been posted, was the one
selected by the colonel to accompany the column march-
ing up the pass. He did not indeed know that this
was the route by which they were to advance, but he


150 THE EVE OF THE CONFLICT.
was pleased at not being left behind with the regiment
in charge of the camp.
"Well, young 'un," a corporal said to him that even-
ing, "we are going to be under fire at last, and a nice
climb we shall have of it; it puts one out of breath to
look at that steep road running up the hill, and when
it comes to fighting one's way up it, with cannon and
Afghans on the top, we shall find it hard work."
"I expect," William answered, " that we shan't go up
it at any extraordinary pace; if we skirmish up, as I
expect we shall, from rock to rock, we shall have plenty
of time to get our wind at each halt. We are not to
take our knapsacks, so we shall fight light, and we
have not much extra weight to carry. What with the
heat and what with the long marches, I should think
I must have lost a stone in weight since we landed in
Calcutta."
"I don't think you have lost weight at all," the cor-
poral said; "it seems to me that you have grown and
widened out in the two months; and only yesterday,
when I was sizing the company, I had to move you two
men higher; for a young 'un you stand the fatigues
well."
"I am all right," Will said, "except that I have got
some frightful blisters on my feet. I was not going to
say anything about it, because I should have been kept
in hospital and left behind at Khuram, but I have
hardly known how to march the last few days. I
don't think I could possibly have managed it if I had


A NIGHT MARCH.
153
and are going to work round somehow and take them
in rear."
"Well, I hope whoever is acting as guide can see
better in the darkness than I can, else we are safe to
lose our way, and may find ourselves anywhere in the
morning. Confound it!" the exclamation was elicited
by the speaker stumbling over a boulder and nearly
going on to his head.
"Silence in the ranks there!" an officer said close by.
Each regiment was followed by its ammunition
mules and hospital doolies, the latter being covered
stretchers or palkies carried by natives; besides these
were dandies or chairs slung upon mules. This greatly
added to the difficulty of a night march; for, even in
the daytime the presence of baggage animals in a
column upon a narrow road greatly hinders the troops,
and at night the delays occasioned by them are natur-
ally very much greater. For the first three and a half
miles the column marched away from the enemy upon
the Khotal, and the surprise of the soldiers increased
at every step they took.
At the end of that time they arrived at the village
of Peiwar. Here they turned to the left, and after
crossing several ravines and stony water-courses, ar-
rived on a cultivated terrace and kept along this till
they reached a very stiff nullah twenty feet deep. The
night was bitterly cold, the bank of the nullah was
extremely slippery, and the boulders in the water-
course below coated with ice, the difficulty of getting


154
TROUBLES IN THE DARK.
the loaded animals across in the darkness was therefore
very great. The passage of the various water-courses
caused great delays, and it was difficult to keep the
column together in the dark. At each passage the
rear was immensely delayed while the leading troops
were passing, and these again had to be halted while
those behind them struggled over the difficulties.
The men suffered much from cold, as the pace was
so slow that they could not warm themselves, and the
mounted officers specially suffered in their hands and
feet. At midnight the ravine leading up to the Spingawi
Pass was reached; but so dark was it that the 2d Pun-
jaubees, separated by a few yards from the regiment
in front of them, marched straight on instead of turn-
ing up it; and the 22d Pioneers and the four artillery
guns carried on elephants, being behind them, naturally
went astray also.
Brigadier-general Thelwall, who commanded the
column, was at the head of his brigade, and was for
some time unaware of the absence of two of his regi-
ments; but, after halting and finding that they did
not come up, sent back a mounted officer, who, after a
two-mile ride, came up with the missing troops and
guided them back to the point where they had left the
route.
From the foot of the ravine to the top of the pass is
six miles in distance; and, dark as it was in the open,
it was still more so in the ravine shadowed by the
steep hills on either side. As the ascent continued


TREACHEROUS SHOTS.
155
the road became worse, the boujders being larger, and
the holes and dried-up pools deeper. The darkness
and the prevailing white colour of the stones prevented
the difference of level being observed, and many of the
men had heavy falls, as the steep sides of these pools
were often from two to four feet deep.
After marching for a mile and a half up the ravine
the report of a rifle was heard in the ranks of the
29th Punjaubees, who were leading the column, fol-
lowed instantly by another discharge. Colonel Gor-
don commanding the regiment halted, and he and the
general tried in vain to discover who had fired. No
one could or would identify them, and this seemed
clearly to prove that the rifles had been fired as a signal
to the enemy, for they had not been loaded before the
column started.
The Punjaubee regiments contained many hill tribes-
men—men closely connected by ties of blood and
religion with the enemy whom they were marching to
attack. A non-commissioned officer and several of the
men who were just about the spot where the guns
had been fired were placed under arrest and sent back.
It was afterwards found that two of their rifles had
been discharged, and the men who fired and their non-
commissioned officer were tried by court-martial for
treachery, and were hung.
After these men had been sent back,the 5thGhoorkas,
the company of Rangers, and two companies of the
72d, passed the 23d Punjaubees and took their places at


156
A MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE.
the head of the column. In the course of the inarch a
good many other men of the 23d left the column in
the dark and made their way back to camp. It turned
out afterwards that the Afghan sentries at the top of
the pass heard the reports and woke up the commander
of the post, who, hearing no further cause of alarm,
took no action in the matter.
Had the traitors waited until the column was within
a mile of the top of the pass, the Afghans would as-
suredly have taken the alarm; but, firing at a distance
of four and a half miles, they failed in the desired
effect. The advance was resumed up the bed of the
stream for another mile and a half. About three in
the morning the main water-course was quitted, the
road now entering a ravine to the left, up which three
miles further on was the summit of the pass. The
column continued its weary way up the ravine, slowly
stumbling along in the dark.
One incident occurred in this part of the road show-
ing the necessity in night marching for the regiments
to keep close to each other. In one place a fir-covered
island lay in the middle of the ravine, the torrent's
bed lying on either side of it. When the two com-
panies of the 72d Highlanders, who had been following
close to that of the Rangers, came to the spot they were
surprised to find that the troops in front had suddenly
vanished. No explanation could be given as to the
cause of this disappearance, so the company were halted
until the mystery was solved. The leading regiment


IN FACE OF THE FOE.
157
had taken the passage to the right of the island, while
the 72d had gone to the left, the separation of the
roads being unnoticed in the dark. Had the roads
diverged instead of reuniting, much inconvenience
might have been caused by the delay in collecting the
separated portions of the force.
At last the foot of the Khotal was reached, where
the track left the ravine and turned up the spur. The
two guides, natives of the country, who had led the
head of the column to this point, refused to go any
further; and as the column was now at the point
where the fighting might begin, they were allowed to
depart. It was about six o'clock when the Ghoorkas
began to climb the spur. The morning had broken,
but it was still dark, and the path was almost invisible
in the shadow of the trees.
The Ghoorkas, their rifles loaded now, made their
way quietly up the hill. Presently the challenge of
the sentry was heard, followed by two shots. It
was a relief to the men, after ten hours of weary
stumbling along in the cold and darkness, to know
that they were at length face to face with their foe.
Cold and fatigue were at once forgotten, and with eyes
strained through the darkness, and rifles ready for use,
every man pressed forward. Fifty yards up the hill,
behind the sentry who had fired, was the first stockade
of the enemy, formed by several large trees, which had
been felled so as to completely block up the road, pre-
senting an obstacle of about eight feet high to the at-


158
THE STOCKADES CARRIED.
tacking force. The Afghan pickets lining the stockade
poured a volley into the Ghoorkas, who, led by Major
Fitzhugh and Captain Cook, made a rush at the place.
For a few minutes there was a fierce fight at the
trees; but as fresh assailants momentarily poured up,
the obstruction was scaled, and the Afghans retired on
a second stockade eighty yards back. Here another
stand was made, but the spur being a little wider, the
Ghoorkas were able to work round, and taking the
defence in flank soon drove the Afghans back. Beyond
this point the ground was clear of trees, and the road
ran in short zigzags up the steep hill to the breast-work
which lined the edge of the top zigzag.
A mountain gun at this point swept the approacli
to the position, while the hill at its back was now
covered with Afghans, who opened a heavy fire upon
the troops as in the dim morning light they issued
from the trees. By the time that the Ghoorkas and
the Bangers had cleared the second stockade, the wing
of the 72d Highlanders, ascending by the right flank,
had made their way up to the front, and the whole
now advanced together. As quickly as passible they
pushed up the hill under the heavy fire of the enemy.
The latter fought well, and a number of them were
killed before retiring. At the defence erected at the
top of the zigzag so obstinately did the Afghans in
front hold their ground that their comrades behind
were enabled to remove their mountain gun.
To the right of the enemy's position was a knoll, and



CAPTAIN HERBERT SAVED.





A HAND-TO-HAND STRUGGLE.
159
the 72d at once took possession of this, and two moun-
tain guns were brought up to their assistance. The
Afghans were seen in great numbers in the broken
ground ahead. The Ghoorkas and the little body of
Rangers pushed on against them. Presently the enemy
gathered and made a rush down upon them, and a
desperate hand-to-hand fight took place for a few
minutes. The men were scattered among the trees and
each fought for himself. William Gale had just re-
loaded his rifle when he saw Captain Herbert, who
commanded his company, fall to the ground, and three
Afghans spring forward to finish him. With a bound
Will reached the side of the officer. Two of the Afghans
had already discharged their pieces, the third levelled
and fired. So close was he that the flash almost burnt
the soldier's face, and he felt a sharp pain as if a hot
iron had passed across his cheek. In an instant he
shot his assailant dead, and then with bayonet stood
at bay as the other two Afghans rushed upon him.
They had drawn their tulwars and slashed fiercely at
him; but he kept them off with his bayonet until a
Ghoorka, running up, cut down one of them with his
kookerie, a heavy sword-like knife which the Ghoorkas
carry, and which they always employ in preference to
the bayonet in fighting at close quarters. The remain-
ing Afghan at once took to flight.
The 29th Punjaubees had now come into action, and
the Afghans, disheartened at the loss of their position,
fell back and withdrew into the woods which cover the


160
FEELING THEIR WAY.
plateau. At half-past seven o'clock the whole force,
except the elephant guns, had reached the plateau; and
General Roberts was able to flash the news of the suc-
cessful capture of the enemy's first position to Brigadier-
general Cobbe, who was in command of the force which
was to operate direct against the Peiwar-Khotal. A
rest was given the troops after their long march, and
at half-past nine they again fell in for the attack upon
the pine-covered slopes in the direction of the Peiwar-
Khotal. How strong were the enemy who might be
lurking there they knew not. But it was certain that
he would fight obstinately, and in so dense a forest
much of the advantage gained by drill and discipline
is lost.
A change was made in the order of the advance.
The troops who had before led the advance and had
done the fighting were now placed in the rear, and the
23d Pioneers led the way, followed by the 2d and 29th
Punjaubees. The column crossed the plateau without
opposition, and began the ascent towards the enemy's
position in the woods. Considerable caution was
needed, as no one had any knowledge of the country,
and all were ignorant of the position and numbers of
the enemy, who might, for aught they knew, be mass-
ing in great numbers for an attack upon the front or
one of the flanks. The line of skirmishers entered the
pine-wood near the rocky hillside, and a rolling fire of
musketry soon told that they were engaged from end
to end of the line. It was slow work, for fallen trees,


A FIGHT ON THE HILLSIDE.
161
rocks, and bushes everywhere hampered the advance.
Still the skirmishing line, reinforced from behind,
pushed forward steadily, and presently cleared the
Afghans off the hillside.
When the troops reached the top they found a valley
in front of them, and from the woods on the opposite
side so heavy a musketry fire was kept up that it was
evident the Afghans intended to make a desperate
stand here. The valley, or rather ravine, was a narrow
one: fifty yards wide at its foot, and scarce three times
as much from brow to brow. The enemy, hidden among
the trees, could not be made out except by their con-
tinual fire. They did not content themselves, how-
ever, with the mere defence of their side of the hill,
but from time to time large numbers charged down
and tried to force their way up that held by the British.
Each time, however, when they attempted this the
Punjaubees drove them back with slaughter. It was
clear that the Afghans were in great numbers, for their
line extended for a mile and a half along the hillside.
Major Anderson of the 23d Pioneers, after repulsing
one of these attacks, led four companies to the assault
of the Afghan position, and drove the enemy back
for some little distance; but Major Anderson fell and
the party retired.
Colonel Curry, who commanded the regiment, again
led the men forward, and for a time a hand-to-hand
fight took place. For two hours the rifle contest
continued without cessation. The storm of bullets
(2741 L


DIFFICULT GROUND.
163
The movement was accelerated by the four elephant
guns, which had at length come up, opening fire into
the pinewood forest. As the fire slackened, a recon-
naissance of the hill was made by General Roberts
and his staff; but the result showed that the mountain
was so covered with pines and brushwood tbat it
formed an almost impenetrable barrier to the advance
of troops, for the growth was so thick that it was
impossible to say in which direction any movement
should be made. The experience gained in the last
six hours of hard fighting had shown how difficult it
was to keep command over troops scattered along a
front of half a mile long in the forest where nothing
could be seen beyond a radius of a few yards.
The general therefore determined to desist from the
attempt to force his way direct to the top of the
Peiwar-Khotal, and to march to his left, and so by
menacing the Afghan line of retreat to hasten the
movement towards the rear which had evidently
begun. The men were therefore brought back to the
plateau to the east of the ravine.
Here they were halted for a time, and the contents of
their haversacks furnished them with a meal. At two
o'clock they again drew up on the Spingawi plateau.
The 2d Punjaub Infantry being left on the hill to op-
pose the Afghans should they again advance in that
direction, the rest of the column entered the defile
leading into the Hurriab valley, far in the rear of the
Peiwar-Khotal.


164
A HALT FOR THE NIGHT.
As soon as the enemy, who were still opposing the
2d Punjaub Infantry, saw the head of the column
enter the defile they were seized with a panic lest their
retreat should be cut off, and began to retreat with the
greatest haste, as they had to make their way across
two mountain ridges before they could pass the spot
towards which our troops were moving. The advance
of the column, however, was necessarily slow, as the
woods and side valleys had to be carefully examined
lest a flank attack should be made upon them.
In two hours the head of the column emerged from
the forest on to the open slopes above the highest cul-
tivated point in the Hurriab valley. It was now four
o'clock. The short December day was drawing to a
close; no enemy were in sight, for their line of retreat
was hidden in the bed of the stream a couple of miles
further on, and no one knew where they were to be
found. The troops were much exhausted with the
want of rest and with their heavy work, for they had
now been marching and fighting for eighteen hours,
and they were glad to receive the order to bivouac,
although they had no tents or food, and the cold, as
might be expected on a winter day at an elevation of
over 9000 feet above the sea, began to be very severe.
A number of the nearest trees were felled by the
pioneers, and huge fires were soon alight. There was
still some uneasiness, as no one knew where the force
under General Cobbe was, or whether the attack on
the Peiwar-Khotal had been successful or not.


THE ADVANCE OF THE STH.
165
While the 5th Punjaub Infantry had been mounting
the spur half-way between the Peiwar and the Spingawi
Khotal, the 8th Regiment had moved directly upon
the pass. The Afghans, who had expected an attack,
had remained under arms until three in the morning,
when, hearing no sounds in our camp, they had been
dismissed to rest.
Three guns of the Royal Artillery and two of the
Royal Horse Artillery took up their post 800 yards
in front of our camp, where their fire at the crest of
the pass would assist the advance of the 8th. These,
after two hours' march, found themselves at seven in
the morning on the last spur, which is separated from
the Peiwar-Khotal by a deep ravine. When it became
daylight a few minutes later the enemy caught sight
of our artillery in the valley, and at once opened fire.
Although they had six field-pieces at the top of the
hill, only three had been placed in position to command
the valley and the ascent, and the mountain batteiy
which had arrived the afternoon before was not
brought to the front.
The three field-pieces and the mountain gun on the
spur kept up a continuous fire on our battery of five
guns. These were, however, almost beyond their
range, and but little damage was done. On our side
the fire was chiefly directed against the mountain gun
at the end of the spur, and at any bodies of men who
showed themselves.
The artillery duel went on for four hours, and in


166
AN AFGHAN ADVANCE.
the meantime the infantry were engaged sharply with
the Afghans. These had taken up their position in
the woods on the other side of the ravine, and kept
up a continuous fire upon the 8th. The distance, how-
ever, was too great for much execution on either
side, especially as both parties were sheltered in the
woods.
About ten o'clock the Afghans were seen gathering
in strength, as if to come down across the road leading
up to the Khotal to attack the 8th in the rear. A
squadron of the 18th Bengal Cavalry charged up the
valley, and the enemy retired up the hill again; and,
seeing that they could not cross the road without the
chance of being cut up by the cavalry, they did not
try to repeat the experiment.
At eleven o'clock Brigadier-general Cobbe was
wounded in the leg, and Colonel Barry-Drew succeeded
him in the command, receiving the orders which had
been given to General Cobbe that the Khotal was
not to be attacked till there was some evidence that
the flank attack had shaken the enemy's defence in
front
.
At twelve o'clock, the guns with the 2d Punjaub
Infantry alarmed the Afghans by their fire upon the
camp, and although the Afghan guns in front kept
up their fire, the musketry fire decreased considerably.
Seeing this, Colonel Drew ordered the artillery to
be brought up nearer. When, after advancing 300
yards, they came to a ravine crossing the road, the


THE END OF THE STRUGGLE.
167
Afghans, who had come down the hill to meet them,
opened a heavy fire; and the road being narrow, only
the leading gun could come into action. However,
the two companies of the 8th, which were acting as
an escort to the guns, advanced in skirmishing order,
and drove the Afghans up the hill. The panic among
the Afghans on the plateau having now spread to the
troops at the Khotal, their fire entirely ceased, and
the 8th Regiment descended the defile, and began to
climb the path to the Khotal. Not a hostile shot was
fired, and at half-past two they reached the enemy's
camp, which they found deserted.



CHAPTER XL
A PRISONER.

HE panic which had seized the Afghans
when they found their retreat menaced
had been thorough and complete, and
when the 8th Regiment entered the camp they found
that the tents were standing; food had been left ready
cooked, and every possession had been abandoned.
In the artillery camp the gunners had left their
silver-mounted brass helmets and caps, as well as their
guns and carriages. A body of friendly Turis had
accompanied the column making a demonstration on
its flank, and these arriving upon the spot plundered
the Afghan camp of everything of the smallest value.
No one knew what had become of the main body
under General Roberts.
The Bengal Cavalry scouted for some distance in
advance, but found no signs of the enemy. Strong
pickets were set in case the Afghans should rally and
return. The tents were brought up from the camp
below, fires were lit, and the 8th encamped for the
night. In the morning communication was established


PREPARATIONS FOR WINTER
169
between the two camps, and it having been ascertained
that the enemy had fled in the greatest disorder
towards the Shatur-gardan Pass leading down to
Cabul, there was no prospect of further fighting. The
Afghans had abandoned all their guns, and even thrown
away a great quantity of muskets, in their rapid
retreats. Great stores of flour and other provisions
were discovered in the various villages and were
divided among the troops.
The winter was now setting in, and the Shatur-
gardan Pass might any moment be closed by deep
snow; there was therefore no prospect of a renewal
of hostilities before the spring. Preparations were
made for hutting a regiment on the top of the Khotal.
The rest of the force were to winter at Khuram.
General Roberts, with an escort of cavalry, rode to the
Shatur-gardan Pass, and assured himself that the
whole of the Afghan army had fled beyond this point.
The troops were for some time kept hard at work
lowering the captured guns and ammunition down to
the valley. A portion of the troops advanced as far
as Alikheyl, the principal town of the plateau. The
Jajis, the inhabitants of the country, had hitherto
been extremely hostile; but, cowed by the defeat of
the Afghans, they submitted without resistance.
On the 12th all the preparations for the return
were complete. It was known that there was another
pass from Alikheyl into the Khuram valley by the
south: this had never been explored by any European,


170
THE SAPPIR DEFILE
but General Roberts determined to return by it with
a portion of his force, as the pass might be found
valuable in future operations. The force detailed for
the march through the Sappir defile was composed of
the 8th Ghoorkas, a wing of the 72d Highlanders, a
company of the Norfolk Eangers, the 23d Punjaub
Pioneers, and a mountain battery.
The country through which the march was to be
made was inhabited by the Mongals, a turbulent
robber tribe. The column marched at nine in the
morning, and after their down march arrived at the
village of Sappir at mid-day. The road lay down the
Hurriab river till the Kb.uram river was reached, and
then along the right bank, passing through the village
of Kermana, after which it turned up a narrow road
for two miles, till an open plateau was reached, at the
farther end of which stood the village of Sappir. It
was reported here that the Mongals intended to defend
a defile and hill pass two miles farther on. The 23d
Pioneers were therefore pushed on to occupy the pass
and bivouac there; the remainder of the troops camped
in the village.
No signs of the enemy were seen either by the 23d
Pioneers or in the vicinity of the camp. The troops
were to march at three in the morning and the tents
were struck an hour after midnight. The track up
the pass was excessively steep and very difficult for
the camels. The cold was bitter, and in places where
water had crossed the road there were slippery sur-


THE MANJIAR PASS
171
faces of ice, which hindered the camels considerably,
and it was past eight o'clock before the rear-guard
arrived at the top of the pass. From a commanding
position overlooking the defile and surrounding waste
of rugged and barren mountains not an enemy could
be seen, and it was hoped that the report of the
intended attack was a false one. The troops now
began to descend the defile, which was known as the
Manjiar Pass. Troublesome as the ascent had been,
the descent was infinitely more so; and it was with
difficulty that the camels could be made to go down
the deep and slippery roads.
The gorge was five miles in length. The track for
the first part ran through a deep ravine of perpen-
dicular walls, which narrowed in places to a few yards,
overhanging the path until they seemed to meet and
form a tunnel, through which it ran. Had an attack
been made on the column as it struggled with its
difficulties through this portion of the pass the result
would have been disastrous; for it would have been
impossible to place troops on the heights to cover the
advance. Here and there side ravines broke into the
road, in any of which ambushes might have been laid.
It was not, however, until the difficult part of the
road had been passed, and a comparatively open valley
reached, that any of the natives were seen. Then a
few men were observed on the heights, but as they
were supposed to be shepherds no notice was taken of
them. Believing that all danger of attack was now


172
AN ATTACK ON THE COLUMN.
over, the general ordered all the troops, with the ex-
ception of the baggage guard, which was composed of
the 3d Ghoorkas, and a few of the 72d Highlanders
and Norfolk Rangers, to march forward to the camp,
which was to be pitched at a village called Keraiah in
the open valley. This, as the result proved, was a
very rash move. Before the head of the column had
extricated itself from the ravine numbers of the
country people were seen collecting in small detached
parties; by degrees they closed in, and were soon within
fifty yards of the convoy.
Captain Goad, in charge of the baggage, was close
to a small guard of 72d Highlanders, when suddenly
a volley was tired by the Mongals. Captain Goad fell,
his thigh-bone broken by a bullet. Sergeant Green,
with three privates of the 72d, picked him up, and
having placed him under cover of a rock, turned to
defend themselves. They were but four men against
a large number, but they stood steady; and, firing
with careful aim, and picking off their man each time,
they kept the enemy at bay until help arrived. Sim-
ultaneousty all along the line of the baggage column
the Mongals attacked.
From the heights on both sides a fire was kept up
while the more daring swept down in parties upon
the rear-guard of Ghoorkas commanded by Captain
Powell. The baggage-guard all behaved with great
steadiness, defending the path on both sides, while the
baggage animals continued their way along it
.


SAFE THROUGH THE DEFILE.
173
William Gale was on duty with the party, and was,
like the rest, busy with his rifle; a sergeant next to
him was hit in the leg, and Will, laying down his
rifle, stopped one of the camels, and assisted the
wounded man to mount it. The attack of the Mongals
became more furious as they saw their anticipated
prey escaping them in spite of all their efforts; but
their attempts to close were in vain, and the convoy
made its way down to the village with the loss of one
killed, and two officers and eight men wounded. Captain
Powell and Captain Goad both died from the effects of
their injuries.
The enemy's loss must have been considerable, as
the fire of the troop was steady and accurate, and the
distance small. After a halt for a day or two the
column marched to Khuram, where it encamped.
Captain Herbert had reported to the colonel the
manner in which Private Gale had defended him when
wounded and attacked by three Afghans; the incident,
too, had been observed by many of his comrades, and
as a reward the young soldier was promoted to the
rank of corporal; and the colonel told him that, had
not similar acts of bravery been performed in the
hand-to-hand action on the Spingawi-Khotal, he
would have been mentioned for the Victoria Cross.
The mountain tops were now deep in snow, but in
the valley the temperature was very agreeable, and
the troops enjoyed their rest much. This was not,
however, to be of long duration. From the lower end


174
THE KHOST VALLEY.
of the Khuram valley, runs off another valley known
as the "Khost." This was an entirely unknown
country to the Europeans, but it was said to be ex-
tremely hostile. Parties had come down and carried
off cattle; and at any time a formidable raid might
have taken place, and our line of communication been
entirely cut.
The country was ruled by an Afghan governor,
who sent in to say that he was willing to hand it over
to us. There was, therefore, no expectation that
there would be any resistance; and the expedition
was designed rather to overawe the country and to
obtain information as to its extent and capabilities,
than with any idea of permanent occupation. The
column consisted of a squadron of the 10th Hussars,
the 5th Bengal Cavalry, the 21st and 28th Punjaub
Infantry, two mountain batteries, a wing of the 72d
Highlanders, and two companies of the Norfolk
Rangers. This force marched from Hazir-pir, and
halted for the night at Jaji-Midan at the head of the
valley leading to the Darwiza Pass, through which the
track runs into the Khost valley.
At eight o'clock next morning the troops moved
forward. The ground was difficult, for the road ran
between terraced fields on the side of the ravine, and
obliged men and animals to pass in single file, it was
not therefore until twelve o'clock that the rear-guard
moved out of the camp. Beyond this point the road
up the pass was not difficult; from the summit a wide


ARRIVAL AT MATUN.
175
view was obtained. At the end of the valley, six
miles distant, the plain of the Khost country was seen.
It was seen that, owing to the slow progress the troops
were making, the baggage-train, consisting of 1000
camels, would not be able to reach the proposed
camping-ground at the lower end of the valley before
dark; the general, therefore, ordered it to halt at the
top of the pass, where the ground was open. The 21st
Punjaubees and a mountain battery were to stay
there for its protection, and bring it on next day.
The mules with the regimental baggage went on with
the troops.
The column met with no opposition. It halted
near the village of Bakh, half a mile from the
foot of the hills, where the valley widened into a
plain six miles long and four broad. The force en-
camped here on the 4th, to allow the convoy to come
up. The following morning the column marched to
the other end of the valley, and the next day the
Afghan governor of Matun, the chief place of the
Khost, rode in to welcome the general.
On the 6th of January the force marched to Matun.
They found that this fort was a square-walled in-
closure 100 yards each side, with circular corner
bastions. There was a central square inclosure with
round towers at its angles. As the fort was ap-
proached, its garrison, which consisted of 100 local
militia, were formed up in two lines at a mosque out-
side the fort. The general, with his staff, rode in, and


176
THE MONGAL HORDES.
a long interview took place between him and the
governor. The troops encamped outside; in the even-
ing information came in from the villages in the
plain that large numbers of the Mongals, who inhabi-
ted the hills, were meditating an attack. Strong
pickets were posted, and the night passed quietly. In
the morning large numbers of tribesmen flocked down
into the villages and gradually surrounded the camp.
At one o'clock the troops fell in. The cavalry were
sent out against the enemy in the north-west direction,
followed by the 28th Punjaubees and No. 2 mounted
battery. The Mongals at once fell back to the hills.
The squadron of the 10th Hussars were dismounted,
and ordered to skirmish up a small knoll to the west.
From this they drove the enemy, who gathered again
on a spur opposite.
Here they were charged by the 5th Punjaub Cav-
alry, and fell back higher up the ridge. The mountain
guns and infantry now arrived and speedily drove
them over the crest. General Roberts with his staff
rode out to watch the skirmish; and, soon after he
had left, the enemy, who occupied the village to the
north-east, showed in force. Two of the mountain
guns opened upon them. On the south they now
approached, under the cover of the old Afghan cavalry
lines, to within half a mile before being perceived, and
also occupied a walled village there. The other two
guns in camp shelled the village, and soon drove the
enemy out.


THE ATTACK REPULSED.
177
When the general returned to camp at half-past
two he found the attack driven off in all directions,
and ordered the 21st Punjaubees, the 72d Highlanders,
and the Norfolk Rangers to follow up the enemy to
the east and south-east with the mountain guns, and
to burn the villages which had sheltered the enemy.
The first village was found deserted; at another, a
quarter of a mile behind, the enemy made a stand, but
were shelled out, and the plain beyond the Matun
river was soon covered with fugitives. Major Stewart,
with forty men of the 5th Punjaub Cavalry who
accompanied the column, charged 400 of them and cut
down many, until checked by the heavy fire of match-
lock men from the high bank.
No more fighting took place. The combination of
tribes which had attacked the camp were estimated at
6000 men. Eighty prisoners were taken. These, two
nights afterwards, took advantage of a night alarm to
attempt to escape, and attacked the guard. The
attempt, however, was frustrated, but only after
several of the prisoners had been shot down. Some
days passed quietly. Reconnaissances were made up
the valley. While waiting here the news of the
capture of Candahar by General Stewart arrived.
Parties of engineers surveyed the country, and all
passed off quietly.
On the 25th a portion of the force marched back to
Hazir-pir. On the 26th of January the general deter-
mined to withdraw this force altogether, as no advan-
(274). M


178
CALLED BACK.
tage was gained by its retention, and the garrison
would be constantly exposed to the attacks of the
natives, who were already threatening it. The fort
was handed over to Sultan Jan, a man of good family,
who was appointed to govern the Khost temporarily.
He had under him the guard of the former governor,
and some fresh natives, being in all 300 men. The
head-men of the villages were called together, and
these promised to obey his rule. Some of the chiefs
of the Mongals and other neighbouring; tribes came in:
sheep were given to them, and they were told that, so
long as they desisted from interference in the valley,
no steps would be taken against them.
The troops, however, had only made one day's march
when a messenger arrived from Sultan Jan, saying
that immediately the troops had marched, the Mongals
had come down to attack the fort. A strong party
were therefore marched back at once. After destroy-
ing the stores and setting fire to the fort they drew off
the governor and marched back to camp, the Mongals,
although in great force, not venturing to offer any
resistance. On the return of the force to the Khuram
valley, a wing of the Norfolk Rangers was sent up to
reinforce the troops stationed on the top of the Peiwar-
Khotal, as the Jajis and Mongals had been gathering
in large numbers, and threatening an attack on that
post.
William Gale was with his company stationed at
Alikheyl. The enemy abstained from any open attack,


A NIGHT PICKET.
179
but they often harassed the sentries. One night Will was
corporal in charge of a picket of eight men posted at a
hut half a mile from the village. The object of the
picket was to prevent any sudden attack being made
upon the company, who were in a small village a
quarter of a mile in the rear where a large quantity of
grain was stored. Two men were posted as sentries
some hundred yards in advance of the hut. Will had
visited the sentry to the right, and finding all was well
here moved across to the left.
"Is everything quiet?" he asked the sentry.
"I don't know, corporal. Two or three times I have
thought that I heard noises, and twice I have chal-
lenged."
"What sort of noise?"
"Once it seemed to be a crack like a dried stick
when some one treads on it. The other time it was as
if a stone had been dislodged."
"I will wait with you," Will said. "Two pairs of
ears are better than one."
Again there was a slight sound heard.
"I don't like to fire," Will said. "The alarm would
spread and the whole camp get under arms. There is
something moving, I am convinced, but it may be only
a stray bullock. I will go forward and see if I can
make it out, and do you stand ready to fire if" I am at-
tacked. After doing so fall back on the picket at once.
If the enemy are in force hold the hut to the last. In
ten minutes you will have help from the village behind."


180
AN AMBUSH.
Holding his rifle advanced, in readiness to fire,
William Gale made his way forward cautiously towards
the spot whence the noise seemed to proceed. When
he was some forty yards in advance of the sentry a
number of figures rose suddenly from some bushes and
fired.
Will fired, and saw the man at whom he aimed go
down; but at the same instant three or four guns
were discharged, and he fell to the ground shot through
the leg. There was a rush of men towards him. A
tulwar was waved and fell with a crushing blow on
his shoulder, and he became insensible. When he re-
covered consciousness he was being carried along, a
man holding his arms and another his legs. The pain
was excruciating, and he fainted again, after hearing,
during his brief period of consciousness, a sharp fusi-
lade of musketry, which told him that his comrades
were defending the hut against the enemy. When
again he came to his senses it was daylight. He was
lying in a small room, and an old woman was applying
bandages to the sword-cut on his shoulder. Although
he did not know it he was ten miles from the spot
where the attack had been made. Among those who
had taken part in it was the head of a small Jaji
village lying behind the hills.
This chief was a crafty old savage, who had been
desirous of remaining neutral in the strife. The de-
termination of his people to join in the attack by the
tribes had forced him to consent to their so doing.


A PRISONER AMONG THE AFGHANS. 181
Before starting he had, however, made them swear that
any wounded men who fell into their hands should
not, in accordance with the Afghan custom, be in-
stantly despatched, but should be brought back to the
village. His intention was to have some hostages. If
the English repulsed the attack and in the spring again
advanced he would be able to prove his good-will to
the cause by handing the soldiers whom he had pro-
tected over to them.
Upon the other hand, should the British fall back
and the Afghans advance in the spring, he could hand
the prisoners over to them, or send them down to Cabul
as a proof that his people had fought against the British.
He had himself accompanied his men, and seeing after
Will had fallen that he was still living, had at once
ordered two of his men to carry him off to the village.
The attack upon the guard-house proved unsuccess-
ful; the six soldiers defended themselves until the
company from the village behind came up to the rescue.
Several other attacks at various points took place. But
the British were on the alert, and the hillsmen, finding
that their enemies were not to be taken by surprise,
scattered again to the village. The ball had fortunately
passed through William Gale's leg without either break-
ing a bone or cutting an artery; but the wound in the
shoulder was more serious, and the effect of the strain
upon it in carrying him brought on violent inflamma-
tion; fever set in with delirium, and for weeks the lad
lay between life and death.


182
WILL SENT TO CABUL.
The old woman who nursed him was, like most of her
country people, skilled in the treatment of wounds. The
bandages were kept bathed with water, snow was con-
stantly applied to his head, and a decoction of herbs
given him to drink. His good constitution was in his
favour, and at last he recovered his senses, to find him-
self convalescent, but as weak as an infant. In April
the snow melted, and the chief, having by this time
found that the English were not likely to advance
beyond Alikheyl, thought that it would best benefit
his interest to send his prisoner down to Cabul.
The Ameer was reported to be about to conclude
peace with the British, and the chief thought that he
was more likely to receive a reward from him for the
care he had bestowed upon the prisoner than from the
English. Moreover, it would have been difficult to send
him into the English camp through the hostile villages,
while no unfavourable comment would be incited by
his sending his prisoner down to Cabul.
Will Gale was far too weak to perform the journey
on foot, he was therefore placed on a camel. The chief
himself and four of his head-men accompanied him as
an escort, and a week after the pass was open they
started up the valley to the Shatur-gardan, and thence
descended into the Logan Valley below on the way to
Cabul.


CHAPTER XII.
THE ADVANCE UP THE KHYBEU.
OTHING has yet been said of the doings
of the other columns, that under General
Browne advancing by theKhyber Pass upon
Jellalabad, that under General Stewart by the Bolan
Pass upon Candahar. General Browne's force had been
gathered at the frontier line at the mouth of the pass
awaiting the reply of the Ameer to the British ultima-
tum. None having been received up to the night of
the 20th of November, the advance took place in the
morning at the same hour at which General Roberts
advanced from Thull in the Khurum valley.
The principal defence of the Khyber Pass was the
fort Ali-Musjid. This fort stands on a most command-
ing position on a rock jutting out from the hillside
far into the valley, which its guns commanded. It
was flanked by batteries erected on the hillsides, and
was a most formidable position to capture. It was
situated about six miles up the valley.
The force under General Browne was divided into
four brigades. The first, under General Macpherson,


184
THE BRITISH COLUMNS.
consisted of the 4th battalion of the Rifle Brigade,
the 20th Bengal Infantry, the 4th Ghoorkas, and a
mountain battery. These were ordered to take a
mountain road, and, led by a native guide, to make
a long circuit, and so to come down into the pass at a
village lying a mile or two beyond Ali-Musjid.
The second brigade, under Colonel Tytler, consist-
ing of the 1st battalion of the 17th Foot, the infantry
of the Guides, the 1st Sikhs, and a mountain battery,
were also to take to the hills, and working along on
their crests to come down upon the batteries which the
Afghans had erected on the hillside opposite to Ali-
Musjid.
The third brigade, consisting of the 81st Regiment,
the 14th Sikhs, and the 24th Native Infantry; and
the fourth brigade, composed of the 51st Regiment,
6th Native Infantry, and the 45th Sikhs, were to ad-
vance straight up the valley: with them was a moun-
tain battery, a battery of Horse Artillery, one of Royal
Artillery, and a battery of 40-pounders drawn by
elephants.
These brigades marched forward until they reached
some rising ground in the valley, whence they could see
Ali-Musjid at a distance of a mile and a half in front
of them. The enemy at once opened fire. The gunners
in the fort had been practising for some weeks, and
had got the range with great accuracy, and their shot
and shell fell thick along the slope. The column was
therefore marched back behind its crest and there


186
A TOILSOME MARCH.
skirmishers advanced until they were close to the
Afghan entrenchments on the hillsides abreast of the
fort.
So far there was no sign that Macpherson's brigade
had reached the post assigned to it high up on the
hill, or that Tytler had worked round to the village in
the enemy's rear. Some attacks which were made upon
the Afghans were repulsed with loss. Major Birch and
Lieutenant Fitzgerald were killed and Captain Maclean
wounded, and between thirty and forty of the rank
and file were killed or wounded. As the fort and its
defences could not have been carried by direct attack
without immense loss of life, it was determined to
cease operations until morning in order to give the
flanking columns time to reach the positions assigned
to them; a wing of a regiment from each brigade was
ordered to remain on the hillside facing the Afghan
entrenchments; the rest of the troops fell back, a
short distance and lay down as they were for the
night.
In the meantime the brigades of Macpherson and
Tytler had encountered enormous difficulties on the
line of march. The roads they had taken were mere
tracks, and there were many places where it was
almost impossible to get the mountain guns along.
From daybreak until late at night the troops laboured
unceasingly. They knew by the dull roar echoed and
re-echoed among the mountains that their comrades
below were engaged; and the thought that a failure


188
WINTER QUARTERS.
brought with it the entire demoralization of the Afghan
army, which a few hours before had been fully confi-
dent in its power to repuLse any attack which might
be made upon it.
The British continued their advance, passed through
the Khyber Pass, and entered the broad valley near
whose head stands the town of Jellalabad. Beyond
a few shots fired at them by tribesmen high up on
the mountain side they experienced no opposition
whatever, and a week after the fight in the Khyber
entered Jellalabad and encamped around it. Further
than this it was not intended to go for the present.
Winter was now close at hand. Between Jellalabad
and Cabul were a series of most difficult passes; an
army advancing up them would have immense diffi-
culty to encounter, and might find itself cut off from
India by the snows.
In the Jellalabad valley the weather is mild, large
stores of provisions were obtainable, and here it was
determined to remain through the winter, and to re-
commence the campaign in the spring with the advan-
tage of the Khyber Pass, one of the keys of Afghan-
istan, being in our hands. But a day or two after
reaching Jellalabad, having defeated and dispersed one
of the two Afghan armies, the news arrived of the
capture of the Peiwar-Khotal.the second key of Afghan-
istan, and the utter rout of the army defending it.
Thus, in little more than a week after the commence-
ment of the campaign, Sheer-Ali, the Ameer, saw the


SHEER-ALI S POSITION.
189
entire overthrow of the army which he had for so
many years been occupied in organizing and training.
The positions which he had deemed impregnable had
both been taken after a single day's fighting, and his
capital lay virtually at the mercy of his conquerors. In
one short week his hopes and plans had been scattered
to the winds. Sheer-Ali was not wholly to be blamed.
He had for many years received an annual present of
money and arms from the British government; but
upon the other hand he saw Russia marching with giant
steps towards his northern frontier, and contrasting the
energy and enterprise of the great northern power with
the inactivity which he may have supposed to prevail
among the men who governed England, he became
more and more anxious, and asked the English de-
finitely to state whether he could rely upon them for
assistance should he be attacked by the Russians.
He received a reply from the Duke of Argyle, the
British minister for India, of a doubtful nature, couched
in terms which seem to have aroused his resentment.
From this moment there can be no doubt that the
Ameer's course was decided upon. He was between the
hammer and the anvil, and as he could obtain no
guarantee of assistance from England he determined
to throw himself into the arms of Russia
Letters were exchanged between him and General
Kaufmann, the Russian viceroy in Turkestan, and the
latter gave him the wannest promises of support if he
would ally himself with Russia.


190
A FATAL MISCALCULATION.
Although he had for years declined to accept a Bri-
tish resident at Cabul or to allow Englishmen to enter
the country, he now, believing in the power and willing-
ness of Russia to help, received the visit of a Russian
general and staff at Cabul.
Unfortunately for the Ameer the government of
England had now changed hands, and the ministry
at once sent to Sheer-Ali to demand that he should
receive a British resident . It was late in the year,
and the Ameer, acting no doubt on the advice of his
Russian friends, sought to gain time by evasive
answers. The British government, who saw through
the ruse, ordered the envoy to advance with a strong
escort. This obliged the Ameer to come to a final
decision, and the die was cast by the escort being
stopped by force on its arrival at Ali-Musjid.
There is no doubt that the Ameer and his friends
calculated that it was already too late in the season
for the English to gather a sufficient force on the
frontier to force the passes held by the Afghan army
before the snows. The promptness of action of the
English government, the valour of their troops, and
the unusually late setting in of the winter combined
to overthrow the Ameer's plans. Had the campaign
been delayed till the spring there can be little doubt
that the British in their advance would have found
themselves opposed, if not by a Russian army, at least
by an army led and officered by Russians, with Russian
engineers and artillerymen. The promptness of their


THE DEATH OF THE AMEER.
191
advance, and the capture of the passes and the disper-
sion of the Afghan armies within a week of the open-
ing of the campaign, altogether altered this position.
Sheer-Ali found himself a king without an army.
The plains of Cabul were thronged with the panic-
stricken fugitives from the Khyber and Peiwar, and
Sheer-Ali started at night from his capital with his
Russian friends and made for the north, sending letter
after letter ahead of him to General Kaufrnann im-
ploring the promised aid of Russia. The rapid course
of events, however, had entirely disconcerted the Rus-
sian plans.
In the spring a Russian army might have advanced
and co-operated with that of the Ameer, but the winter
had set in, the distance was immense, and the Russians
unprepared for instant action. The appeals of the
unfortunate prince were responded to with vague gen-
eralities. He was no longer a powerful ally, but a
broken instrument; and heart-broken with disappoint-
ment and failure the unfortunate Sheer-Ali was seized
by fever and died in an obscure village almost alone
and wholly uncared for. His son Yakoob Khan, who
had in his youth proved himself a brave and able
soldier, but who having incurred his father's displea-
sure had been for years confined as a prisoner at Herat,
was now liberated and took his place as his father's
successor. He saw at once that with a broken and
disorganized army he could not hope to resist the
advance of the three British armies which, coming


192
THE SIGNATURE OF PEACE.
from Jellalabad, from the heights of the Shatur-Gardan,
and from Candahar, would simultaneously advance
upon his capital as soon as the snows melted.
He therefore opened negotiations, and early in May
himself descended from Cabul and had an interview
with General Browne at Gundamuk, when the pre-
liminaries of peace were arranged and signed. The
terms insisted upon by the British were not onerous.
Yakoob was recognized as the Ameer of Afghanistan,
the annual subsidy paid to his father was to be con-
tinued. The Khyber Pass and the Khurum valley as
far as the Peiwar-Khotal were to remain in the hands
of the British, and a British minister was to be stationed
at Cabul. When peace had been signed the greater
portion of the British army retired to India, and the
Khurum column, leaving two or three regiments in
that valley, also fell back.
While the first and second divisions had been gain-
ing victories in the Khyber and Khurum valleys, the
column under General Stewart had met with difficulties
of another kind.
Between the Indus and the foot of the range of
mountains through which the Bolan Pass leads to
the lofty plateau land above, a great waste of sand
stretches. In the wet season this tract of country is
overflowed by the Indus, in the dry season it is a
parched and bare desert with its wells few and far
apart. There were great difficulties met with in cross-
ing this inhospitable plain, and the losses among the


194
CANDAHAR.
irrigation properly used and a railway constructed to
India, Candahar and the surrounding country would
again become one of the gardens of the world. The
authorities of the city made their submission as the
column approached it, and the army settled down to
quiet occupation, broken only by isolated attacks upon
individual soldiers by fanatical Ghazis.
When peace was concluded one of the conditions
distinctly insisted upon by the British general and
agreed to by the Ameer was that Candahar should
remain in our possession. The alleged advantage thus
gained, and the territory thus acquired, were after-
wards abandoned by the British government succeed-
ing that which had so vigorously carried out the war.
The occupation of Candahar by the British had been
insisted on at first, on the ground that if Russia should
make an advance against India the British nation
would have ample cause to rue the cession of Candahar,
for it was declared that with this city strongly fortified
and surrounded by outlying works 10,000 British
troops there could arrest the progress of an invading
army however large, until England had had full time
to put forth all her strength and to assemble an army
amply sufficient to secure the safety of the most valu-
able of our possessions—the empire of India.
It was said that whatever allies Russia might have
prepared for herself by intrigues among the princes of
India, these would not think of moving so long as they
knew that the fortress of Candahar remained as a


CHANGE OF POLICY.
195
British bulwark against an invading force. It was re-
presented that so long as this place held out England
would be able to devote her whole force towards re-
pelling the foreign invader, instead of being obliged
simultaneously to oppose him and to put down a for-
midable rising in India itself. It was, however, not
the universal opinion that the best policy of England
was to occupy this territory by an armed force, and
subsequent events, with the change of government in
England, led to a different determination.


CHAPTER XIII.
THE MASSACRE AT CABUL.
T each village through which William Gale
and his escort passed the inhabitants
turned out and hooted and yelled at the
prisoner, and it was with the greatest difficulty that the
chief protected him from personal violence. William
himself was scarce conscious of what was passing. The
swinging action of the camel added to his great weak-
ness, and he would not have been able to keep his seat
on its back had not his captors fastened him with
ropes to the saddle. Although the snow had only just
melted on the Shatur-Gardan Pass, in the valleys below
the heat of the sun was already great, and often as it
poured down upon him he lapsed into a state of semi-
consciousness and drowsily fancied that he was again
in his canoe tossing on the tiny waves in the shelter of
the reef.
On the sixth day after the start a shout from his
guard aroused him as they emerged from a steep ascent
amongst some hills. Before him an undulating ground
dotted with villages stretched for three or four miles.



WILLIAM i;ALE IN THE HANDS OF T1IK AFGHANS.





198
A FAITHFUL ATTENDANT.
expectations, and he returned home well satisfied with
the success of his policy.
For weeks Will lay between life and death, and he was
a mere skeleton when, two months after his arrival, he
was able for the first time to sit up at the window and
look across the valley. Very gradually he recovered
strength. He was well supplied with food, and espe-
cially enjoyed the delicious fruits for which Cabul is
celebrated. His attendants were an old man and his
son, the latter a lad of some fifteen years of age. The
father did his duty because ordered to do so, but his
scowling face often showed the hatred which he felt
of the Kaffir. The lad, however, took kindly to his
patient. He it was who for hours together would, while
Will was at his worst, sit by his bedside constantly
changing the wet cloths wrapped round his head, and
sometimes squeezing a few drops of the refreshing
juice of some fruit between his parched lips; and as
his patient turned the corner and became slowly con-
valescent his pleasure over the life he had saved by his
care was very great
.
Like most soldiers in the expeditionary force Will
had picked up a few words of Afghan, and had greatly
increased his stock during the time he lay in the hut
in the mountains. Alone now all day with the boy,
with nothing to do but to look out on the town below
and the wide valley be3rond, he made rapid progress,
and was, by the time he was strong enough to walk
alone across the room, able to hold some sort of con-


THE BRITISH MISSION.
199
versation with his friend; for so he had come to regard
his devoted attendant. One morning the boy came
into the room in a state of great excitement.
"English officers are coming," he said, "with sol-
diers."
"But I thought it was peace," Will exclaimed de-
lighted; " you told me peace had been signed at Gunda-
muk two months ago."
"Yes, it is peace," the boy said; "the officers are
coming in friendship to be here with the Ameer."
Will was greatly moved at the news. When he had
heard, six weeks before, that peace was signed he had
begun to hope that some day or other he should again
be able to return to India, but the news that some of his
countrymen were close at hand almost overcame him.
The next day, which was the 2+th of July—although
Will had lost all account of time—he saw vast numbers
of people out on the plain, and presently far away he
beheld a large body of horsemen. These, the lad told
him, were the Ameer and his body-guard accompanied
by the English officers.
Gannon were fired in salute, and the garrison of the
Bala-Hissar stood to their arms, and presently Will
saw a cavalcade riding up from the gate of the for-
tress. First came some Afghan cavalry, then rode a
tall and stately man whom the boy told him was the
Ameer. But Will had no eyes for him; all his thoughts
were centred on the white officer who rode beside him,
Major Sir Lewis Cavagnari, the English envoy. Behind,


200
MAJOR CAVAGNARI.
among the chiefs of the Ameer's suite.rode two or three
other English officers, and then came a detachment of
some twenty-five cavalry and fifty infantry of the
Guides, a frontier force consisting of picked men.
As they passed near his window Will stood up with
his hand to his forehead in salute. Major Cavagnari
looked up in surprise and spoke to the Ameer. The
latter said a few words in reply, and then the caval-
cade rode on to the palace. Ten minutes later two of
the Ameer's attendants entered and told Will to follow
them.
He had that morning, for the first time since his
arrival in Cabul, put on his uniform. He was still
very weak, but, leaning one hand upon his attendant's
shoulder, he followed the messengers. He was con-
ducted to a large room in the palace, where the Ameer
and his adviser and the British officers were sitting.
"Well, my lad," Major Cavagnari said kindly, "I
hear you have had a bad time of it. The Ameer tells
me that you were taken prisoner near Ali-Kheyl, that
you were badly wounded, and that after the snow
melted you were brought down here. He says he gave
orders that everything should be done for you, but that
you have been very ill ever since."
"I have been treated very kindly, sir," Will said,
"and I am now getting round. I owe my life chiefly
to the care and attention of the lad here, who has
watched over me like a brother."
Will's words were translated to the Ameer, who ex-


AMONG FRIENDS.
201
pressed his satisfaction, and ordered a purse of money
to be given to the boy in testimony of his approval of
the care he had taken of his patient. As Major Cava-
gnari saw that the young soldier was almost too weak
to stand he at once told him to retire to his room,
adding kindly:
"I will ask the Ameer to assign you quarters in the
same house with us; we will soon bring you round
and make you strong and well again."
The same evening Will was carried over—for the
fatigue he had undergone had been almost too much
for him—to the large house assigned to Major Cava-
gnari, his officers and escort. It was built of wood,
surrounded by a court-yard and wall. A room was
assigned to Will on the same floor as that occupied
by the officers. The Afghan lad had received orders
to accompany his patient and remain with him as long
as he stayed in Cabul.
Will's progress towards recovery was now rapid. He
had no longer any cause for anxiety. He was care-
fully attended to by Dr. Kelly, the surgeon of the
Guides, who had accompanied the mission as medical
officer. The escort was commanded by Lieut. Hamil-
ton, and Sir Lewis Cavagnari was accompanied by Mr.
William Jenkyns of the Indian Civil Service as his
secretary. The care of Dr. Kelly and the influence of
quinine and tonics quickly added to Will's strength,
but his best medicine was the sound of English voices
and the kindness which was shown to him.


202
THE HERATEE REGIMENT.
In a fortnight he was able to get about as usual, and
the doctor said that in another month he would be as
strong as ever. For two or three weeks after Major
Cavagnari's arrival in Cabul all went well; and it
appeared as if the forebodings of those who had pre-
dicted trouble and danger to the little body who had
gone up, as it were, into the lion's den, were likely
to be falsified. That the mission was not without
clanger the authorities and Major Cavagnari himself
were well aware; but it was important that the pro-
vision in the treaty of Gundamuk by which England
secured the right of maintaining a resident at Cabul
should be put into operation; besides, the Ameer had
himself given the invitation to Major Cavagnari, and
had pressed the point warmly, giving the most solemn
promises of protection. At any rate for the first two
weeks the soldiers of the escort moved freely in the
city without molestation or insult, and it appeared as
if the population of Cabul were content with the terms
of peace, which indeed imposed no burdens whatever
upon them, and was supposed to have inflicted no
humiliation on their national pride.
On the 5th of August several regiments marched in
from Herat. These troops, which were considered the
flower of the Afghan army, had, in consequence of the
distance of Herat from the seat of war, taken no part
whatever in the struggle. Upon the very day after
their arrival they scattered through the town, and were
loud in their expression of hostility to the terms of


COMING TROUBLES.
203
peace. Had they been there, they said, the Kaffirs
would have been easily defeated. Why should peace
have been made at the very first reverse, and before
the best fighting men had come to the front?
That evening Will Gale's young attendant came to
him in his room looking very serious.
"What is the matter, Yossouf?"
The lad shook his head. "Trouble is coming," he
said. "The Heratee men are stirring up the people,
and the Budmashes are threatening that they will kill
the English."
"But the Ameer has promised his protection," Will
said; "he has sworn a solemn oath to stand by them."
"Yakoob Khan is weak," the boy said; "he was
a great warrior once, but he has been in prison for
many years and he is no longer firm and strong.
Some of the men round him are bad advisers. Yakoob
Khan is no better than a reed to lean upon."
The next day there were riots in the town. The
Heratee men taunted the people of Cabul with cowar-
dice, and the excitement spread in the city. The
soldiers of the escort could no longer stroll quietly
through the bazaars, but were hooted at and abused,
although of the same religion and race as the people
around them—for the Guide regiments were recruited
from Pathans and other border tribes. Day after day
the position became more threatening. The men of
the escort were ordered no longer to go down into the
town, where their presence was the occasion of tumults.


204
THE DANGER INCREASES.
A native officer of one of our cavalry regiments who
was spending his furlough at a village near Cabul
came into the Bala-Hissar and told Major Cavagnari
that he feared, from rumours that reached him, that
the Heratee regiments would break into mutiny and
attack the embassy. The officer, who was a man of
immense courage and coolness, replied quietly:
"If they do, they can but kill the three or four of
us here, and our deaths will be revenged."
He, however, made representations to the Ameer as
to the threatening behaviour of the Heratee troops;
but Yakoob assured him that he could rely thoroughly
upon his protection, and that even should the Heratee
troops break out in mutiny he would at once suppress
the movement with the Cabul regiments. Yossouf
became daily more anxious. Going into the town to
buy fruits and other necessaries he heard more of what
was going on than could the members of the embassy.
"Things are very bad," he said over and over again.
"It would be better for you all to go away. Why does
your officer stop here to be killed?"
"It is his duty to stay at his post," Will said. "He
has been sent here by the commander-in-chief. He is
like a soldier on outpost duty, he cannot desert his post
because he sees danger approaching; but I wish with
all my heart that an order would come for his recall,
not only because of the danger, but because I am
longing to be back again with my regiment; and
although I am strong enough to ride down to the Pun-


WILL GALE S TOSITION.
205
jaub now, I cannot go except with Sir Lewis and his
escort. Although it is peace a single Englishman could
not travel down to Jellalabad through the passes."
Will had from the first week after the arrival of the
mission fallen into the position of an orderly-room
sergeant. His duties were little more than nominal,
but he acted as assistant to Mr. Jenkyns, and made
copies and duplicates of reports and other documents
which were from time to time sent down to Jellalabad.
Being the only Englishman there with the exception
of the four officers, these greatly relaxed the usual dis-
tance prevailing between an officer and a corporal, and
treated him as a civilian clerk when in office, and with
a pleasant cordiality at other times. Except, indeed,
that he messed alone and kept in his own room of an
evening, he might have been one of the party. Each
day he reported to Sir Lewis the rumours which
Yossouf had gathered in the town. In his reports to
headquarters Major Cavagnari stated that trouble
liad arisen from the conduct of the Heratee troops, but
he scarcely made enough of the real danger which
threatened the little party. Had he done so, the
embassy would probably have been recalled.
"What have you got there, Yossouf?" Will asked
one day when his follower returned with a larger
bundle than usual.
"I have brought the uniform of an Afghan soldier,"
the boy replied, "which I have purchased from the
bazaar; it is for you. I am sure that soon you will be


A WARNING.
207
"Still, Yossouf," Will said, "we must hope that it is
not coming to that. The Ameer has sworn to protect
us, and he can do so. The Bala-Hissar is strong, and
he can easily hold it with one or two of his Cabul
regiments against the Heratee men. He has three or
four of these regiments here. He cannot be so false
to his oath as to allow his guests to be massacred."
Yossouf made a gesture which expressed his utter
disbelief in the Ameer, and then again went about his
duties. On the 2d of September, on his return from
the town, he reported that there was great excitement
among the people, and that he believed that the night
would not pass off without trouble. Major Cavagnari,
to whom Will reported the news, sent in a message to
the Ameer, whose palace was within two or three
hundred yards, and begged him to take measures to
secure the Bala-Hissar against any attack by the
Heratees.
The members of the escort available for the defence
of the residency were but about fifty men. Most of the
cavalry were away; some were down the pass with
despatches, the rest were stationed a short distance off
in the plain, as forage was difficult to obtain in the fort.
The Ameer returned a curt message to Major Cava-
gnari, saying that there was no cause for uneasiness.
The latter, however, doubled the sentries at the gate of
the little inclosure.
Just as the officers were about to retire to rest
Yossouf, who had a short time before gone out again.


208
THE ATTACK ON THE MISSION.
telling Will that he would bring back news of what
was going on, ran in.
"The Heratees are coming," he said. "The gates of
the fort have been left open. The Cabul men are all
in their barracks. They are pouring in at the gates;
do you not hear them?"
William Gale ran to the window, and could hear a
loud and confused noise of yelling and shouting. He
ran in to the envoy's room and warned him that the
Heratees were at hand. Without the loss of a moment's
time Lieutenant Hamilton got his men under arms,
and posted them at the upper windows of 'the house,
where their fire would command the approaches to the
gate. Quickly as this was done the Afghans were close
at hand by the time that each man was at his post,
and instantly opened a scattering fire at the residency,
shouting to the soldiers to come out and join them, and
to bring out the Kaffir officers to be killed. The
Pathans were, however, true to their salt, and in reply
opened a steady fire upon the mass of the enemy. With
wild yells the Afghans rushed at the gate, but so
steadily and rapidly did the defenders shoot from the
upper windows and loopholes cut in the gate that the
assailants were forced to fall back.
"That's right, my lads," Major Cavagnari said cheer-
fully to his men; "we can hold the place for some
time, and the Ameer will bring the Cabul regiments
down in no time and sweep away these rascals."
The Afghans, now some thousands strong, assisted by


A DESPERATE RESISTANCE.
209
all the Budmashes and turbulent portion of the popu-
lation of Cabul, surrounded the house on all sides, and
kept up a heavy and incessant fire, which was coolly
and steadily returned by the Guides. After an hour's
fighting there was a sudden roar above the rattle of
musketry, followed by another and another. Simul-
taneously came the crash of shells. One burst in the
house, the other tore through the gate. Still there was
no sign of the Cabul regiments.
Eight or ten guns were brought to play on the little
garrison. The gate was broken down, and nearly half
the force of the house were already killed or wounded
by the musketry and shell fire. Still they continued
the defence. Over and over again the Afghans swarmed
up close to the gate, only to fall back again before the
steady fire of the Snider rifles of the Guides. Major
Cavagnari went from room to room encouraging the
men, while the other officers and Will Gale, taking
rifles which had fallen from the hands of men no longer
able to use them, set an example of cool and steady
firing to their men.
For four hours the unequal contest continued; then
a cry arose from the men that the house was on fire.
It was but too true. A shell had exploded in the
lower part of the house and had ignited the woodwork,
and the fire had already obtained so firm a hold that it
was impossible to extinguish it. A few of the men
continued their fire from the windows to the last, while
the rest carried their wounded comrades out into the
(274) o


WILL GALE'S ESCAPE.
211
his feet he wrapped round him a loose Afghan cloak,
and pressed a black sheepskin cap far down over his
face. In a minute there was the sound of a fierce
struggle without. The shots of the revolvers of the
two English officers rang out in quick succession,
mingled with the loud report of the Afghan muskets.
The savage yells rose high and triumphant. The last
of the gallant band who had for hours defended the
embassy had fallen. Then there was a rush through
the gate as the Afghans swarmed into the court-yard,
till the space around the burning house was well-
nigh full.
Unperceived Will Gale and Yossouf stepped from
behind the gate and joined the throng, and at once
made their way into the stables, where several of the
Budmashes were already engaged in their work of
plunder. Yossouf caught up three or four horse-rugs
and made them into a loose bundle, and signed to Will
to do the same. The young soldier did so, and lifted
them on his shoulder so as to partly hide his face.
Then he followed Yossouf into the court-yard again.
Already there was a stream of men with saddles,
rugs, muskets, and other plunder making their way
out, while others were still thronging in. Joining the
former Will and his guide were soon outside the inclo-
sure. At any other time his disguise would have been
noticed at once, but in the crowd his legs were hidden,
and all were too intent upon plunder and too excited
at their success to notice him
.


212
THE DISGUISE.
Once outside the wall he was comparatively safe;
the light thrown over the court-yard by the blazing
house made the darkness beyond all the more complete.
Keeping carefully in shadow Yossouf led him along to
a clump of bushes in a garden a hundred yards from
the house. Stooping here he pulled out a bundle.
"Here," he said, "is the uniform. Put it on quickly!"
It was but the work of a minute for Will to attire
himself in the uniform of the Afghan soldier. He had
still retained the musket which he had in his hand
when Yossouf had leapt upon him, and as he now went
on with his guide he had no fear whatever of being
detected. He still carried the bundle of rugs on his
shoulder. As they walked round towards the lower
gate of the Bala-Hissar they met numbers of villagers
and townspeople thronging in. These had waited to
hear the issue of the attack before leaving their homes;
but now that the arrival of the plunderers from the
residency and the cessation of the fire told of the
successful termination of the assault, they nocked up
to join in the rejoicings over the annihilation of the
Kaffirs.


CHAPTER XIV.
THE ADVANCE UPON CABUL.
HROUGHOUT the long hours of the night of
the 2d of September, while the roll of mus-
ketry and the roar of cannon had gone on
without a moment's pause just outside the walls of his
palace, Yakoob Khan had made no movement whatever
to protect his guests or fulfil his own solemn promises.
Silent and sullen he had sat in his council-chamber.
The disgrace of a broken promise is not one which
weighs heavily upon an Afghan's mind, and it is not
probable that the thought of his tarnished honour
troubled him in the slightest degree; but he knew that
the massacre which was being perpetrated at his door
would be avenged, and that the English troops which
had so easily beaten the army which his father had
spent so many years in preparing would be set in move-
ment against Cabul the moment the news reached
India He cannot but have dreaded the consequences.
But he apparently feared even more to incur the hos-
tility of the Heratee regiment by interfering to save
their victims.


214
THE PLANS OF THE FUGITIVES.
Again and again during the night his wisest coun-
cillors besought him to call upon the loyal Cabullee
regiments to act against the Heratees, but in vain. It
is doubtful whether Yakoob was previously informed of
the intended massacre, but there is strong reason to
believe that he was so; the proofs, however, were not
clear and definite. His conduct cost him his throne,
and condemned him to remain to the end of his life a
dishonoured pensioner and semi-prisoner in India.
Many eager questions were asked of Will and his
companion as they made their way down to the gate
of the Bala-Hissar. Yossouf took upon himself to an-
swer them, and they passed through the gate without
the slightest suspicion.
"Which way now?"
"I think it will be safest to go into the city. We
might lie hid for a few days in some deserted hut, but
sooner or later our presence there would excite com-
ment. It will be best, I think, to go into the city.
In the quarters of the Parsee merchants there are
assuredly some who would give you shelter. Domajee,
who was the contractor for the supply of the mis-
sion, would, I should think, be best to go to. There is
little danger, for none will suspect your presence there;
his servants are all Hindoos."
"That is the best place, Yossouf. I have been down
several times to Domajee, and he is certainly devoted
to the English; we can but try him."
The first dawn of morning was breaking when Will


AN ASYLUM.
215
and his faithful friend arrived at the door of the
Parsee trader in the Hindoo quarter of Cabul. The
doors were fastened and barred, for it was impossible
to say whether the attack upon the mission which had
been heard going on all night might not be followed by a
fanatic outbreak against the Hindoo and Parsee traders
in the Hindoo quarter, therefore there was little sleep
that night. Yossouf knocked gently at the door.
"Who is there?" a voice at once inquired from within.
"I come on urgent business with Domajee," Yos-
souf replied; "open quickly, there are but two of us
here."
There was a slight pause, and then the door was
opened, and closed immediately the two visitors had
entered. A light was burning in the large ante-room
as they entered it, and several Hindoos who had been
lying wrapped up in cloths on the floor rose to their
feet to inspect the new-comers. A moment later the
trader himself came down the stairs from an apartment
above.
"What is it?" he asked. He did not pause for an
answer. The light from the lamp he carried fell upon
Will's face, now white as a sheet from loss of blood.
With the one word, "Follow," the Parsee turned on his
heel and led the way upstairs.
"Has the mission been captured?" he asked, as they
entered an empty room.
"Yes," Will replied, "and I believe that I am the only
survivor."


216
THE PARSEE TRADER.
The fatigue of climbing the stairs completed the
work caused by prolonged excitement and loss of
blood; and as he spoke he tottered and would have
fallen had not Yossouf seized him, and with the assis-
tance of the Parsee laid him on a couch.
In a few words Yossouf informed the trader of what
had happened, and satisfied him that no suspicion could
arise of the presence of one of the British in his house.
As the residency had been burnt down, and the bodies
of those who had fallen within it consumed, no one
would suspect that one of the five Englishmen there
had effected his escape, and it would be supposed that
Will's body, like that of Dr. Kelly, had been consumed
in the flames.
The Parsee was sure that Cabul would soon be reoc-
cupied by the British, and putting aside his loyalty to
them he felt that his concealment of an English sur-
vivor of the massacre would be greatly to his advantage,
and would secure for him the custom of the English
upon their arrival at the town. He first descended the
stairs, and warned his Hindoo followers on no account
whatever to breathe a word of the entry of strangers
there. Then he again returned to the room, where
Yossouf was sprinkling water on Will's face, and was
endeavouring to recover him to consciousness.
"There is blood on the couch," the trader said; "he
is wounded, and is suffering from its loss. See! the
sleeve of his coat is soaked with blood, but I see no
mark on the cloth."


IN GOOD HANDS.
217
"No," Yossouf replied; " he has put on that uniform
since the fight."
"Go down-stairs," the trader said; "my wife and
daughter will see to him."
As soon as Yossouf left the room Domajee's wife
and daughter entered with many exclamations of sur-
prise and alarm. They were at once silenced by the
trader, who bid them cut off the wounded man's uni-
form and stanch his wounds. Will had been hit in
two places. One ball had passed through the left arm,
fortunately without injuring the bone; the other had
struck him in the side, had run round his ribs and
gone out behind, inflicting an ugly-looking but not
serious wound—its course being marked by a blue line
on the flesh behind the two holes of entry and exit.
The wounds were washed and bound up, some cordial
was poured between his lips, and ere long he opened
his eyes and looked round in bewilderment.
"You are safe and among friends," the Parsee said.
"Drink a little more of the cordial, and then go off
quietly to sleep. You need have no fear of being dis-
covered, and your friends will be here ere long."
Four of the Hindoo servants now, at the order of the
trader, came upstairs, and, lifting the couch, carried
Will to a cool and airy chamber in the upper story of
the house. Here a soft bed of rugs and mattresses was
prepared, and Will was soon in a quiet sleep, with
Yossouf watching by his side.
It was but twenty-four hours after the massacre


218
PREPARATIONS FOR VENGEANCE.
that a well-mounted native from Cabul brought the
news over the Shatur-Gardan Pass into the Khurum
valley; thence it was telegraphed to Simla, and in a
few hours all India rang with it. Not an instant was
lost in making preparations for avenging the murder
of the British mission. On the same day orders were
sent to Brigadier-General Massy, at that time com-
manding the field force in the Khurum valley, to move
the 23d Punjaub Pioneers, the 5th Ghoorkas, and a
mountain battery to the crest of the Shatur-Gardan
Pass, and to intrench themselves there.
A day or two later the 72d Highlanders and the
5th Punjaub Infantry ascended the Peiwar-Khotal to
Ali-Kheyl, to secure the road between the Khotal and
the pass. The 72d then moved forward and joined
the 23d Pioneers and 5th Ghoorkas on the Shatur-
Gardan, and on the 13th General Baker arrived there
and took the command; but some time was needed be-
fore the advance could commence. As is usual with
the British, the great transport train which had with
such pains been collected and organized for the war,
had been dispersed immediately peace was signed, and
the whole work had now to be recommenced . »
Vast numbers of animals had been used up during
the campaign, and there was the greatest difficulty in
obtaining the minimum number which was required
before the troops could move. At last General Roberts
managed to collect in the Punjaub 2000 mules and 700
camels and bullocks. The tribes in the Khurum valley,


THE AMEER'S MESSAGES.
219
too, who had been kindly treated and were well satis-
fied with the change of masters, furnished many
animals for the transport of stores as far as the Shatur-
Gardan.
The news had thrown the Gilgis and other tribes
among the mountains beyond the Peiwar-Khotal into
a state of ferment, and several determined attacks were
made by them upon convoys on their way up to the
head of the pass. These, however, were always suc-
cessfully repulsed by the baggage guards with con-
siderable loss to the assailants, and on the 26th Sep-
tember, three weeks from the date of the massacre,
General Roberts joined the troops at Ali-Kheyl and
moved forward to the Shatur-Gardan.
During this time two or three letters had been re-
ceived from the Ameer, who wrote to General Roberts
deprecating any advance of the British troops, and
saying that he was trying to restore order, to put
down the mutinous Heratee troops, and to punish them
for their conduct.
As, however, the details which had been received of
the massacre showed that the Ameer had behaved in
a most suspicious if not in a most treacherous manner
at the time of the massacre, and that if he possessed
any authority whatever over the troops he had not
attempted to exercise it, no attention was paid to his
letters.
The advanced party of the invading force moved
down from the Shatur-Gardan Pass. It consisted of


220
THE ADVANCE.
the 12th and 14th Bengal Cavalry, two guns of the
Royal Horse Artillery, two companies of the 72d
Highlanders, and the 5th Punjaub Native Infantry.
The road was found to be extremely steep and diffi-
cult, and much labour was necessary before it could
be made practicable for guns and wheeled carriages. No
enemy was encountered, and the little force encamped
at night in the Logan valley, over which the cavalry
skirmished far ahead, but found no foes awaiting
them.
On the following day they made another march for-
ward, the brigades of Generals Baker and Macpherson
descending from the pass into the valley. The advance
force halted at Zerghun-Shah, and soon after they had
done so some of the cavalry rode in with the surpris-
ing news that the Ameer was close at hand.
Half an hour later Yakoob Khan, attended by some
of his principal nobles, rode into camp. He was re-
ceived with the honour due to his rank, but personally
General Roberts greeted him with great coldness. The
Ameer stated that he came into camp because he could
not control the soldiery of Cabul, and that therefore
he had left the place and come in to show his friend-
ship for the English.
Whatever may have been the motives for his coming,
they were never fully explained; circumstances which
afterwards occurred strongly confirmed the suspicion
that he meditated treachery. He was treated honour-
ably; but the guard of honour which was assigned to


EXCITEMENT AMONG THE TRIBES.
221
him was in fact a guard over him, and from that time
he was virtually a prisoner.
General Roberts declined altogether to discuss with
him the events of the massacre of Cabul, saying that this
was a matter which could not now be entered into,
but would be fully investigated on the arrival at the
Afghan capital. The following day the brigades of
Generals Baker and Hacpherson joined the advance at
Zerghun-Shah.
The amount of transport available was only suffi-
cient for half the baggage of the army, and it was
necessary, therefore, to move forward in two divisions
—the one advancing a day's march, and then halting
while the animals went back to bring up the baggage
of the second division on the following day.
A proclamation was now issued by the general and
sent forward among the people of the valley, saying
that the object of the expedition was only to punish
those concerned in the massacre at Cabul, and that all
loyal subjects of the Ameer would be well treated. On
the 3d of October M acpherson's brigade, with the cavalry,
reached Suffed-Sang. Here they halted while the bag-
gage animals went back to bring up General Baker's
brigade.
The attitude of the people of the valley had now
become very threatening. Great numbers of hill-tribe-
men had come down, and on this day an attack was
made upon the rear-guard, but was beaten off with
loss. That the natives were bitterly hostile was un-


A DIFFICULT ALTERNATIVE.
223
column would march straight up the valley into the
defile, where they would be helplessly slaughtered by
the guns and matchlock men on the heights. Judging
from their own tactics they had reason for the belief
that their position was an impregnable one.
In their hill fights the Afghans never come to close
quarters. Posted behind rocks and huge boulders, the
opposing sides keep up a distant musketry duel, last-
ing sometimes for days, until one side or the other
becomes disheartened with its losses or has exhausted
its ammunition. Then it falls back, and the other
claims the victory. The idea that English soldiers
would, under a heavy fire from their concealed force,
steadily climb up the broken mountain-side and come
to close quarters, probably never entered into their
calculations.
At daybreak on the 6th a working party were sent
forward to improve the road towards the defile. But
they had scarcely started when the cavalry patrol in
advance rode in and announced that the enemy were
in great strength on the hills, and had guns in position
to command the road.
General Roberts had now a choice of two courses—
he could either attack the whole Afghan force with
the one division at hand, or he could wait until joined
by Macpherson's brigade next morning. The feat of
carrying such a position in face of an immensely
superior force with only half of his little command
was a very serious one; but upon the other hand every


224 THE ADVANCE AGAINST THE AFGHANS.
hour added to the number of hillmen who swarmed
upon the flanks of the army just beyond musket range.
A delay of twenty-four hours would bring the whole
fighting force of the tribesmen into the valley, and
while attacking the enemy's position in the front he
would be liable to an assault upon his rear by them.
Confident in the valour of his soldiers he chose the
first alternative, and at eleven o'clock his little force
marched out from the camp to attack the Afghan army.
By this time the enemy's position had been recon-
noitred, and it was found to be too strong for a direct
attack. It was therefore resolved to ascend the hills
on both flanks and so to drive their defenders back
beyond the defile. This in any case would have been
the best mode of assault, but against semi-savage ene-
mies flank attacks are peculiarly effective. Having
prepared for an assault in one direction, they are dis-
concerted and disheartened by finding themselves at-
tacked in a different manner, and the fear of a flank
being turned and the line of retreat thereby menaced
will generally suffice to cause a rapid retreat.
General Baker himself took the command of the
left attack. His force consisted of four guns of No. 2
Mountain Battery, two Gatling guns, the 7th com-
pany of Sappers and Miners, a wing of the 72d High-
landers, six companies of the 5th Ghoorkas, 200 men
of the 5th Punjaub Infantry, and 450 of the 23d
Pioneers. This was the main column of attack. The
left column, under the command of Major White


THE BATTLE OF CHARASIA.
225
of the 72d Highlanders, consisted of a wing of that
regiment, 100 men of the 23d Pioneers, three guns of
the Royal Artillery, and two squadrons of cavalry.
This attack was intended only as a feint, and to dis-
tract the attention of the Afghans from the main at-
tack. A strong reserve was left in Chaurasia to guard
the baggage and to overhaul the tribesmen.
As General Baker's column reached the foot of the
hills, the 23d, who led the advance, thrown out in
skirmishing line, began to climb the ascent. The enemy
were armed with Sniders and Enfields, and their fire
was rapid and continuous; fortunately it was by no
means accurate, and our losses were small.
The Afghans in their hill fighting are accustomed to
fire very slowly and deliberately, taking steady aim
with their guns resting on the rocks, and so fighting
they are excellent shots. It is probable, however, that
the steady advance of our men towards them flurried
and disconcerted them, and that they thought more of
firing quickly than of taking a correct aim. The 72d
pressing up the hill were assisted by the fire of the
mountain guns and Gatlings, and by that of the Pun-
jaubees in their rear. Gradually the upper slopes of
the hills were gained, and the British troops pressing
forward drove the Afghans back along the crest.
Several times they made obstinate stands, holding
their ground until the 72d were close to them.
These, however, would not be denied. The massacre
of the mission at Cabul had infuriated the soldiers, and
(274) p


226 THE CAPTURE OF THE DEFILE
each man was animated with a stern determination
to avenge our murdered countrymen. For an hour and
a half the fight continued, and then the Afghans aban-
doned the ridge and fled in confusion. They rallied
upon some low hills 600 yards from the rear, but the
mountain guns and Gatlings opened upon them, and
the whole line advancing to the attack, the enemy
fell back. Major White's column had been doing ex-
cellent service on the right. Although the attack had
been intended only as a feint it was pushed forward
so vigorously that it met with a success equal to that
which had attended the main column on the left. The
enemy were driven off the hills on the right of the
defile. Twenty guns were captured, and the direct
road cleared of the enemy.
Unfortunately our cavalry was in the rear. The
road through the pass was difficult, and before they
could get through into the plain on the other side
the masses of Afghans had fallen back into the strong
villages scattered over it, and could not be attacked by
cavalry alone. The enemy had from 9000 to 10,000 men
upon the ridge, including thirteen regiments of regular
troops. They left 300 dead upon the field, and besides
these carried off large numbers of killed and wounded
during the fight. Upon our side only 20 were killed
and 67 wounded.
Had General Roberts had his whole force with him,
he could after capturing the hills have at once pushed
forward and have attacked the enemy on the plain, and


DISPERSAL OF THE AFGHAN ARMY. 227
the Afghans, disheartened and panic-stricken, would
have been completely crushed. With so small a force
in hand, and the possibility of a serious attack by the
tribes on his rear, General Roberts did not think it
prudent to advance farther, and the regiments which
had taken the principal part in the massacre of Cabul
marched away unmolested.
Enormously superior as they still were in numbers
they had no thought of further resistance. The cap-
ture of positions which they deemed impregnable by
a force so inferior in number to their own had utterly
disheartened them, and the Heratee regiments, which
but the day before had been so proudly confident of
their ability to exterminate the Kaffirs, were now ut-
terly demoralized and panic-stricken. In the night the
whole of the Afghan troops scattered and fled. Our
cavalry, under General Massy, swept along the plain
of Cabul, and, skirting the town, kept on as far as the
Ameer's great intrenched camp at Sherpur, three miles
further along the valley. Here 75 guns were captured.
In the morning Macpherson arrived. General Ro-
berts now advanced with his whole force of infantry
and found that he had no longer a foe before him.
The Afghan army had disappeared. There was no
longer any occasion for haste, and the column halted
until all the baggage had been brought up through the
difficult defile. The total defeat of the Afghan army
had overawed the tribesmen, and these at once retired
to their hills again.


228
THE ENTRY INTO CABUL.
The villagers, however, were bitterly hostile, and
seized every opportunity of firing at small bodies of
troops on cavalry patrols. This continued for some
time, and General Roberts at last was obliged to punish
it with severity, and in such cases all found with arms
in their hands were at once shot. On the 11th of Oc-
tober Sir Frederick Roberts and his staff with a cavalry
escort rode into the Bala-Hissar, and the next morning
the British troops marched into the fort. The gates of
Cabul stood open, and a column was marched through
the town and formal possession taken of it.
During the first five weeks which elapsed after the
massacre of the mission William Gale remained almost
prostrate in the house of the friendly Parsee trader. He
had barely recovered his strength after his prolonged
illness when the attack was made, and the events of
that night, and the great loss of blood which he had
suffered, had reduced his strength to that of an infant.
Under the care of the Parsee and his family, however,
he slowly but steadily regained strength. For the first
month but little news from without reached him; then
a report came that the British had assembled in con-
siderable force on the crest of the Shatur-Gardan, and
were going to move on Cabul from that direction
.
Then day by day the tidings came in of the advance
of the force.
It was reported generally that the Ameer had gone
out to meet them, with the intention of leaving them
when the decisive moment arrived and taking com-


CHAPTER XV.
THE FIGHTING ROUND CABUL.
LL day long on the 6th of October William
Gale sat at an open window in the upper
story of the Parsee's house facing west, and
listened to the distant roar of the battle, while all Cabul
was in a state of wild excitement in the sure anticipa-
tion of victory. Will felt equally confident as to the
result of the battle. He knew that, well led, a British
force could be trusted to carry any position held by the
Afghans, and he felt sure that even should he fail to
carry it by direct attack the English general would sooner
or later succeed in turning it by flank movements.
About two o'clock in the afternoon William noticed
a change in the character of the sounds in the town. In
the Hindoo quarter all had been quiet, for the inhabi-
tants greatly feared that, in a burst of fanaticism fol-
lowing a victory achieved over the British, the Afghans
might sack the Hindoo quarter and murder its inha-
bitants. Yossouf, however, had been all the morning
out in the town, and had from time to time brought in
a report of the rumours current there.


CONFLICTING EMOTIONS.
231
At first it was said that the British were being ut-
terly routed, that they were being exterminated by
the Afghan fire, that the hill-tribes were sweeping
down upon their rear, and that not a man would escape.
Presently the reports became more contradictory. The
firing was still heard, but it was no longer one con-
tinuous roll. Some said that the British were anni-
hilated; others that, repulsed in their attack, they had
fallen back to their camp; but soon after two o'clock
Yossouf rushed up to William's room with the news
that the Afghans had been driven from the heights,
and that the British were in possession of these and of
the defile through them. Yossouf had throughout the
morning been swayed by conflicting emotions and
wishes. At one moment he hoped that his countrymen
might conquer; then the fear that after victory the
Hindoo quarter might be sacked and his English friend
discovered and killed, overpowered his feeling of pa-
triotism.
It must be remembered that Afghanistan has for
centuries been rather a geographical expression than
a country. Its population is composed of a great
number of tribes without any common feelings or in-
terest, and often engaged in desperate wars and con-
flicts with each other. The two leading tribes, the
Ghilzais and Duranees, had long struggled for ascen-
dency in the cultivated portion of the country. For
a long period the Ghilzais had had the supremacy,
but the Duranees were now lords of the country.


232
THE AFGHAN TRIBE.
The mountain tribes for the most part held them-
selves entirely independent, and although in time they
gave a nominal allegiance to the Ameer of Cabul, yet>
as had been shown in the Khurum valley, they hated
their native masters with an animosity far exceeding
that which they felt towards the British. That
throughout the war the tribesmen were ready when
they saw an opportunity to attack English convoys
and small columns is true, but they were animated by
a love of plunder rather than of country; and over a
considerable area of Afghanistan, notably at Candahar,
the people in general would have infinitely preferred
the mild and just rule of the English to the military
tyranny of Cabul.
Thus Yossouf had grown up without understanding
the meaning of the feeling which we call patriotism. He
had, it is true, been taught to hate the unbelievers, but
this feeling had disappeared on his acquaintance with
Will Gale, and he now ranked the safety and happiness
of his friend far before any national consideration.
How weak is the feeling of patriotism among the
Afghans is shown by the fact that most of the British
frontier troops consist of Afghan hillmen, who are
always ready, when called upon, to fight desperately
against their countrymen and co-religionists. Examples
of treachery, such as that exhibited by the two
Pathans who fired their guns to warn their country-
men of the British advance up the Spingwai Pass, are
almost unknown.


WILL REJOINS THE TROOPS.
233
It was then with a feeling of joy that Yossouf related
to his English friends the news of the defeat of the
Afghan army. Throughout the Hindoo quarter there
was deep but suppressed gladness at the news of the
British victory, and this increased when, as the night
went on, it was known that the Afghan army was
totally dispersed, that the troops remaining in Cabul
had fled, and that the city was virtually open for the
entrance of the English.
When, on the 12th, with bands playing and colours
displayed, the British troops marched through Cabul,
Will would fain have gone out and joined his coun-
trymen. But the Parsee pointed out to him that
this would draw the attention of the Afghans to the
fact that he had been concealed by him, and that in
case at any time the British should evacuate Cabul
and return to India he would be a marked man for
the vengeance of the Afghans. Will, therefore, wrapped
up in a long cloak and accompanied by Yossouf and
the Parsee, left the house after dark, and proceeding to
the gate walked out to the Bala-Hissar.
Explaining who he was Will was soon passed through
the sentries which had been set at nightfall, and was
conducted to the quarters of the general. The latter
was greatly surprised when he was told that an Eng-
lish soldier who had been present at the attack upon
the mission wished to speak to him, and at once
ordered Will to be brought before him. Great was his
surprise when he learned from the young soldier that


234
SURPRISE OF THE GENERAL.
he had fought under him at the taking of Peiwar-
Khotal, and having been made prisoner near Ali-Kheyl
had been brought to Cabul, and had joined the party of
Sir Lewis Gavagnari on its arrival at that city. Still
more that, having been in the residency when the
attack upon it was commenced by the Heratee soldiery,
he had managed to escape from the massacre of that
night.
After having first heard a complete outline of Will's
story the general called in several of his staff, who
had just finished dinner, and then requested Will to
give a full and detailed description of his adventures.
After he had concluded, Yossouf and the Parsee were
called in, and the general warmly expressed his grati-
fication at the kindness that they had shown to a
wounded English soldier at the risk of their lives.
He ordered that a handsome present should be made
to Yossouf, and told the Parsee to call again in the
morning, when the quartermaster-general would be
told to arrange with him for the supply of such articles
as the country afforded for the use of the troops.
"Your regiment," he said to Will, "is at present at
Jellalabad; whether it will come up here I do not yet
know, but in the meantime you will be promoted to
the rank of sergeant, which is the least we can do after
what you have gone through, and you will take your
place with my staff orderly sergeants."
He then sent for one of the sergeants and gave Will
into his charge, telling him he would speak further


YOSSOUF FOLLOWS WILL.
235
with him when he had arranged the pressing business
which the occupation of Cabul entailed upon him.
Yossouf remained with Will, being at his urgent
request placed upon the roll as a native follower, of
whom a considerable number accompany each regiment
in India. His duties were but nominal, for when Will's
story was well known Yossouf became a most popular
character among the sergeants of the staff. The money
which he had received, in the first place from the
Ameer and now from General Roberts, would secure his
future. In Afghanistan animals are cheap, and the
owner of a small herd of oxen, sheep, or even goats, is
regarded by his neighbours as a wealthy man. There-
fore Yossouf would, on the departure of the British, be
able to settle down in a position of comparative affluence.
Two days later General Roberts being one evening
disengaged sent for William Gala He had been much
struck with the bearing and manner of the young
soldier, and now requested him to give him a full
history of his antecedents.
"You have had a curious and eventful history," he
said when the young sergeant had finished, "and
appear to have conducted yourself with great discre-
tion, readiness, and courage. From what you tell me
of your conversation with Colonel Shepherd I have no
doubt that he formed the same impression that I do
from your manner and appearance, that you are of a
respectable if not of good family, and I trust that you
will some day discover a clue to your parents. It


236
A COMMISSION PROMISED.
seems to me that had the authorities of the place
where you were left properly bestirred themselves
they ought to have been able to find out who you are.
However, that is not to the point now. It is sufficient
for me that from your manner and address you would
not be out of place in any position. I shall, of course,
report the fact of your having fought by Major Cava-
gnari's side in the attack upon him here, and shall
strongly recommend that a commission be granted you.
I am sure that from your conduct hitherto you will
never do discredit to any position in which you may
find yourself. Say nothing to your fellow sergeants
of what I have told you. It is possible, although
not probable, that my recommendation may not be
acted upon, and at anyrate some months must elapse
before an answer can be received."
William Gale returned to his quarters in a state of
extreme delight. The communication which General
Roberts had made to him was altogether beyond his
hopes. He had indeed from the very day that he
enlisted often hoped that some time or other he might
win for himself a commission, and take his place in the
rank to which he had from his childhood believed that
he was by birth entitled. The words and manner of
his colonel had encouraged this hope, but he had never
dreamed that his promotion might be attained so soon.
It was but a year since he had enlisted, and five was
the very earliest at which he had even dreamed that
a commission might possibly be gained.



"one ok the gunpowder magazines had exploded."





A TERRIBLE EXPLOSION.
237
The next day he had been sent from the orderly-
room with a note to the colonel of the 67th, which was
the regiment now in quarters in the Bala-Hissar, the
rest of the force being encamped in the plain below.
As he was walking across the open he was suddenly
hurled to the ground with tremendous violence, and at
the same moment a roar as loud as that of thunder
sounded in his ears. Bewildered and half stunned he
rose to his feet, while showers of stones, beams, and
other debris fell around him.
One of the gunpowder magazines had exploded. It
had been known that very large quantities of powder
were stored in various buildings at the Bala-Hissar,
and at the moment of the explosion a body of engineers
under Captain Shafto were examining the buildings
in which it was stored, and making preparation for
the removal of the powder. Singularly enough no
soldiers of the 67th were killed, but of the Ghoorkas
who were on guard at the arsenal at the time twelve
were killed and seven wounded. Shafto was unfor-
tunately killed. The 67th were at once called out
and set to work to extinguish the flames which had
been kindled by the explosion, great damage being
done. The southern wall of the arsenal had been
blown down and several buildings set on fire. Ex-
plosion followed explosion, and the work of extin-
guishing the flames was an extremely dangerous one.
In the afternoon another magazine blew up; fortunately
no troops were in its neighbourhood at the time, but


238
A BELEAGUERED GARRISON.
four Afghans were killed and several soldiers hurt at a
distance of three or four hundred yards from the spot.
Although it was never proved, it was strongly be-
lieved that these explosions were caused by the Afghans,
and as large quantities of powder still remained in the
Bala-Hissar it was determined that for the present the
place should be evacuated. The general therefore
with his staff and the regiment in garrison left the
place and joined the camp in the plain.
The little force at Cabul was now isolated. Troops
were slowly coming up the Khyber Pass to Jellalabad,
where a division was to be formed, destined in the
spring to join the force at Cabul should it be necessary
to carry on further operations.
Between Cabul and the Shatur-Gardan the natives
were in a restless and excited state. Two attacks by
3000 men had been made on the garrison holding the
crest of the latter position, 300 in number. These
bravely sallied out, attacked the enemy in the open,
and killed large numbers of them. Still great num-
bers of the tribesmen were gathered round, and General
Gough with the 5th Punjaubee Cavalry, the 5th Pun-
jaubee Infantry, and four guns, was therefore sent from
Cabul to bring down from the Shatur-Gardan the gar-
rison and all the stores accumulated there. The pass,
which would shortly be closed by snow, was then to be
deserted.
Several executions now took place at Cabul of men
who were proved to have shared in the attack on the


ABDICATION OF THE AMEER.
239
embassy. Some of the leading men of the place, who
had instigated the troops to the attack, were among
those executed. Many of the villagers were also hung for
shooting at detached bodies of our troops. A proclama-
tion had been issued by the general on his first arrival,
warning the people that any attempt against our
authority would be severely punished, forbidding the
carrying of weapons within the streets of Cabul or
within a distance of five miles of the city gates,
and offering a reward for all arms belonging to the
Afghan troops, which should be given up, and for the
surrender of any person, whether soldier or civilian,
concerned in the attack on the embassy.
The position of the British force at Cabul was that
of a body holding only the ground they occupied in
the midst of a bitterly hostile country.
The Ameer was powerless, and indeed his good-will
was more than doubtful. He had from his arrival in
the camp been regarded as a prisoner, although treated
with courtesy; and after the battle of Charasia, feeling
his own impotence, and being viewed with hostility by
both parties, he resigned his position as Ameer, and
asked to be sent to India, which was done. The
abdication of the Ameer really took place on the day
the troops entered Cabul, but it was not publicly
known until the end of the month, as nothing could
be done on the subject until his desire was communi-
cated to the Indian authorities and their views concer-
ning it ascertained.


240
THE SHERPUR BARRACKS.
From the moment of his arrival at Cabul General
Roberts had set to work to prepare for the winter.
He would for four or five months be entirely cut off,
and would have to rely upon himself alone. He had
before him the terrible catastrophe which had on the
same ground befallen General Elphinstone's army, and
knew that it was possible, and indeed probable, that,
with the memory of that success before them, the
Afghans would unite in another great effort to anni-
hilate the little force shut up in the heart of their
country.
Fortunately he had in the Ameer's barracks at
Sherpur a position which he was confident he could
hold against any attacks that could be made upon him.
These extensive barracks had been erected by Sheer-
Ali for the use of his cavalry, but had never been used.
They consisted of a large square, three sides of which
were surrounded by a lofty wall, an isolated and rocky
steep hill rising at the back and closing the fourth
side. The buildings were amply large enough to con-
tain the whole of General Roberts' force, and there
was abundant room for the stores, baggage animals,
and waggons; the only fault was, indeed, that the
extent of wall to be defended was too long for the
force at his disposal. Round two sides the outer wall
was complete, but on the third it had not been taken
to its full height, nor had it been continued so as to
join the hill behind it.
Great efforts were made to bring in sufficient provi-


PREPARING FOR WINTER.
241
sions and forage for the winter, and expeditions were
made up the Logan, Maidan, and other valleys for the
purpose. Winter was fast setting in. Snow had begun
to fall upon the hills, and ice formed on the pools
every night. The natives of the valleys near were
ready enough to sell their grain, straw, and fuel, but
few supplies came in from a distance, as armed bands
stopped all supplies on their way. However, a suffi-
cient amount of food and fuel was obtained and stored
in Sherpur. Grain, too, was procured for the winter,
and the only article of which the supply was insuffi-
cient was chopped straw, of which a very large quantity
was required.
The attitude of the natives grew daily more hostile.
Their priests were preaching a revolt to the death, and
recalling to the people how their fathers had annihi-
lated a British force thirty years before. Urged alike
by fanaticism and a desire for plunder, the natives
over the whole country were seething with excitement,
and General Roberts saw that a crisis was approaching.
The Afghans could assemble at least 100,000 men,
and among these would be included all the troops of
the Ameer's disbanded armies, armed with weapons
equal to our own, and burning to revenge the defeats
which had been inflicted upon them. To oppose them
the English general had less than 6000 men. But
though prepared for trouble, the storm, when it came,
burst suddenly upon the English. The enemy were
known to be collecting in great numbers in the Maidan
(274) 56 Q


242
THE AFGHAN OUTBREAK.
valley, and two columns were sent out to attack them.
One was commanded by Macpherson, the other by
Baker. Although they were to strike simultaneously
at the enemy their route of march lay up different
valleys, with a lofty mountain range between them, so
they could in no way co-operate with each other. After
they had started, General Massy was directed to move
out with a small force of cavalry and a battery of horse
artillery, and co-operate with General Macpherson.
An hour after the cavalry had started General
Roberts himself rode out. He was accompanied by his
usual escort, and by two mounted orderly sergeants.
One of these was William Gale. They had only pro-
ceeded a short distance when they heard some distance
ahead of them the guns of the Royal Horse Artillery
with Massy at work, and the general at once rode
forward at a gallop.
General Macpherson had found Mahomed Jan, one
of the principal leaders of the Afghans, with 10,000
men near Chardeh.
A fight ensued. The guns shelled the enemy, but
the water-courses prevented the cavalry with Mac-
pherson acting, and Mahomed Jan, moving across the
hills, placed himself between Macpherson and Cabul.
Shortly afterwards General Massy, who had with him
three troops of the 9th Lancers and forty-four men of
the 14th Bengal Lancers, with four guns under Major
Smith-Wyndham, came in sight of a portion of Ma-
homed Jan's force.


GENERAL MASSY'S ACTION.
243
It was clear that these had in some way interposed
themselves between the little force and Macpherson's
column, and Massy supposed that they were a party
of fugitives flying before the force of Macpherson or
Baker. As they came streaming down the hill he got
his guns into action. After a few shells had been
fired, the enemy advanced in full force. Four thousand
men were extended in the shape of a crescent, advanc-
ing in fairly good order, while behind was an irregular
mob of some six thousand men.
The ground upon which General Massy found him-
self at this time was singularly unfitted for the action
of artillery. It was cut up by deep water-courses, and
anything like rapidity of movement was impossible.
It would have been prudent had Massy, when he saw
how large was the force opposed to him, at once
retired until he came to ground where his guns could
be rapidly manoeuvred; but relying upon the effect of
the shell, he remained in the position in which he had
first discovered the enemy. The shell pitched rapidly
into the thick of the Afghans, but no effect was pro-
duced in checking their advance. They did not
waver for a moment, but came steadily on. The
enemy's bullets were now dropping fast among the
cavalry and guns. Thirty of the 9th Lancers were
dismounted and opened fire with their Martini carbines,
but the enemy were too numerous to be checked by so
small a body of men.
At this moment Sir Frederick Roberts arrived upon


244
A SPLENDID CHARGE.
the spot. The position was serious, and to retire the
guns in safety it was absolutely necessary to check the
advance of the enemy. General Roberts therefore
ordered Massy to send his cavalry at the enemy.
Colonel Cleland led a squadron of the 9th full at
the advancing mass, the Bengal Lancers following,
while Captain Gough with his troop of the 9th charged
the enemy's left flank; but even the charge of Bala-
clava was scarcely more desperate than this. Two
hundred and twenty men, however gallant, could not
be expected to conquer 10,000. The three bodies of
cavalry charged at full speed into the midst of the
enemy's infantry, who received them with a terrible
fire which killed many horses and men. The impetus
of the charge bore down the leading ranks of the
Afghans, and the cavalry tore their way through the
mass until their progress was blocked by sheer weight
of numbers.
A desperate melee took place, the troopers fighting
with their sabres, the Afghans with knives and clubbed
muskets. Many of the soldiers were struck from their
horses, some were dragged to their feet again by their
comrades, others were killed upon the ground. The
chaplain of the force, the Rev. Mr. Adams, had ac-
companied the troopers in the charge, and seeing a
man jammed under a fallen horse he leaped from his
saddle and extricated him, and brought him off in
spite of the attack of several Afghans. For this act of
bravery he received the Victoria Cross, being the first


THE GUNS ABANDONED. 245
chaplain in the army who had ever obtained that de-
coration.
When the dust raised by the charging squadrons
had subsided it was seen that the enemy were still ad-
vancing. The Lancers had fallen back, and as the men
galloped in they rallieji behind Captain Gough's troop,
which had kept best together, and had formed up
again between the guns and the enemy. Lieutenants
Hersee and Ricardo and sixteen of their men had been
left dead upon the ground. Colonel Cleland, Lieu-
tenant Mackenzie, and seven of the troopers were
wounded.
A second charge was ordered, but this time it was
not pushed home, as a wide water-course checked the
advance. Under cover of the first cavalry charge
Major Smith-Wyndham had ordered two of the guns
to be taken oft', and as he now fell back with the other
two one of them stuck in the water-course. The
greatest efforts were made with the horses which still
remained uninjured to get the gun out, but the enemy
were pressing close on. Lieutenant Hardy was killed
by a shot through the head, and the gun was aban-
doned. The other three guns were retired 400 or 500
yards farther, but here they became hopelessly bogged
in a channel deeper than any that had hitherto been
met with. They were spiked and left in the water,
and the drivers and gunners moved off with the
cavalry just as the enemy poured down upon them.
Seeing the danger of the situation and the large


246
A CALL FOR AID.
force of the enemy, General Roberts had, on his first
arrival, sent off a trooper at full gallop to General
Gough, who commanded at Sherpur, ordering him to
send out two hundred men of the 72d Highlanders at
the double to hold the gorge leading direct from the
scene of conflict to Cabul. There was but a very small
garrison of British troops in the city, and had the enemy
made their way there the townspeople would have risen
and a serious disaster taken place. After leaving the
guns behind them the cavalry retired steadily towards
the village at the head of the gorge, keeping up a hot
fire with their carbines on the enemy who pressed
upon them.
'"Ride back, Sergeant Gale," the general said, "and
meet the 72d. Hurry them up at full speed—every
minute is precious."
William Gale rode back at full speed. Until a fort-
night before he had never been on a horse, but the
animal which he rode was well trained and steady,
and hitherto he had had no difficulty in keeping his
seat as he trotted along with the escort. It was a
different thing now, for the ground was rough and the
horse going at a full gallop, and he clung on to the
pummel of the saddle to steady himself. As he passed
through the village he saw the Highlanders coming
along at a trot half a mile further on, and was soon
beside Colonel Brownlow, who commanded them.
"The enemy are pressing the cavalry back, sir," he
said as with difficulty he pulled up his horse. "The


JUST IN TIME. 247
general desires you to use the greatest possible speed,
as every moment is precious."
Panting and out of breath as the Highlanders were
they responded to Colonel Brownlow's shout, and rush-
ing forward almost at racing speed reached the village
while the Afghans were still 100 yards beyond it.
They instantly opened such a fire upon the enemy that
the latter ceased their advance and soon fell back, and
Cabul was for the moment safe.



CHAPTER XVI.
THE FIGHT IN THE PASS.
HE Afghan force, after half an hour's effort
to carry the village held by the High-
landers, moved off to their left, and work-
ing along the hills took post on the heights beyond
Bala-Hissar. In the meantime General Macpherson,
having dispersed a strong body of the enemy up the
valley, marched back towards Cabul, and coming
across the scene of the late action brought in the
bodies of the dead officers. The guns had already been
carried off, for as the enemy advanced Colonel Mac-
gregor, collecting a handful of lancers and artillery-
men, worked round to their rear, and, dispersing a small
body of the enemy who had lingered at a village near
the guns, succeeded in extricating the cannon from the
swamp and carried them off to Sherpur.
From the signal-post established above Bala-Hissar
an order was flashed to General Baker, who was many
miles away, to inform him of what had occurred, and
to order him to march back with all speed. Late that
evening he arrived with his column, and the British


STORMING THE HEIGIIT.
249
force was again united. The next day 560 men of
Macpherson's brigade, composed of portions of the
67th, the 72d, the 3d Sikhs, and 5th Ghoorkas, were
sent out to attack the enemy, who had established
themselves upon a lofty peak south of Cabul.
The Afghans occupied the crest in strength, and hidden
behind the hill had 5000 or 6000 men lying in wait to
attack the assailing party in the rear as they pressed
upwards. The position was, however, too strong to be
carried. After several hours of fighting the little British
force had driven the Afghans from the lower part of
the hill, but were unable to mount towards the crest,
for ammunition was running short, and the enemy were
too strongly posted. General Roberts therefore ordered
Macpherson to hold the ground which he had gained
until next morning, when more troops would be sent.
At eight o'clock in the morning, accordingly, General
Baker moved out from Sherpur with a strong force and
attacked the enemy's position in flank, while Macpher-
son continued his advance in front. The Afghans
fought desperately, and clung to their position until
the British were close up, when a desperate hand-to-
hand struggle took place, and the British became mas-
ters of the position.
While the fighting had been going on great masses
of the enemy had come down from the end of the
valley and threatened the road between Sherpur and
Cabul. The 9th Lancers made a magnificent charge
among them, broke them, and drove them back.


250
THE ENEMY REINFORCED.
Several other brilliant charges were made, and the
plain was kept clear of the enemy. Captain Butson,
however, who commanded, was killed, and two other
officers wounded. With each hour that passed the
position grew more serious, as immense bodies of the
enemy were seen advancing from all sides. The city
was now in open revolt, and the small garrison there
with difficulty held their own. One more effort was
made to drive the enemy off the hills.
Early on the loth General Baker, with 1200 infantry
and eight guns, left the cantonment. After very severe
fighting the enemy were driven from their lowest posi-
tions, but as Baker advanced a body of from 15,000 to
20,000 of the enemy marched out across the plain
towards the position just captured. Steadily they ad-
vanced, and the shells which our mountain guns sent
among them, and the volleys poured down from the
face of the hill, did not suffice to check them in the
slightest . Reassured by their own enormous numbers,
and feeling that success was in their grasp, they pressed
forward and desperate fighting took place.
A position held by the 5th Punjaub Infantry was
carried by their attack and two guns were lost, but
the rest of the positions were maintained. Seeing that
it was impossible to hold the Bala-Hissar and Cabul
in the face of the hordes opposed to him, which
were estimated by the general himself as numbering
80,000 men, but which the Afghans themselves after-
wards acknowledged were between 100,000 and 120,000,


SAFE IN THE CANTONMENTS.
251
General Roberts determined to concentrate his troops
at Sherpur. Baker was ordered to maintain the posi-
tion he held at all costs until the troops from the Bala-
Hissar were withdrawn. This he did; and although
as he fell back the Afghan hordes swarmed round him,
he fought his way back to Sherpur, and by nightfall all
the British force were safely gathered in the canton-
ments there.
Two days previously General Roberts had tele-
graphed for the regiments most advanced in the passes
below to come forward; they arrived on the morning
of the ICth, and the general had no longer any anxiety
as to his ability to hold the cantonments for months,
if necessary, against the attacks of the Afghans. Had
these attacked on the morning following what was vir-
tually a victory, whilst still flushed with triumph and
excitement, it would have needed all the efforts of the
English to hold their position against so formidable
an attack. The Afghans, however, contented them-
selves with occupying several walled villages near
the cantonment and keeping up an incessant fire
upon it.
Meanwhile their main body indulged in wild excesses
in Cabul, sacking the Hindoo quarter and plundering
all the shops without much distinction of nationality.
Thus three days elapsed, the British making the most
of the time afforded them by strengthening the weak
points of their defences. Lines of waggons were placed
in the gap between the unfinished wall and the foot


252
THE AFGHAN ASSAULT.
of the hill. Wires were stretched in all directions and
chevaux-de-frise erected beyond.
On the 18th the enemy came down in force, and for
some hours a tremendous musketry fire was kept up
at the position; but the fire of the musketry and
guns from the walls was so hot that they did not
venture upon an attack. The following day General
Baker sallied out and attacked a fortified post a few
hundred yards from the wall. From this place the
enemy had greatly annoyed the garrison. After some
severe fighting the Afghans were driven out and the
place blown up.
On the evening of the 22d the general received news
that the Afghans, having prepared a great number of
ladders for the assault, intended to attack that night.
There had been several similar warnings, but this time
the news proved correct. A signal fire was lit upon
one of the heights at four in the morning, and at five
o'clock the plain was covered with the enemy. Quietly
they crept up in the darkness towards the walls, and
at six o'clock a prodigious shouting was heard, and
from the villages, orchards, and inclosed ground upon
all sides the enemy dashed forward to the as-
sault.
As they approached they opened fire on all sides,
pressing chiefly towards the weak point near the foot
of the hills. But tremendous as was the roar of the
Afghan fire it was drowned by the roll of musketry
which broke from the whole circuit of the walls where


254
DISPERSAL OF THE TRIBES.
cavalry swept backward and forward, cutting them up
in all directions, while the fire of our infantry and of
the guns on the walls searched them through and
through whenever they attempted to gather in a knot
and make a stand.
By nightfall the whole of the Afghans had either
fled to the hills or were driven into Cabul . Upon the
following day General Gough's force marched in; but
before their arrival it was found that the enemy had
again evacuated the city, and the British were, as
before, masters of the position.
After the decisive defeat which had been inflicted
upon them, and the dispersion of the great force which
had gathered confident of victory, there was little fear
of any further attempt on the part of the enemy. They
had brought their whole force into the field, and as
this was defeated and dispersed before the arrival of
General Gough with his reinforcements it was evident
that success could not be hoped for against the united
strength of the English.
The time passed quietly now. The Bala-Hissar and
Cabul were reoccupied, and as the natives were cowed
by the crushing defeat they had experienced, there
was no longer any repetition of the insolent and defiant
manner which they had before manifested.
On the 3d of January a message was brought to
the orderly-room that the general wished to see Ser-
geant Gale. Upon his presenting himself at the
general's quarters Sir Frederick Roberts, to his sur-


THE COMMISSION.
255
prise, at once advanced and shook him warmly by the
hand.
"Mr. Gale," he said, "I am very happy to inform you
that the Horse Guards have acted upon my recom-
mendation, seconded by that which was sent in by
your colonel, who wrote at once upon receiving a noti-
fication from me of the step I had taken, saying that
you had distinguished yourself very highly in the
attack upon the Peivvar-Khotal, and that he was con-
vinced that you would make in all respects an excellent
officer. With my despatches that have just come in I
have received a notification that my request has been
attended to, together with a copy of the Gazette, in
which you are appointed to the 60th Regiment. I have
to congratulate you, sir; you are now an officer, and
will, I am quite sure, do every credit to my recom-
mendation."
The young soldier was for a moment too moved at
the tidings to speak coherently, but he murmured his
thanks to the general for his kindness.
"Do not say anything about that," the general said
heartily; "it is a pleasure to me to have been able
to advance a promising young soldier. I am only
sorry that you are not gazetted to a regiment in my
own division. The 66th are at Candahar, and unfor-
tunately they will not, I understand, form part of a
column with which General Stuart will advance in the
spring up the valley through Ghuzni to this place.
Had it been so it would have been best for you to wait


DOWN THE PASS.
257
civilian clothes and under linen of all descriptions. An-
other £30 bought him a horse and saddlery; while for£5
he obtained a rough pony for the use of Yossouf, who
steadily refused to leave him, although Will pointed
out to him that, glad as he should be to have him with
him, it would be far more to his advantage to remain
among his people at Cabul, where he had means of
settling comfortably.
Upon the following day, having obtained his new
uniform, which he found required no alteration to fit
him fairly, William Gale dined with General Roberts,
who had kindly invited him in order to introduce him
in his new position to the officers of his staff. He was
obliged to remain three or four days longer at Sherpur
until a strong escort with sick was going down through
the passes to Jellalabad. His baggage was stowed upon
a camel, and after a kind adieu from General Roberts,
and a very cordial one from the staff sergeants, among
whom he had worked for three months, he started
with the convoy for the lower valleys. The escort con-
sisted of a hundred men of the infantry of the Guides.
The way down the pass was difficult, but no snow had
fallen for three weeks, and the roads were fairly
beaten down by passing parties. Still their progress
was slow, and late on the afternoon of the second day
after starting they were still four miles from the fort
of Jugdulluk, which was held by a British force, and
where they were to halt for the night.
The Guides were on the alert . A party of four men
(274) R


258
THE ATTACK ON THE CONVOY
were 200 yards ahead of the little column, which was
commanded by Captain Edwards. Presently a shot
rang out from the front followed by a scattered dis-
charge. William Gale was at the moment riding by the
side of Captain Edwards; he had already placed himself
under that officer's orders in case of any emergency.
"Mr. Gale," Captain Edwards said, "will you ride
forward at once with six men to the advanced party.
When you get there take such measures as you may
think fit, and send me back word as to the strength
and position of the enemy."
With six of the Guides Will at once rode forward,
while Captain Edwards halted until the little column
was gathered closely together, the camels and dhoolies
with sick men in the centre, the soldiers in readiness
for action around them . A soldier now ran up with a
slip of paper upon which Will had scribbled in pencil:
"The enemy are apparently in considerable force. The
defile opens here. They are disposed among rocks and
boulders on either side."
Will on arriving at the advanced party had found at
once that the force of the enemy was too strong for
him to attempt to move forward at present. He had
posted the men behind boulders by the wayside, order-
ing them to pick off any man that showed himself, and
they were soon engaged in a sharp musketry skirmish
with the enemy. One of their number had fallen at
the first discharge, and Will, taking his rifle, used it
with effect until the head of the convoy arrived.


THE FIGHT IN THE DEFILE.
259
It was now fast becoming dark, and the flashes of
the enemy's fire from behind the rocks showed how
numerous were the assailants.
"There must be a couple of thousands of the
scoundrels," Will said to Captain Edwards as the latter
came up to ascertain the state of affairs. "Hampered
with the convoy, the position is an awkward one. It
is fortunate they attacked where they did, for we can
hold our own here; while, if they had waited till we
got fairly down into this comparatively open valley and
then attacked us' on both flanks, it would have been
very awkward. We must try and clear them out; we
cannot stop here all night. It is freezing very sharp
now, and the cold will be intense in an hour or two."
"I will take thirty men," Captain Edwards said,
"and skirmish along among the rocks on the left. Do
you take as many more, and move along the right of
the path. The remaining forty shall stay here under
my sergeant to guard the convoy from an attack in
rear in case any of the enemy should come down the
defile behind us."
The fight soon became exceedingly hot. Making
their way along the rocks on either side of the path, the
Guides slowly drove the enemy before them. It was
hard work, however, for the tribesmen fought steadily,
and as those in front fell back upon those lower down
the valley their resistance became every moment more
obstinate. Eight of Will's party had already fallen;
but although, sword in hand, he was leading them,


260
HEMMED IN.
encouraging them with voice and gesture, not a bullet
had as yet struck him. Presently Captain Edwards,
having crossed the valley, stood by his side.
"We are at a standstill," he said. "Nine of my
men are killed or wounded already, and the fellows
are as thick as peas. I am afraid we shall never be
able to force our way through. There," he exclaimed,
as a sound of firing was heard in the rear, "they have
come down on the convoy from behind. We had
better, I think, fall back a bit, and take post near the
mouth of the defile. We must defend ourselves as best
we can till morning."
The movement was steadily executed, the wounded
men being carried with them as they retired. The tribes-
men advanced as they fell back, not venturing to press
them, however, for the rear-guard kept their faces to-
wards them, and any who ventured to show themselves
instantly paid the penalty of their rashness. For an
hour the fight went on. It was night now, and dark
as pitch in the deep valley in which the fight was
going on, the position of the combatants being only
indicated by the flickering flashes of the muskets.
The Afghans were gradually creeping nearer, as the
Guides could see by the flashes.
"If the fellows only make a determined rush at us,"
Captain Edwards said to Will, "it will go hard with
us. Fortunately they are as much in the dark as we
are, and will find it difficult to gather for a rush."
"I think we may hold out till morning, but by that


WILL GALE'S OFFER.
261
time news that we are blockaded here will spread
throughout the hills, and we may have 10,000 of them
down on us. I think, if you will give me leave, the
best plan will be for me to try and make my way
down to Jugdulluk to bring up help from there."
"You would never get through," Captain Edwards
advised. "It is a brave offer, Gale, but could not be
done."
"I think it might be done," Will said. "It is as
dark as pitch. I will take my lad with me, and will
borrow a native cap and cloak from one of the bearers
—there are some Afghans among them. I will take
off my patrol jacket and leave it behind me, and my
boots. We will crawl along in the dark. If, as is
likely enough, we stumble against some of them, we
will say we are wounded and are making our way to
the rear. They cannot see us in the dark, and my
Afghan will pass muster, and Yossouf will certainly
not be suspected. If I am discovered and killed he
will go forward and deliver the message."
The plan seemed to offer every possibility of success,
and Captain Edwards, seeing how serious the position
was, consented to allow Will to attempt it.
A few words to Yossouf sufficed to inform him of
the task Will was about to undertake, and he at once
agreed to share the danger. A rough sheepskin cap
was obtained for Will from one of the camel men.
His tunic was thrown off, and a posteen or Afghan
sheepskin coat was put on in its place. He took a


202
A DESPERATE MISSION.
long matchlock which the camel man carried slung
over his shoulders, took off his boots, and thrust a pair
of loose Afghan shoes into his belt. Yossouf needed no
preparations beyond borrowing a matchlock. Wring-
ing Captain Edwards' hand, Will stooped on his hands
and knees, and, with Yossouf a pace or two ahead,
began to crawl down the path.
Before starting the orders had been sent round to
the soldiers to fire at the rocks on either side of the
path, but on no account to fire down the road itself.
As he expected, Will found this clear of Afghans for a
considerable distance. A heavy fire had, previous to
their starting, been directed down this path to prevent
the Afghans from gathering there in the darkness pre-
paratory to making a rush. They came across several
dead bodies, but the enemy were all behind rocks on
one side or other of the road.
When they had crawled a hundred yards they were
past the front line, from which the Afghans were
keeping up a heavy fire; but Will knew that from their
numbers they must extend far back down the valley,
and indeed from almost every rock the flashes of the
matchlocks blazed out as the lurking tribesmen fired
in the direction of the mouth of the defile. They were
nearly a quarter of a mile down when an Afghan, who
had been crouching behind a rock close to the path,
advanced into the road to fire, when he stumbled
against Yossouf.
"What are you doing?" he exclaimed.


264
A RELIEVING PARTY.
despatch a force to their rescue. Were the tribesmen
attacked in their rear now they might be scattered
easily enough, but they are assembling very fast, and
in the morning it will be a difficult matter to reach
them."
"We have fancied," the officer said, "for the last
two hours that we heard distant firing, but we could
not be sure, for any noise echoes so in these mountains.
I will set out at once with you with as many men as I
can spare."


266
THE CONVOY RELIEVED.
Afghan they found among them. It was not long
before they came upon the enemy. Then the rifles
cracked out, and the wild shouts of the Afghans be-
tokened their astonishment at being thus unexpectedly
assailed in rear.
Numerous as they were they offered but a slight
resistance. Their one thought was to effect their escape;
and they hurried rapidly away as the relief advanced,
climbing the steep sides of the valley by paths only
known to themselves, and then from the hillside far
above opening a scattered fire at random down into
the valley.
In five minutes all resistance had ceased. The flank-
ing parties were ordered to shelter themselves behind
the rocks and to return the fire of the natives on the
hillsides, to retain the position until the convoy passed
through, and then to close behind it as a rear-
guard.
With the fifty men in ths road the officer then
pushed forward, and was soon greeted by a shout of
welcome from the defenders of the defile. There was
not a minute to be lost, for the Afghans, when they
recovered from their first scare, would renew the
attack; and the party pressing down the defile on
their rear, ignorant of what had taken place below,
were still keeping up an incessant fire. Twenty-eight
of the Guides were already killed or wounded.
Several of the sick men in the dhoolies volunteered
to walk down to the fort and to give up their places to


SAFE IN THE FORT.
267
those of the wounded men who were unable to walk,
and in a few minutes the convoy moved forward.
The fifty men of the relieving party placed them-
selves in their rear; and as the tribesmen who had
been attacking them from behind rushed down through
the defile with exulting shouts, believing that they
were now secure of their victims, the Sikhs opened so
heavy a fire on them that they fell back up the defile
in disorder. As the convoy wound down the valley
the enemy again assembled on the hills and pursued
them hotly. But the Sikhs and Guides kept up so
steady a fire that they did not venture to approach to
close quarters, and with a loss of eighteen more men
the convoy reached the shelter of the fort. Conscious
of their inability to attack this position the Afghans
drew off.
On returning to his friends Will had resumed his
uniform, and now on reaching the fort Captain Ed-
wards expressed to him his warmest thanks for the
hazardous adventure that he had undertaken.
"I shall, of course," he concluded, "furnish a full
report of the affair to the general, and I should think
he would recommend you for the Victoria Cross. If
any fellow ever deserved it you do so, for it seemed to
me almost certain death to venture through the pass.
I never expected to see you again, and I was never
more glad in my life than I was when the firing began
down below in the valley, and knew that help was
at hand; for had you failed it would have been all up


A HEARTY RECEPTION.
269
mission, and I was only too glad to back up his recom-
mendation to the best of my power. We all thought
you were gone when you were reported as missing
at Ali-Kheyl, and we heard from the sentry that,
having gone forward to investigate the origin of a
noise he had reported to you, you were suddenly fired
upon, and that he saw no more of you as he ran back
to the picket. I was glad indeed when the report was
received from poor Cavagnari that upon his arrival at
Cabul he had found you there just recovering from
your wounds. Then, of course, we gave you up again
when we heard of the massacre of the mission; and it
seemed like a resurrection from the dead when I got a
letter from Roberts saying you were found again, and
that he was recommending you for a commission. I
see by the Gazette you are appointed to the 66th, and
we were expecting to see you on your way down. Had
you any difficulty in getting through the passes?"
"The convoy was attacked, sir, by the tribesmen
when near Jugdulluk, but the garrison came out to our
rescue and we got through safely. But we had thirty
men killed or wounded."
"A smart affair!" the colonel said. "And now of course
you will take up your quarters with us for a day or
two before you go on. The officers will all be glad to
see you, and you will be able to tell us all about the
attack on the mission and the recent fighting. Roberts
has been having some hot work there. We have been
grumbling horribly at our bad luck. We thought at


270
AN INVITATION.
the time we were fortunate at being sent back to India
when peace was signed, instead of being kept in the
Khurum valley. But the consequence has been that
we have been out of it all. However, we must look
upon you as our representative."
Will hesitated about staying, but the colonel over-
ruled his objection, saying that as there would be no
fighting until the spring there could be no particular
hurry for him to join his regiment. A spare room
was placed at his disposal in the colonel's quarters, and
Will was soon made at home. The officers nocked in
upon hearing of his arrival, and all congratulated him
most warmly upon his promotion. An hour later a
mounted orderly rode up to the colonel's quarters.
"Is Lieutenant Gale here?" he asked. Will went
forward.
"A note from the general," the orderly said, and
handing it to him; "also one for Colonel Shepherd."
Will's note was simply an invitation to dine that
evening with the general. The colonel's letter was
as follows:—
"Dear Colonel Shepherd,—As Lieutenant Gale
was promoted from your regiment I think it is likely
that he has found his way to you. I have written to
ask him to dinner; please spare him to me. I hope
you will do me the pleasure of accompanying him. He
has performed a most gallant action, and I have just
had the pleasure of writing a despatch recommending
him for the V.C."



LETTERS FROM THE GENERAL.





ON THE WAY TO CANDAHAR.
273
were cowed into submission many attacks were made
by the mountaineers upon small parties going up or
down the passes, and stringent orders had been issued
that no officer should go down except when accom-
panied by an escort.
After a week's travelling Will arrived with Yossouf
at Peshawur, then he rode by easy stages until he
reached the Indus, where, taking his place on a steamer,
he travelled down the river to Sukkur, where he dis-
embarked and started for the weary march across the
desert to the foot of the Bolan.
Along the road large numbers of coolies were at
work constructing a line of railway which was now
almost complete to the foot of the pass. It did not
ascend this, but turning to the right wound up the
hills to the plateau. It was intended to be taken on
to Candahar, and its completion would have been an
immense boon both to that city and to India, as it
would have opened a great trade to the north, and
have enabled the inhabitants of the fertile plain around
Candahar to send their corn, fruit, and other products
down to India. Unhappily, with the subsequent aban-
donment of Candahar the formation of the railway
was stopped, and the whole allowed to go to ruin. The
work has, however, been recently taken in hand again.
Will and his follower ascended the Bolan, stopped a
day or two at Quettah to rest their horses, and then
proceeded on through the fertile plains of Pisheen and
over the Kojak Pass, and thence on to Candahar. Here
(274) s


274
will's new position.
Will joined his new regiment and was well received by
its officers.
In every regiment in the service an officer risen from
the ranks is invariably received with special courtesy
and kindness. Every endeavour is made to place him
at his ease in his new position. This is specially so
when, as in Will's case, the promotion has been earned
by distinguished services in the field.
In most instances officers promoted from the rank
of sergeant are a good deal older than the young
lieutenants among whom they find themselves. Being
often married men, and having nothing but their pay
to depend upon, they find themselves, therefore, un-
able to take much part in the pleasures and gaieties
of the regiment.
In India, however, as the rate of pay is much higher,
an unmarried officer can live very comfortably on his
pay; and as in the field the expenses are far less than
when a regiment is in cantonments at a large station,
where there is much gaiety, Will found that he was
able to live very comfortably on his pay in the same
style as that of his comrades. They on their part were
pleased to find in Will a young fellow of the same age
as the other junior lieutenants, and withal a pleasant
gentlemanly young man. The fact, too, that he had
seen so much service, had gone through stirring adven-
tures, and had fought by the side of Cavagnari in the
Bala-Hissar, made him quite a hero among them, and
Will was soon thoroughly one of themselves. When


WILL IMPROVES HIS MIND.
275
jt was known that the regiment was likely to remain
at Candahar for some time many luxuries had been
brought up from India, together with means of passing
away the time, such as the necessary appliances for
cricket, racket, and other games.
Among these too were several boxes of books, and
Will, who had at first a little amused his comrades by
his absolute ignorance of cricket, but who soon became
a promising recruit at that game, steadily devoted
three hours a day to reading in order to improve his
mind, and to obtain a knowledge of the various matters
which were topics of conversation among his comrades.
Above all he diligently studied the newspapers, great
parcels of which arrived every week, in order to obtain
some knowledge of the political state of affairs in Eng-
land, the position of parties, and the various matters
occupying public attention.
He had at first found his ignorance of these matters
a great drawback to him in general conversation; but
he discovered that newspapers rather than books are
useful in enabling a man to mix with his fellows in
social talk, and that the current events of the day form
ninety-nine hundredths of the subjects of conversation.
The fact that all his mess-mates had been thoroughly
posted in the history of Rome and Greece, that they
could read these languages almost as well as English,
that they had been coached in high mathematics, and
had a knowledge of French and German.gave them, Will
found, very little advantage in general conversation;


GENERAL STEWART'S COLUMN
277
has at least the advantage of forming the mind for the
after work of acquiring the special branches of know-
ledge required by us in the careers we may adopt. If
you ask my advice I should not at your time of life
dream of setting to to learn the dead languages or to
study mathematics. Read the histories of Rome and
Greece, and study that of your own country. Read
books of travel and the biographies of great men, and
keep yourself well posted, as you are doing, in current
public events. You will then find yourself able to take
part on equal terms in any conversation which may be
going on. You will indeed be considered by strangers
an exceptionally well-informed young fellow, and you
may pass through life without any person having a
suspicion that Latin, Greek, and mathematics, the car-
dinal points of an ordinary education, are wholly un-
known to you."
Will was cheered by the advice, and henceforth
directed his studies only in the direction which Cap-
tain Fletcher had indicated. At the beginning of April
a large diminution had taken place in the force sta-
tioned at Candahar, as General Sir Donald Stewart
marched with the greater portion of the force for Cabul.
The route led through a country which was the strong-
hold of the fanatical party, the important town of
Ghuzni containing the most fanatical population in all
Afghanistan. This had been the centre whence the
attacks on General Roberts had been organized, and it
was deemed necessary to march a strong force through


278
THE BATTLE OF AHMED-KHEL.
the country to overawe the tribesmen and break up
their organization.
The march was uneventful as far as Shahjui, the
limit of the Candahar province. At this point the
Taraki country begins. The Mollahs here had been
actively preaching a holy war, and several thousand
men were reported as having collected. The villages
were found to be deserted, and everything betokened
an active opposition to the advance.
When the head of the column arrived at Ahmed-
Khel a body of the enemy, estimated at from 12,000 to
1 o.OOO, were seen clustered on a semicircle of hills
beyond the village. The baggage of the column
stretched far along the road, and it was all-important
to prevent the enemy from falling upon this long line.
General Stewart therefore determined to attack them.
The two batteries of artillery opened fire upon the
enemy, who at once in reply rushed down to the
assault. The charge was led by some 3000 or 4000
Ghazis, as they were called, fanatics who had sworn
to give their lives in carrying out their object of
exterminating the hated infidel. Some of these men
were armed with rifles and matchlocks, some with
heavy swords, knives, and pistols; others again with
pikes made of bayonets or pieces of sharpened iron
fastened upon long sticks. Some were on foot and
some on horseback.
With wild yells the mass rushed down upon our
troops, and so sudden and unexpected was the attack,


THE FIGHT AT GHALEZ.
281
the bodies which had been carried off. Their wounded
of course, were far more numerous.
Ghuzni surrendered without opposition when the
column reached it, the fighting men having been
engaged in the battle of Ahmed-Khel, and having had
enough of hostilities. On the 23d of April a force
under Brigadier-general Palliser advanced against a
large body of natives who had assembled near the vil-
lage of Ghalez, again led by the Ghazis. These rushed
to the attack with a courage and desperation equal to
that shown by the fanatics in the previous battle. Our
men, however, were this time prepared, and were able
to inflict very heavy losses upon the enemy without
allowing them to get to close quarters.
This was the end of the Afghan resistance. General
Stewart moved on to Cabul without further fighting,
and effected a junction there with the force under
General Roberts.


AN ATTACK BY GHAZIS.
283
Jahar: the country was peaceful, cricket-matches were
got up between the various regiments, and horse-races
established. Candahar was governed by a protege"
of the British named Wali Shere Ali. He had organ-
ized a native army to support his authority upon our
withdrawal. The only circumstances which occurred
to mar the pleasing time were isolated attacks upon
British officers and men by Ghazis.
These attacks were sometimes made in broad day-
light in the streets of Candahar, where the escape of
those who perpetrated them was impossible; these
fanatics regarding their own life with indifference, so
that they could but kill one or more of the British
before being cut down.
One day as William Gale was walking in the prin-
cipal street of Candahar at a short distance behind
Colonel Ripon, an Indian official of very long standing
and experience who had come up on a special mission
to arrange with the Wali the details of the civil
government of the province, he saw three Afghans who
were loitering in the road draw their long tulwars
and dash upon that officer. The first who reached him
delivered a sweeping blow, which the colonel, taken
by surprise, partly received on his uplifted arm, but
was struck to the ground. Another of the Ghazis
raised his sword; but before it could fall Will Gale,
who saw at once that he was too far behind to inter-
pose between the assailant and the victim, drew his
revolver from his belt, and, taking a hasty aim, fired.



WILL SAVES COLONEL RIPON.





PLEASANT QUARTERS.
285
"Oh, no!" Will answered; "it is only a flesh wound
from my shoulder to my elbow. Luckily my sword
partly caught the blow. I was aiming at the other
fellow, and had not time to parry fairly. I shall be
none the worse for it in a week's time. My wound
is less severe than yours, sir."
"We are both bleeding pretty freely," the colonel
said. "My quarters are close at hand, and as the
principal medical officer lives in the same house, you
cannot do better than come in with me."
In a few minutes their wounds were bandaged, the
doctor saying that no serious harm had been done in
either case, but that care and quiet lest fever should
supervene would be necessary for a week or two. As
the house was much more airy and commodious than
that in which Will was quartered, the colonel begged
him so strongly to move his quarters thither until able
to return to duty that Will agreed to do so, and was
soon installed, with Yossouf in attendance, in the
colonel's quarters.
He was greatly pleased with the old officer, whose
manner was most kind and courteous, and who from
his long experience in India was full of anecdotes and
information concerning the country. Ten days after
the struggle the doctor told them that there was no
longer any occasion for his services.
Their wounds were healing favourably and all fear
of fever had passed. At the same time it would still
be some time before either could take their arms from


286
A SINGULAR LIKENESS.
their slings. The following day, in honour of his con-
valescence, Colonel Ripon invited several friends to
dinner, among them General Burrows and Colonel
Galbraith of the 66th. All had of course heard the
details of the attack on Colonel Ripon, and Will was
congratulated warmly upon the promptness that he
had showed.
"Do you know, colonel," General Burrows said as
they were smoking their cigars after dinner, "there is
a wonderful likeness between you and Lieutenant Gale.
I should have taken you for father and son any-
where."
The other officers agreed with the remark. The
likeness was certainly strong. Both were men of six
feet in height. The colonel's hair and moustache were
grizzled, and his face bronzed with the sun of many
Indian summers; he was thin and spare of habit, but
his shoulders were broad, and it was evident that in
his youth he must have possessed much of the muscular
strength which was apparent in Will's more rounded
limbs. But it was in their eyes that there was the
greatest similarity. Both were gray and of nearly the
same shade; both had a simple, straightforward, and
kindly expression; both were shaded by straight and
rather heavy eyebrows. The men looked at each
other.
"I suppose he is like me," Colonel Ripon said; "still
more like, I fancy, what I remember myself at his age;
but curiously enough he has ever since I met him been


AYOUB KHAN.
287
recalling some one else to my mind;" and a shade passed
over his face.
Seeing that Colonel Ripon was not disposed to talk
further on the subject a fresh topic of conversation
was started. There was news that Ayoub Khan, the
brother of Yakoob, who was governor at Herat, was
inarching south at the head of a large force with the
intention of opposing Abdul-Rahman and again reseat-
ing Yakoob on the throne. He had also preached a
holy war against the British.
"I fear that the trouble is serious," General Burrows
said. "The troops Ayoub is bringing with him have
not yet met us in the field. The population on the
road is wild and fanatical in the extreme, and will no
doubt join him to a man. On the other hand, the
troops of the Wali are not to be depended upon, and
the brunt of the fighting is sure to fall upon us."
Three days later the order was issued by General
Primrose that the 6Cth Regiment, the Bombay Grena-
diers, and Jacob's Rifles, together with the 3d Scinde
Horse and 3d Bombay Cavalry with a battery of artil-
lery, were to move out with the Wali's army towards
Girishk on the river Helmund, which formed the
boundary between the province of Candahar and that
of Herat
After the long period of inactivity at Candahar,
Will was delighted at the thought of taking part in an
expedition with his regiment; but when they reached
the Helmund, life was for some time exceedingly mono-


288
ON THE HELMUND.
tonous. The news of Ayoub's advance greatly excited
the population, who had been further worked up by
agents widely distributed through the country, and by
the exhortations of the Mollahs and Ghazis; conse-
quently rambling at any distance from the camp was
forbidden, and the shooting parties, which had been one
of the great resources of their life at Candahar, were
peremptorily put an end to.
Colonel Ripon had accompanied the force as the
Wali's adviser. Both he and Will had recovered com-
pletely from their wounds. When the regiment first
marched, indeed, the surgeon had strongly recom-
mended Will to remain behind until his wound had
completely healed, but the young officer had so strongly
begged to be allowed to accompany the regiment that
the surgeon had consented.
His colonel had for a time relieved him from all
duty and he rode in rear of the regiment, but within
a fortnight of their arrival at the Helmund he was
able to lay aside his sling and to take his turn of regu-
lar duty. The officers did all that they could to make
existence tolerable on the sandy shores of the Helmund;
they got up foot-races and athletic sports for the men,
played cricket on the sands, and indulged in a bath
twice a day in the river.
Will often spent the evening in Colonel Ripon's tent
.
A warm friendship had arisen between the two officers,
and each day seemed to bring them closer together.
All this time Ayoub's army was known to be approach-


CHAPTER XIX.
THE BATTLE OF MAIWAND.
HE servants were squatting in a circle near
their masters and enjoying their share of
the breakfast. The two Syces were Be-
loochees, the others were men from the Deccan, the
regiment having been stationed at Poona before going
up into Afghanistan. Of these the Syces alone under-
stood the Afghan language.
After the men had finished their meal Yossouf
strolled away by himself into the village. When he
returned Will saw that he wished to speak to him,
so rising carelessly from the ground he walked to the
ponies, which were tied up near, and called Yossouf as
if to give him some instructions respecting them.
"Well, Yossouf, what is it? have you learned any-
thing?"
"No, sir, nothing. But the people no longer speak
to me freely. They must have guessed when they
saw me speaking to you that I was warning you; but
I don't think things are right. The children are all
in the houses instead of playing about in the street
.


AN UNPLEASANT POSITION.
295
A few of the women are standing at their doors, but
most of them are inside too."
"But if the men are thinking of attacking us why
shouldn't they do so at once?"
"There are not above twenty or thirty men here,
sahib. They may not think they are strong enough.
Perhaps they have sent to some of the villages for help."
"Likely enough, Yossouf, I did not think of that.
Do you go up above the village and have a good look
round. I will try and persuade my friends to be
moving."
Yossouf moved off at once, and Will stood for a
minute or two thinking what was the best to do. The
position was not pleasant. Yossouf's suspicions might
be altogether unfounded, but Will had found him to
be so uniformly right on former occasions that he did
not like to neglect his advice now. After a little further
thought he joined his companions.
"Come," he said, " we had really better be moving.
I believe we are in real danger."
The earnestness with which he spoke roused the
others, who were all lying at full length on the ground.
"But as we said before, Gale," Fortescue urged,"why
shouldn't they now attack us if they wanted to? We
have been here more than an hour."
"Perhaps they may think we shall all take a nap
after our tiffin," Will replied; "perhaps, as Yossouf
thinks, they have sent off to some other villages for
assistance. He has gone up the hillside to look out.


PRECAUTIONARY STEPS.
297
"Yes, that would be a good plan," Fortescue said,
for they were all sobered now by Will's gravity, and
convinced that there must be good grounds for his
belief in danger.
"Look here, Gale, we are all senior to you in the
date of our commissions, but you have seen no end of
service and adventure, therefore I vote that you shall
be commanding officer until we get back to camp."
The others willingly agreed.
"Very well," Will said; "I will do my best. Ham-
mond, will you tell your servant to get ready for a
start at once. Speak to him quietly and carelessly.
Then as the men move up more towards the ponies, tell
them in Hindustanee to go about their work quietly,
but in case of any trouble with the Afghans to out
with their swords and join us in a rush at the chief's
house."
Hammond carried out his instructions. The two
Beloochees were not taken by surprise, for they as
well as Yossouf had been feeling uneasy at the dis-
appearance of all women and children from the scene.
The other men looked startled, but they were stout
fellows, and as all the native servants were armed
with swords to enable them to resist sudden attacks
by the country people, and as they had unbounded
faith in their masters, they went about the work of
packing up the plates and dishes, and preparing for a
start quietly enough.
As the Syces began to put the saddles on the tats


300
FORTESCUE KILLED.
■upstairs, and keep guard at the door. See that none
of them leave the room, for they might steal down
and open the door to admit their friends while we are
busy. What! Fortescue, are you hit?"
"I am done for!" the young officer replied faintly;
"one of their bullets has gone through my body; but
never mind me now." As he spoke he tottered, and
would have fallen had not the others supported him
and gently laid him down on a heap of skins which
served as an Afghan bed. Then leaving his servant to
attend to him for a minute, the others ran upstairs
to see what was going on without.
"Be careful!" Will exclaimed; "don't show a head
above the roof or at a loophole or you will get a bullet
in your brain to a certainty. Stand well back so that
they can't see you."
Already a pattering fire of musketry had broken out
round the house, but not an Afghan was to be seen,
every man having taken his position in shelter.
"There is nothing to do at present," Will said.
"When the other parties arrive they may make an
attack, but I don't think they will do so till night.
Hammond, you had better go down to Fortescue at
present. One of the Syces can take Yossouf's place on
guard over the women, and he can help you. The lad
is a good nurse; but I fear there is nothing to be done
for the poor fellow."
A few minutes later a wild outburst of shouts and
yells, and a great firing of guns, announced that the


302
WILL S PLAN.
The situation was gloomy enough; but there was
no lack of good spirits among the young officers, the
danger causing their blood to course rapidly through
their veins.
Will sat on the floor apart from the others. They
had made him their commanding officer, and the re-
sponsibility of thinking for them devolved upon his
shoulders. Suddenly a thought struck him, and he
leapt to his feet with a shout . "I've got it!"
"You will get it if you don't mind," Hammond said
dryly, as a bullet passed through one of the loopholes
and struck the wall an inch or two from Will's head.
"But what is it?"
"When it gets quite dusk we will call a parley and
tell them we don't want to keep the women here, they
are only in our way and eat up the food, so we will
open the door and let them go."
"But what will you do that for, Gale? You were
saying a short time ago that the women could be kept
as hostages."
"So they might, Hammond; but it will be more useful
to us to let them go. There are seven women here.
Six of them shall go out, and with them, in the clothes
of the seventh, Yossouf."
"Capital! capital!" the others exclaimed. "Don't
you think they will notice him?"
"No," Will said; "we won't do it till dusk, and
some of these women are as tall as he is. They will
hurry them away as quickly as possible so as to re-


A TRUCE CALLED FOR.
303
commence the attack, and wrapped up as these Afghan
women are no one could see the difference. Once
fairly away we can trust Yossouf for finding an oppor-
tunity of slipping away and bringing us help."
Will now laid the plan before Yossouf, who at once
agreed to attempt it.
The day passed slowly, the fire of the enemy being
kept up without intermission.
"Now," Will said at last, "it is getting dark enough,
let us put the plan into operation. In the first place
the women must be separated, and taken into separate
rooms, the one Yossouf has fixed upon as nearest his
height into a room by herself. Then Yossouf must
tell the old mother of the chief that they are to be
released, and that she must show herself on the roof
and make them stop.firing till they have gone out
.
While she is doing that he can slip down and dress
himself in the robes of the woman. She must be gagged
to prevent her screaming or making a row as her com-
panions go out."
Greatly surprised was the old woman at being told
that she was to be released. These Kaffirs must be
mad, she thought, to give up their hostages. How-
ever, she at once proceeded to carry the orders into
effect.
Before raising her head above the roof she uttered
a loud quavering cry, the cry of welcome of the Afghan
women. The firing without instantly ceased. Again
raising the cry she stepped out on to the roof and


304
THE WOMEN RELEASED.
shouted that the English did not want to keep the
women, and that the door would be open for them to
come out, providing the Afghans promised that no at-
tempt to enter should be made, and that none should
move from their present places until the women had
fairly left.
There was a shout of surprise and satisfaction, and
one of the chiefs rose to his feet and gave the promise
in the name of his companions.
"How many are there of you?" he asked.
"Seven," the woman answered.
"Are the children to come?"
"We may take away the babies, but the three boys
are to remain behind."
Five minutes later the door of the fort opened, and
seven figures came out. Not a shot was heard until
they had passed down the street of the village, and
had entered a house at the further end; then the rapid
fire commenced again. Twice during the evening did
the Afghans attempt to storm the little fort, but were
each time repulsed with loss, the fire of the five double-
barrelled guns, loaded with shot and bullets, and of
the revolvers, proving too much for them. The second
attack was made about eleven.
A quarter of an hour later wild shouts were heard
outside; there was an instant cessation of the enemy's
fire, and then in the silence the deep thundering sound
of galloping horses was heard.
"Hurrah!" Will shouted; "here they are."


THE PARTY RESCUED.
305
A minute later the Third Bombay Cavalry dashed
up to the fort. The door was thrown open and the
little garrison ran out.
"All safe?" the officer in command asked.
"All safe, except Fortescue, who was killed at the
first attack."
"So we heard from your boy," the officer said; "he
has ridden back with us as guide. Now, lads, dis-
mount and clear the village. Shoot every man you
find, turn the women out of the houses, and then set
them on fire. Don't waste any time over it, for the
rascals are swarming round the place. Captain Lawson,
you take your troop and dismount it as skirmishers
round the place, and keep them off till we have done
here. Here, you four men who brought the powder
kegs, carry them inside this fort. We are going to
blow it up to give them a lesson."
Ten minutes later the cavalry were again in their
saddles. Spare horses had been brought for the four
officers, and the servants mounted the tats, which would
be able to keep up with the cavalry. The flames
were already bursting out brightly from the houses.
The yells of the Afghans rose high, and their bullets
flew thickly over the village, but they kept at a re-
spectful distance. The officer in command gave the
word and the party set off at a trot.
Before they had left the village a deep roar was
heard, and they knew that the Afghan fort was de-
stroyed. Two hours later they arrived safely in camp,
(274) ' u


308
ayoub's advance.
Upon arriving near Maiwand, however, news was
brought in by spies that the whole of the enemy were
at hand. The force was at once halted in a position
singularly ill adapted for a fighting ground. Deep
ravines ran both to the right and to the left of the
ground occupied by the British. By these the enemy
could advance under shelter until within a short dis-
tance. On either side were ranges of hills completely
commanding the position.
It is difficult to imagine a more unsuitable position
than that which General Burrows prepared to hold
with a mere handful of troops against an enormously
superior force. What was the total strength of Ayoub's
army was never exactly known, as it was swollen by
enojmous numbers of Ghazis and tribesmen from the
villages. These were in fact far more formidable oppo-
nents than the regular Afghan troops, as their tre-
mendous rushes, and indifference to the loss inflicted
upon them, were trying in the extreme for even the
best-trained troops to withstand.
The morning was thick and but little could be seen
of Ayoub's army. His cavalry, indeed, were found to
be moving about in large masses, but these fell back
at our advance. Lieutenant Maclean, with two horse-
artillery guns and a small cavalry escort, galloped out
on the extreme left and opened fire on the Afghan
cavalry. His infantry at once appeared in force
swarming down towards the guns, and these MTere
withdrawn to a position nearer to our line.


AN OVERWHELMING ATTACK.
309
The British infantry were formed in the following
order:—The 66th were on the right, the Bombay Grena-
diers in the centre, and Jacob's Ilitles on the left. Two
guns were placed in position to support the 6Gth on
the right; the remaining four British guns, and the
six smooth-bore guns captured from the Wali's mu-
tineers, were placed between the Grenadiers and
Jacob's Rifles. The 3d Scinde Horse and 3d Bombay
Light Cavalry were formed in the rear of the line.
As the enemy advanced, our guns opened a heavy
fire upon them, but it was fully an hour before their
artillery replied. Then thirty guns were unmasked
and opened fire upon the British line. Under cover
of this heavy fire swarms of the enemy's irregulars
advanced towards our position. When within 600 or
700 yards of the 66th the British opened with their
Martini rifles, and the shower of lead at such an unex-
pected distance checked the advance of the enemy.
For some time the artillery duel continued, but the
enemy's guns were then moved on to the hills on either
side of the British position and a terrible cross-fire was
opened from both flanks. At about two o'clock the
smooth-bore guns began to get short of ammunition.
Gnly sixty rounds had been captured with them, and
there being no reserve of ammunition fitting them
they ceased fire. The position now became most seri-
oua From the ravines on either side the Ghazis
swarmed up in vast numbers. The artillery thundered
from the heights upon our troops. Some of their bat-


310
THE RUSH OF THE GHAZIS.
teries were brought up to within very short distances;
and great numbers of the enemy, keeping along the
ravines sheltered from oar iire, came up in the rear
and seized the villages there. The companies of Jacob's
Rifles on the left, after resisting for some time the
furious attacks of the Ghazis, began to waver. The
enemy's cavalry swept down in heavy masses, while
our cavalry, for some reason which has never been
explained, remained inactive. The general has stated
that he ordered them to charge, but that they would
not do so; the cavalry affirm that they never received
orders. Anyhow, at this critical moment the 3d Scinde
Horse and the 3d Bombay Cavalry remained inactive.
The confusion amid Jacob's Rifles rapidly grew in spite
of the efforts of the officers to rally them. The Ghazis
swept down upon them and the Rifles broke in con-
fusion and rushed among the Bombay Grenadiers, who,
hitherto fighting steadily, also fell into confusion, as
the Rifles and Ghazis burst into their ranks.
"This is hot work," "Will Gale said to his captain
when the enemy's guns on the heights on either side
began to play on the line of the 66th with their flank fire.
"It is, indeed," the officer answered, " and the fire of
the enemy from the edge of that ravine is very trying.
I wish to heaven the general would move us farther
back; he has made a hideous mistake in fighting on
such ground as this."
"It would be difficult to withdraw now," Will said.
"It would shake the confidence of the men I think


*
A BAD LOOK-OUT. 311
myself that we ought to advance and drive the enemy
before us till we take up some really defensible posi-
tion; but I doubt if the Afghans would wait for that.
In all our history a British charge against an Indian
enemy has always been successful, no matter how great
the odds."
"It is a bad look-out," the captain said as a shell
burst close by him, killing and wounding five or six
men. "It is quite evident that if we stay where we
are we must in time be annihilated. Our fellows will
stand, no doubt; they are English soldiers and well
officered. But how can one expect the two Indian
regiments, with only three or four white officers each, to
remain steady under such a fire as this and with these
desperate charges of Ghazis upon them?"
Very steadily the 66th held their ground in spite of
a flanking fire of artillery and musketry. Every time
the enemy gathered at the edge of the ravine for a
rush the heavy fire of the company on the flank, which
was wheeled back at a right angle to the line so as to
face them, drove them back to shelter again. The
regiment had suffered very heavily, still the officers
felt that they could endure till nightfall. Of victory
there was now no idea; for to conquer, men must act,
and here they were only called upon to suffer. Pre-
sently a wild tumult was heard to the left, and then
the men of the scattered native regiments burst in a
tumultuous mass into the ranks of the 66th.
"Steady, men, steady!" shouted the officers.


THE RETREAT.
313
fallen. So long and stoutly was the village defended
that the great majority of the broken fugitives had
time to pass out behind. General Burrows, who had
done his best to stem the rout, drew off the shattered
remains and fell back with them in fair order.
Will Gale's company was in the right flank of the
regiment, and therefore farthest from the point where
the line was broken by the rush of the native troops.
Seeing what was taking place the captain formed his
men into company square and fell back to the village
in fair order. The company then threw itself into a
house with a walled garden to the right of the village,
and its steady fire in no slight degree helped to keep
back the Afghans and cover the retreat. This they
did until General Burrows himself rode up and ordered
them to fall in.
"Your company has done good service, sir," he said
to Captain Fletcher, "and it is for you now to cover
the retreat."
Slowly and in good order the company fell back,
and joining the troops who still retained their forma-
tion retired slowly, facing about and pouring volley
after volley into the Afghans as they came out through
the village. For two miles the enemy pressed closely
upon them; but their loss had already been immense
and all desired to join in the plundering of the British
camp, therefore the pursuit slackened, and three miles
from the village the rear-guard were ordered to the
main body at quick march.


THE REAR-GUARD.
315
"I am glad to see that you are safe, sir," Will
answered. 1' This has been a terrible day."
"It has, indeed," the colonel said mournfully, "ter-
rible! There has been nothing like it since the retreat
from Cabul in 1848. And how many of these poor
fellows will reach Candahar God only knows! The
water-bottles were emptied hours ago. The men are
already exhausted with the long day's work and
parched with thirst, and we have fifty miles' tramp be-
fore us. Have you any wounded men here with you?"
"Several, sir, some of them badly hurt."
"Put one of the worst on my horse," Colonel Ripon
.said, dismounting; "and push on briskly, lads. There
are some carts ahead. We will turn out the stores
and put the wounded in. You had better let the men
throw away their knapsacks and all useless encum-
brances," he said to Captain Fletcher. "You will have
to march and perhaps fight all night, and must husband
your strength."
Steadily the rear-guard followed the broken column.
It consisted of men of the 66th and Grenadiers
mingled together, and well did they carry out their
arduous duties. A portion were thrown out on each
Hank, while the rest kept to the road. This was
strewn with arms and accoutrements of all kinds.
The men's hearts were wrung to the core by the sight of
the number of wounded who had dropped by the road-
side, and who implored them as they passed not to leave
them to be murdered by the enemy. Many of them


316
THIRST.
were lifted and placed in carts, everything else being
turned out to make way for them, but many had to
be left behind, for it would be impossible to carry
them on.such a march. Slowly the long night passed.
All along the line ahead a scattered fire of musketry
could be heard as the villagers shot down the fugitives
who in hopes of finding water straggled from the road.
Sometimes sharp volleys rang out as the troops stood
at bay and drove back the natives when they pressed
upon them. Several times the rear-guard were hotly
engaged as the Afghans, furious at seeing their prey
slipping from their fingers, mustered and fell upon
them; but each time they were repulsed and the column
held on its way. Will was in command of a mixed
band of some forty men which moved to the right of
the road. Colonel Ripon kept by his side, but few
words were spoken through the long night.
The men were half mad with thirst, and had there
been water near nothing could have restrained them
from rushing to it; but they knew that none could be
obtained until they reached Candahar. Many, in utter
despair at the distance before them, threw themselves
down on the ground to die. But the others kept on,
stumbling and staggering as they marched stupid and
half-blind, rallying only when the order came to turn
and repulse the enemy.
Two or three times in the night the reai'-guard halted
for a few minutes and the men threw themselves down
on the sand, where they picked the scattered herbage


A HALT.
317
within their reach and chewed it to quench their
burning thirst. Daylight was a welcome relief. They
knew indeed that with the rising of the sun their tor-
ments would grow still greater; but the change from
the long dreary darkness cheered them, and they could
now see from the nature of the country that they were
within fifteen miles of Candahar. They marched on
for two more hours, and then .the officer in command
of the little body saw that they could do no more.
He therefore led them to a village on rising ground
a short distance from the road and halted them there.
The exhausted men threw themselves down in the
shade of the houses. They had the long day yet to
pass and their thirst seemed unendurable; still the halt
was welcome, for there was not a man but felt that
his strength was at an end and that it would have
been an impossibility to reach the city.
Captain Fletcher picked out a few of the least ex-
hausted men and placed them in the outskirts of the
village to call the rest to arms in case the Afghans,
numbers of whom were hovering round, should venture
upon an attack. For the first hour after reaching the
village not a man moved from the spot where he had
thrown himself down. The officers had searched the
houses and found some jars of water. These they carried
round and doled out a few mouthfuls to each man.
Small though the amount was, the relief afforded was
immense; and as soon as their first exhaustion had
subsided the men scattered through the gardens pluck-


YOSSOUF REJOINS HIS MASTER.
319
for the expected attack. The defences were streng-
thened; the lower portion of the populace, who would be
likely to declare against them, were turned out of the
town, and provisions were collected from the country
round. Fortunately ample time was afforded them for
these preparations. Ayoub's army had been to a great
extent demoralized by the tremendous losses which it
had sustained. in the defeat of this handful of British
troops, and some days elapsed before it moved forward
from Maiwand . Then by easy marches it approached
Candahar, and took up its position in the plain to the
north of the city.
Just as the rear-guard of General Burrows' force
were starting from their halting-place for their last
march into the city, Will Gale was delighted at see-
ing Yossouf approaching. He had not seen him since
the regiment marched out from Kusk-I-Nakhud.
The young Afghan had remained with the other fol-
lowers in the village behind Maiwand during the
battle, when, while the resistance of the British was still
continuing, the Afghans had worked round by the
ravines and entered the village.
Yossouf had been obliged to join in the retreat,
which was at once commenced by the baggage train.
Full of anxiety for the fate of his master, he had hur-
ried forward at his best speed to Candahar, reaching
the city only an hour or two after the arrival of the
cavalry. In spite of the distance he had already per-
formed he did not delay for an instant, but set out


320
THE NEWS REACHES INDIA.
again with some provisions, and a bottle of wine and
one of water hidden away in his dress. He had re-
solved to push forward at all hazards until he had
either joined his master, whether on his retreat or as
a prisoner in Ayoub's army, or had discovered his body
on the field of battle, and given him burial.
Passing through the throng of fugitives, and ques-
tioning any of the men of the 66th he met, he made
his way forward. He had learned that Will's company
had withdrawn in a body from the battle-field to the
village, but further than this none of the fugitives
could tell him; and his delight was exuberant when he
saw Will marching along with his company.
The little supply which he had brought was at once
served out among the men who most needed it, and
Will, who had been in a state of great uneasiness con-
cerning the safety of his faithful follower, was greatly
cheered by finding him alive and unhurt.
The news of the defeat of Maiwand produced an
immense sensation in India, and measures were at
once taken for the relief of Candahar. A strong
division was ordered to march from Cabul through
Ghuzni, while General Phayre, who commanded the
force at Quettah, was also ordered to advance to the
assistance of the garrison. General Phayre, however,
although comparatively close to Candahar, was unable
to advance for some time. The same miserable economy
which had dispersed the transport train after the signa-
ture of the Treaty of Gundamuk, and had so delayed


322
GENERAL ROBERTS' COLUMN.
From one village, situate half a mile from the eastern
gate of the city, so constant and harassing a fire was
maintained by the enemy that General Primrose re-
solved to make a sortie to capture it. The affair was,
however, badly planned, and resulted in failure. The
Afghans, sheltered in the strongly-built houses, kept
up so severe a fire upon the assailants that these were
obliged to fall back with a considerable loss.
After that no further sorties were attempted, and
the city remained in quiet until the relieving columns
were close at hand.
The force selected to march from Cabul to the relief
of Candahar under the command of General Roberts
consisted of the 92d Highlanders, 23d Pioneers, 24th
and 25th Punjaub Infantry, the 2d, 4th, and 5th «
Ghoorkas, the 72d Highlanders, 2d battalion of the
60th, the Norfolk Rangers, the 2d, 3d, and 15th
Sikhs. There were three batteries of artillery and
four cavalry regiments, the 9th Lancers, the 3d
Bengal Cavalry, the 3d Punjaub Cavalry, and the
Central India Horse. This gave a total of about
10,000 fighting men. There were, in addition, 8000
followers to feed, 7000 horses, and some 8000 transport
and artillery mules and ponies.
The Ameer did his best to assist the force, which
was indeed going to fight his battle as well as their
own. The question was whether so large a force
would be able to subsist on the road, and in order to
assist them to do so he sent orders to all the tribes along


FROM CABUL TO CANDAHAR.
323
the line of march to aid the column in every way.
In consequence, no difficulties were met with, and
scarce a shot was fired on the way down. In seven
days after starting Ghuzni was reached, and in fifteen
Khelat-I-Ghilzai, where Colonel Tanner with a small
garrison had been besieged by the local tribes since the
advance of Ayoub. Khelat-I-Ghilzai stood near the
lower end of the valley down which the column was
advancing, and was but three days' march from
Candahar.
From the day of their leaving Cabul to their arrival
at Khelat-I-Ghilzai the troops had marched a distance
of fifteen miles a day—not an extraordinary distance
for a single regiment to perform, but a wonderful feat
for a force containing some 18,000 persons and 9000
baggage animals marching through mountains and
valleys. As the relieving force approached Candahar
Ayoub drew off his troops from around the city, and
took up a strong position on some hills a few miles to
the north. On the 27th of August Roberts' cavalry
were near enough to establish heliographic communi-
cation with the town, and on the 31st the column
entered Candahar.
During the siege the duties of the garrison had been
heavy. A strong force was always held ready to get
under arms instantly in case of an attack by the enemy.
The number of sentries on the walls, magazines, and
lower important points was large. The town had to
be kept in order and the inhabitants strictly watched.


AFGHAN THIEVES.
325
Yossouf and two native followers had been quartered
in the house of a wealthy silk merchant.
One night he was aroused from sleep by Yossouf.
"Sahib!" the latter whispered, "I hear people moving
below, I think there are thieves in the house."
Will rose noiselessly, slipped on his trousers and
shoes, and taking up a revolver in one hand and a
sword in another stole down-stairs, followed by Yos-
souf with his long Afghan knife in his hand The door
of the warehouse was open, and within it Will saw, by
the faint light of a lamp which one of them carried,
four Afghan ruffians engaged in making up silks
into large bundles in readiness to carry off. His ap-
proach was unnoticed, and on reaching the door he
levelled his pistol and shouted to the Afghans to sur-
render as his prisoners. In reply they dropped the
lamp, and made a sudden rush at him. He fired his
pistol hastily in the darkness, but in an instant the
Afghans were upon him. The first man he cut down,
but he was knocked over by the rush of the others.
Two fell upon him, but Yossouf bounded upon them
like a tiger and buried his knife to the hilt in their
backs in quick succession. The last of the party,
without staying to see what was the fate of his friends,
at once took to his heels, and rushing to the door lead-
ing to the street made his escape. Yossouf raised Will
to his feet
.
"Are you hurt?" he asked anxiously.
"Nothing to speak of," Will replied. "I am a bit


326
A NARROW ESCAPE.
shaken and bruised by the fall. Those fellows in the
darkness were upon me before I could see them.
Thanks to you, I have escaped without hurt, Yossouf,
and had it not been for your aid they would as-
suredly have made an end of me. My pistol had fallen
from my hand as they knocked me down, and on the
ground I could not have defended myself with my
sword for an instant. Once more, Yossouf, I owe my
life to you."
So many attempts similar to that made upon the
house occupied by Will Gale took place that sentries
were posted at ten o'clock at night at the entrances to
the various streets in which the houses left deserted
by the native traders were situated, and orders were
given that no natives should be out of their houses after
that hour unless provided with a pass signed by the
commandant of the city. Several messengers were from
time to time sent out to endeavour to get through the
enemy's lines and to carry to General Phayre the news
of what was going on in the city. A few of these suc-
ceeded in getting through, but none returned, so that
until the signal-lights were seen flashing from the dis-
tant hills in the direction of Khelat-I-Ghilzai the
garrison were unaware of the steps which were being
taken for their rescue. Even had unforeseen obstacles
prevented the advent of either of the relieving columns
it is probable that the garrison of Candahar would
finally have freed itself. Colonel Primrose had at his dis-
posal a force more than double that which had fought



CHAPTER XXI.
THE BATTLE OF CANDAHAR.
|§at| HE plan of action upon which General Ro-
Jfijjrfl berts determined was simple. The 1st and
'Ju^ I 2d brigade were to advance abreast, the
3d to follow in support. As the 66th were to take
no part in the fight, Will Gale obtained leave to ride
out with General Weatherby with the 3d division.
The enemy were well aware of the weak point of the
position which they occupied, and they had mustered
thickly in the plain, in which were several villages,
with canals cutting up the ground in all directions,
and abounding with hedges, ditches, and inclosures;
altogether a very strongly defensible position
.
It was at 10 o'clock on the 1st of September that
the British force advanced. The first division on the
right advanced against the large walled village of
Gundi, which was strongly held by the enemy.
Against this General Macpherson sent the 92d and
the 2d Ghoorkas, and stubbornly as the enemy fought
the place was carried by the bayonet. On the line
taken by the 2d division under General Baker, three


THE DEFEAT OF THE AFGHANS.
331
villages had successively to be carried, Abasabad,
Kaghanary, and Gundigan. The 72d Highlanders and
the 2d Sikhs advanced to the attack of these. The
resistance of the Afghans was stubborn in the extreme,
but they were driven out. The fighting line of the two
divisions kept abreast, and for two miles had to fight
every inch of their way from wall to wall, from garden
to garden, and here and there from house to house, and
from lane to lane.
Once or twice the attack was checked for a few
minutes by the desperate resistance of the Afghans at
the crossing places of canals and in walled inclosures;
and again and again the Ghazis rushed down upon the
troops. The 3d Sikhs and the 5th Ghoorkas joined
the fighting line, and step by step the ground was
won until the base of the hill was turned and the
attacking force saw in front of them the great camp
of Ayoub's troops. Up to this point the enemy had
fought with the greatest bravery, but a sudden panic
seized them now they saw that their line of retreat
was threatened by our cavalry, for an Afghan always
loses heart under such circumstances. As if by magic
the defence ceased, and the enemy, horse and foot,
abandoning their guns and throwing away their arms,
fled up the Argandab valley. Everything was aban-
doned.
There was nothing more for the infantry to do but
to sack Ayoub's camp and to park the captive guns,
thirty in number. The amount of stores and miscel-


THE END OF THE WAR.
333
our main attack to be made, a delusion which was kept
up by our heavy fire from early morning upon the
Afghan guns on the summit of the pass. When our
troops appeared round the corner of the spur upon
their flank they lost heart at once, and for the most
part, throwing away their arms, joined the body of
fugitives.
"It would have been hard work, sir," Will Gale said
to Colonel Ripon as they rode forward in rear of the
fighting brigade," to have taken this position with the
Candahar force alone."
"It could not have been done," Colonel Ripon replied;
"but no one would have dreamed of attempting it.
The Afghans say that the force which Roberts brought
down from Cabul was so large that they stood on the
defensive, but they would have ventured to attack us
had we sallied out and offered battle on the level plain
round the city. Then I have no doubt we could have
beaten them. However, all is well that ends well.
Roberts has come up in time, and has completely de-
feated the enemy; still it would have been more satis-
factory had we retrieved Maiwand by thrashing him
single-handed. Well, I suppose this is the end of the
Afghan war. We have beaten Ayoub, I hope so effec-
tually that Abdul-Rahman will have no difficulty ,in
dealing with him in future; and if he really means the
professions of friendship which he has made us, we
may hope for peace for some time. Probably the next
time wo have to fight in this country it will be against


334
RAPID PROMOTION.
the Russians and Afghans united. There are men in
England who persist in shutting their eyes to the cer-
tain consequences of the Russian advance towards the
northern frontier of Afghanistan; but the time will
come when England will have to rue bitterly the in-
fatuation and folly of her rulers. When that day ar-
rives, she will have to make such an effort to hold her
own as she has never had to do since the days when
she stood alone in arms against Europe."
Upon the following day Will paid a visit to his
friends in the Rangers.
"So you got through Maiwand safely!" the colonel
said. "Upon my word I begin to think that you have
a charmed life. I hear one of your captains died last
night. That gives you your step, does it not?"
"Yes, sir."
"You are the luckiest young dog I ever heard of.
You got your commission within a year of enlisting;
and now by an extraordinary fatality your regiment
is almost annihilated, and you mount up by death
steps to a captain's rank nine months after the date
of your gazette. In any other regiment in the service
you would have been lucky if you had got three or
four steps by this time."
"I am fortunate indeed, sir," Will said. "I can
scarcely believe it myself."
"Ah! whom do I see here?" the colonel exclaimed as
a mounted officer rode through the camp. "My old
friend Ripon! Ah! Ripon, how are you?"


TWO OLD FRIENDS.
335
The colonel reined in his horse, and the two officers,
who had not met for some years, entered into a warm
conversation, while Will strolled away to talk to some
of the younger officers, who congratulated him most
heartily on the luck which had in a few months taken
him over their heads.
In the afternoon Will received a note from Colonel
Ripon asking him to dine with him, as Colonel Shep-
herd was going to do so. Will replied that he would
gladly dine, but must be excused for a time afterwards,
as he was on duty and would have to go the rounds in
the evening. There were three or four other officers
at dinner, as Colonel Ripon had many friends in the
relieving column. When dinner was over, Will made
his excuses and left, promising to look in again in a
couple of hours when he had finished his rounda Soon
afterwards the other young officers left, Colonel Shep-
herd only remained.
"That is a singularly fine young fellow—young
Gale, I mean," Colonel Shepherd said, "and a singu-
larly fortunate one. I feel quite proud of him. It
was upon my advice that he enlisted; but if any one
had told me at the time that he would be a captain in
two years I should have said that it was absolutely
impossible."
"Yes," Colonel Ripon replied, "his luck has been
marvellous; but if ever a fellow deserved it, he did. I
have a very warm liking, I may say an affection, for
him. He saved my life when I was attacked by some


336
will's history.
Ghazis here, and must have been killed had it not
been for his promptness and coolness. He was wounded
too, and we were nursed together here. Since then I
have seen a great deal of him, and the more I see
him the more I like him. Do you know anything of
him previous to the time of his enlisting? You told
me he joined your regiment on the day when it
arrived at Calcutta. I know nothing of his history
before that. The subject never happened to occur in
conversation, and it was one upon which I naturally
should have felt a delicacy in asking any questions,
though I have sometimes wondered in my own mind
how he came to be penniless in Calcutta, as I suppose
he must have been to have enlisted. Did you happen
to hear anything about it?"
"Yes, indeed," Colonel Shepherd answered. "Curi-
ously enough he was by no means penniless, as he had
just received £100 reward for the services he had
rendered in preventing a ship from being captured by
the Malays. I happened to meet its captain on shore
the day I landed, and heard from him the story of the
affair, which was as follows, as nearly as I can recol-
lect."
Colonel Shepherd then related to his friend the
story of the manner in which the brig, when chased
by Malays, was saved by being brought into the
reef by Will. "Naturally," he went on," I was greatly
interested in the story, and expressing a wish to see
the young fellow, he was brought off that evening after


338
A MOMENTOUS CONVERSATION.
"You astound me," Colonel Ilipon said, "absolutely
astound me. I could have sworn that he was a gentle-
man by birth. Not, mind you, that I like or esteem
him one iota the less for what you tell me. Indeed,
on the contrary, for there is all the more merit in his
having made his way alone. Still you astonish rue.
They tell me," he said with a smile, "that he is won-
derfully like me; but strangely enough he reminds
me rather of my wife. You remember her, Shepherd,
for you were stationed at Meerut at the time I mar-
ried her there?"
Colonel Shepherd nodded, and for a few minutes the
two friends sat silent, thinking over the memories
which the words had evoked.
"Strange, is it not," Colonel Ripon went on, arous-
ing himself, "that the child of some pauper parents
should have a resemblance, however distant, to me and
my wife?"
"Curiously enough," Colonel Shepherd said, "the
boy was not born of pauper parents; he was left at the
door of the workhouse at Ely by a tramp, whose body
was found next morning in one of the ditches. It was
a stormy night, and she had no doubt lost her way
after leaving the child. That was why they called
him William Gale. Why, what is the matter, Ripon?
Good heavens, are you ill?"
Colonel Shepherd's surprise was natural. The old
officer sat rigid in his chair with his eyes open and
staring at his friend, and yet apparently without sue-


A STARTLING IDEA.
339
ing him. The colour in his face had faded away, and
even through the deep bronze of the Indian sun its
pallor was visible. Colonel Shepherd rose in great
alarm, and was about to call for assistance when his
friend, with a slight motion of his hand, motioned to
him to abstain.
"How old is he?" came presently in a strange tone
from his lips.
"How old is who?" Colonel Shepherd asked in sur-
prise—"Oh, you mean Gale! He is not nineteen yet,
though he looks four or five years older. He was
under seventeen when he enlisted, and I rather strained
a point to get him in by hinting, that, when he was asked
his age, he had better say under nineteen. So he was
entered as eighteen, but I know he was more than a
year younger than that. But what has that to do
with it, my dear old friend? What is the matter with
you?"
"I believe, Shepherd," Colonel Ripon said solemnly,
"that he is my son."
"Your son!" his comrade exclaimed, astonished.
"Yes, I believe he is my son."
"But how on earth can that be?" his friend asked.
"Are you sure that you know what you are saying?
Is your head quite clear, old friend?"
"My head is clear enough," the colonel replied,
"although I felt stunned at first . Did you never hear
of my having lost my child?"
"No, indeed," Colonel Shepherd replied, more and


340
COLONEL RIPON'S STORY.
more surprised . For he had at first supposed that
some sudden access of fever or delirium had seized his
friend. "You will remember that a week or two after
you were married my regiment was moved up to the
north, and we remained three years longer in India.
When I got back to England I heard that you had
lost your wife a short time before and had returned.
I remember our ships crossed on the way. When we
met again the conversation never turned on the past."
"I will tell you the story," the colonel said, "and
you will see that at any rate the boy may be my son,
and that being so the double likeness proves to me
incontestably that he is. I had, as you know, been ill
before I left India. I had not been home for fifteen
years, and got two years' leave. As you may know,
I had a good fortune irrespective of the service, and I
took a place called Holmwood Park,near Dawlish,and as
I had thought of retiring at the end of my leave I was
put on the commission of the peace. My boy was born
a few months after I got home. Soon after I took
the place some gipsy fellows broke into the poultry-
yard and stole some valuable chickens which were great
pets of my wife. I chased them, and finally brought
home the guilt of the theft to one of the men in
whose tent a lot of their feathers were found. He
had been previously convicted, and was sentenced to a
term of penal servitude. Before the trial his wife, also
a gipsy, called upon me and begged me not to ap-
pear against her husband. This of course was out


A BROKEN-HEARTED MOTHER.
of the question, as he had already been sent to trial.
When she found that her entreaties were useless, she
in the most vindictive tone told me that I should
repent it, and she certainly spoke as if she meant it.
I heard nothing more of the matter until the boy was
sixteen months old; then he disappeared; he was
stolen from the garden. A clue was left, evidently
that I might know from whom the blow came. The
gipsy had been convicted partly on the evidence of
the feathers, but principally from the fact that the
boot which he had on had half the iron on the heel
broken off, and this tallied exactly with some marks
in my fowl-house. An hour after the child was gone
we found in the centre of the drive in the park a boot,
conspicuously placed there to catch the eye, and this
boot I recognized by the broken iron as that which
had transported the gipsy. That the woman had
stolen the child I had not the least doubt; but neither
of her nor it could I ever gain the slightest clue. I
advertised in every paper in the kingdom. I offered a
reward of £1000, and I believe the police searched every
gipsy encampment in England, but without success.
My wife had never been strong, and from that day
she gradually sank. As long as there was hope she
kept up for a time. I hoped all would go well, but
three months afterwards she faded rapidly, and ere
six months had passed from the loss of the child I
buried her and came straight out to India. I went
home once for two or three months upon business con-


342
THE MEANS OF RECOGNITION.
nected with my property there some seven years since.
That was when we last met, you know, at the club.
With that exception I have remained here ever since."
"The trouble will be, I fear," Colonel Shepherd
said, "for you to identify him. That vindictive gipsy
woman who stole your child is not likely to have left
any marks on its clothing by which it might be iden-
tified at any future time and her revenge on you
frustrated."
"Thank God!" the colonel said earnestly, "if it be
my son he bears a mark by which I shall know him.
That was one of his poor mother's greatest comforts.
The child was born with an ugly blood mark on its
neck. It used to bother my wife a good deal, and she
consulted several surgeons whether it could not be re-
moved, but they all said no, not without completely
cutting out the flesh; and this, of course, was not to
be thought of. After the child was lost I remember
as well as if it had been spoken to-day, my wife say-
ing, 'How strange are God's ways! I was foolish
enough to fret over that mark on the darling's neck,
and now the thought of it is my greatest comfort; and
if it shall be God's will that years shall pass away
before we find him, there is a sign by which we shall
always know him. No other child can be palmed off
upon us as our own. When we find Tom we shall
know him, however changed he may be.' Listen,
Shepherd! that is his step on the stairs. May God
grant that he prove to be my son!"


DEEP HAPPINESS.
345
gentleman, a most promising young officer, the man,
indeed, to whom he had been so specially attracted—
was a joy altogether unhoped and unlooked for. Morn-
ing had broken before the newly united father and son
had done their long, and happy talk, and they separated
only to take a bath to prepare them for the day's
work.
The astonishment of everyone was unbounded when
Colonel Ripon announced on the following morning
that in Captain Gale of the GGth, who it was known
had risen from the ranks, he had discovered a son that
had been stolen from him as a child. No one enter-
tained a doubt for an instant that any mistake had
arisen, for the likeness between the two men as they
strode down the street together on their way to General
Roberts' quarters was so marked that—now that men
knew the relationship—none doubted for a moment
that they were indeed father and son.
The warmest congratulations poured in upon them
from all sides, and from none more heartily than from
the general, who was more than ever pleased that he
had been the means of Will's obtaining his commission
from the ranks. The same day Colonel Ripon sent off, by
a mounted messenger carrying despatches, a telegram
to be sent from the nearest station of the flying line,
which the engineers advancing with Colonel Phayre's
force had already carried as far as the Kojak Pass, to
the government of India, asking leave to go home at
once on the most urgent and pressing family business.


346
yossouf's determination.
Yossouf's grief when he heard that his master was
going to leave for England was very great. At first
he begged that he might accompany him; but Tom
pointed out that, much as he should like to have him
with him, his position in England would be an uncom-
fortable one. He would meet with no one with whom
he could converse, and would after a time long for his
own country again. Yossouf yielded to his reasoning,
and the picture which Will drew of his own loneliness
when in Cabul separated from all his own people aided
greatly in enforcing his arguments on his mind. He
said, however, that at any rate he would not return to
Afghanistan at present.
"It will be long," he said, "before things settle
down there, and it will be useless for me to put my
money into a herd which might be driven off by plun-
derers the next week. Besides, at present the feeling
against the English will be strong, so many have lost
men of their family in the fighting. If I returned I
should be a marked man. It is known that I threw
in my lot with the English, and it will be cast in my
teeth even if no worse came of it. No, I will enlist in
the Guides; I shall be at home with them, for most of
them belong to the Afghan tribes. I am young yet,
not fully a man, and I have my life before me.
Some day, perhaps, if things are quiet and prosperous
at home, I will go back and end my days there."
So it was arranged. One of the officers of the Guides
had accompanied General Roberts as interpreter, and


ENROLLED IN THE GUIDES. 347
Will handed over Yossonf to him, tellin'* him how well
the lad had served him. The ofEcer promised to enroll
him in the corps as soon as he rejoined it, and also that
he would not fail to report his conduct to the colonel
and to obtain his promotion to the rank of a native
officer as soon as possible. From Will Yossouf would
accept nothing except his revolver as a keepsake, but
Colonel Ripon insisted upon his taking from him a
present which would make him a rich man when ho
chose to return to his native country.



CHAPTER XXIL
AT HOME AT LAST.
HE next day Colonel Ripon started with the
66th, and at the end of the first day's march
met a messenger, who, among other de-
spatches, carried a telegram granting him at once the
leave he asked for, and which indeed had been due had
he asked for it many years before. His intention was
to accompany the 66th to Kurrachee and to sail with
it to England. This intention was carried out, and
the remnant of the regiment safely reached England.
One of Colonel Ripon's first steps was to accompany
Will, or, as he ought now to be called, Tom, to the
Horse Guards, and to procure an insertion in the
Gazette stating that Captain William Gale of the 66th
would henceforth be known by his true and proper
name of Thomas Ripon. The colonel purchased a fine
estate in Somersetshire, and retiring from the service
settled down there. There was a considerable discus-
sion between father and son as to whether the latter
should remain in the army. Colonel Ripon was un-
willing that his son should relinquish a profession of


3;io
sam's astonishment.
"Why, you did not think so badly of me," he said,
"as to think that I should forget the woman who was
a mother to me. Father," he said—" for I have found
my real father, Mrs. Dickson, as you always said I
should some day—it is to this good woman that I
owe what I am. But for her I might now be a
labouring man; but it is to her kindness, to her good
advice, to her lessons, that I owe everything. It was
she who taught me that I should so behave that if my
parents ever found me they should have no cause to be
ashamed of me. She was indeed as a mother to me,
and this lodge was my home rather than the work-
house inside. Ah! and here is Sam!"
Sam Dickson, coming out at this moment, stood in
open-mouthed astonishment at seeing his wife stand-
ing with her hand in that of a gentleman.
"Oh, Sam! who do you think this is?" Sam made
no reply, but stared at Tom with all his eyes.
"If it warn't that he be drowned and dead long
ago," he said at last, "I should say it was Will Gale
growed up and got to be a gentleman. I shouldn't ha'
knowed him at first, but when he smiles I don't think
as how I can be far wrong."
"You are right, Sam. I am the boy you and your
wife were so kind to from the time you picked him up
just where we are standing, and whom you last handed
over to go aboard a smack at Yarmouth. She was, as
you have heard, run down in the North Sen, but I was
saved in the ship which ran over her and was taken


APPOINTMENTS FOR LIFE.
351
out to the East. There, after being wrecked again,
and going through lots of adventures, I went to India,
enlisted there, and fought through the Afghan war.
I am a captain now, and my name is no longer Will
Gale, but Torn Ripon, for I have found my real father,
this gentleman, Colonel Ripon."
"Who feels," Colonel Ripon went on, "how much
he and his son owe to your kindness and that of your
good wife here, and who, as you will tind, is not un-
grateful. I have just bought an estate down in Somer-
setshire, and I mean to install you and your wife in a
pretty lodge at the gates, with enough to live upon
comfortably to the end of your lives."
Mrs. Dickson cried with joy as Colonel Ripon entered
into details of what he intended to do for them, and
Sam, although, as was his way, much less demonstrative
in his gladness, was yet greatly delighted. There was
a good garden to the lodge; they were to have the
keep of a cow, and thirty shillings per week as long
as they lived. Before the colonel left, Sam Dickson's
resignation of his post was handed in to the master.
The colonel told them that at the end of the month,
when Sam's notice would expire, they were to sell off
what furniture they had, as it would cost more to con-
vey it so long a distance than it was worth, and he
would take care that they should find everything com-
fortable and ready for occupation at the lodge upon their
arrival. Tom called upon the master and matron and
schoolmaster, and thanked all for the kindness that


352
CONCLUSION.
they had shown him when a boy; and Colonel Ripon
left a cheque with the master to be expended in tobacco,
tea, and sugar for the aged inmates of the house.
No words can express the delight of Sam Dickson
and his wife when, a month later, they arrived at their
new home. Tom had spared no trouble in seeing that
it was comfortably and cosily furnished. The garden
had been thoroughly dug up and planted, and Mrs.
Dickson could scarcely believe that she was the mis-
tress of so pleasant a home. Tom was forgetful of
none of his old friends, and he wrote to an address
which Hans, his companion among the Malays, had
given him when they separated, and forwarded to him
a handsome watch as a souvenir of his comrade.
There is no more to be told. Captain Ripon, still a
very young man, is living with his father the colonel.
He is one of the most popular men in his county, and
there is some talk of his standing for one of its boroughs
at the next election, and it is rumoured that he is likely,
ere long, to bring home a lady who will be the future
mistress of Burnham Park.
He is quite content that he has left the army, though
he fidgetted a little, while the P^gyptian war was going
on, and could not help feeling a little regret that he
did not take part in the storming of Tel-el-Kebir.


2
Blacki e & Son's New Publications.
By HARRY COLLINGWOOD.
The Congo Rovers:
A Tale op the Slave Squadron
Br HENRY FRITH.
The Search for the Talisman:
A Story op Labrador.
By Mrs. R. H. READ.
Silver Mill:
A Tale op the Don Valley.
Br EMMA LESLIE.
Gytha's Message:
A Tale op Saxon Enoland.
By Miss M. A. PAULL.
My Mistress the Queen.
By Mrs. AUSTIN.
Marie's Home:
Or, A Glimpse op the Past.
By J. C. HUTCHESON.
The Penano Pirate and The Lost Pinnace.
By THOMAS ARCHER.
Little Tottie,
And Two other Stories.
FAMOUS DISCOVERIES BY SEA AND LAND.
STIRRING EVENTS IN HISTORY.


4
Blackie & Sun's New Publications.
THE UNIVERSE:
Or the Infinitely Great and the Infinitely Little. A
Sketch of Contrasts in Creation, and Marvels revealed and
explained by Natural Science. By F. A. Pouchet, m.d.
Illustrated by 273 Engravings on wood. 8th Edition, medium
8vo, cloth elegant, gilt edges, "s. Sd.; morocco antique, 16>.
"We can honestly commend this work, which is admirably, as it is copiously
ill ustrated."—Times.
"As interesting as the most exciting romance, and a great deal more likely to be
remembered to good purpose."—Standard.
"Scareely any book in French or in English is bo likely to stimulate in the young
an interest in the physical phenomena."—Fortnightly Review.
CHEEP AND CHATTER:
Or, Lessons from Field and Tkee. By Alice Banks. With
54 Character Illustrations by Gordon Browne. Small 4to,
cloth, handsome design on cover, 3*. 6d.; gilt edges, 4*.

About a dozen highly dramatic sketches or little stories, the actors in
which are birds, beasts, and insects. They are instructive, suited to the
capacities of young people, and very amusing. The character drawings,
with which the book is profusely illustrated, are delightfully funny.
"The real charm of the volume lies in the illustrations. Every one is a success.
With Mrds and mice and insects the artist is equally at home; but his birds above
all are inimitable."—Academy.
"This is a very pleasing book for the young. The morals of the stories are very
sound, and by no means obtrusive."—Daily News.


Blacki e & Son's New Publications.
5
BY G. A. HENTY.
Surely Mr. Henty should understand boys' tastes better than any man living."
—The Timet.
THE LION OF THE NORTH:
A Tale of Gustavua Adolphus and the Wars of Religion. By
G. A. Henty. With 12 full-page Illustrations by John
Schonbsrg, in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant,
olivine edges, 6s.
In this story Mr. Henty gives the history of the first part of the Thirty
Years' War, a struggle unprecedented in length, in the fury with which it
was carried on, and in the terrible destruction and ruin which it caused.
The issue had its importance, which has extended to the present day, as it
established religious freedom in Germany. The army of the chivalrous
King of Sweden, the prop and maintenance of the Protestant cause, was
largely composod of Scotchmen, and among these was the hero of the
story. In such a time of war and turmoil there was an opportunity for
unlimited adventure. But the chief interest of the tale turns on the great
struggle between Gustavus and his chief opponents Wallenstein, Tilly, and
Pappenheim. The story terminates shortly after the murder of Wallenstein.
WITH CLIVE IN INDIA:
Or the Beginnings of an Empire. By G. A. Henty, author of
"Facing Death," "Under Drake's Flag," "By Sheer Pluck,"
&c. With 12 full-page Illustrations by Gordon Browne.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6*.
The period between the landing of Give as a young- writer in India and
the close of his career was critical and eventful in the extreme. At its
commencement the English were traders existing on sufferance of the
native princes. At its close they were masters of Bengal and of the greater
part of Southern India. The author has given a full and accurate account
of the historical events of that stirring time, and battles and sieges follow
each other in rapid succession, while he combines with his narrative a tale
of daring and adventure which gives a lifelike interest to the volume.
"In this book Mr. Henty has contrived to exceed himself in stirring adventures
and thrilling situations, while the realities are preserved. The pictures are by Mr.
Gordon Browne, who may be congratulated on their success in adding to the interest
of the book."—Saturday Review.
"Among writers of stories of adventure for boys Mr. Henty stands in the very first
rank, and Mr. Gordon Browne occupies a similar place with his pencil . . . Those
who know something about India will be the most ready to thank Mr. Henty for
giving them this instructive volnme to place in the hands of their children. "—Acadeiny.
"He has taken a period of Indian History of the most vital importance, and he has
shown by what means the work was accomplished. He has embroidered on the
historical facta a story which of itself is deeply interesting. Young people assuredly
will be delighted with the volume as a whole."— Scotsman.
A 2


6
Blackie & Son's New Publications.
BY G. A. HENTY.
"Mr. Henty as a boy's story-teller stands in the Tery foremost rank."—Glasgote
Herald.
THROUGH THE FRAY:
A Story of the Luddite Riots. By G. A. Henty. With 12 full-
page Illustrations by H. M. Paget, in blank and tint. Crown
8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6s.
The author in this story has followed tho lines which he worked out so
successfully in "Facing Death." As in that story he shows that there are
victories to bo won in peaceful fields, and that steadfastness and tenacity
are virtues which tell in the long run. The story is laid in Yorkshire at the
commencement of tho present century, when the high price of food caused
by the war and the introduction of machinery drove the working-classes
to desperation and caused them to band themselves in that wide-spread
organization known as the Luddite Society. There is an abundance of
adventure in the tale, but its chief interest lies in the character of the
hero, and the manner in which by a combination of circumstances he is
put on trial for his life, but at last comes victorious "through the fray."
TRUE TO THE OLD FLAG:
A Tale of the American War of Independence. By G. A.
Henty. With 12 full-page Illustrations by Gordon Browne
in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6*.
Owing to the unsuccessful termination of tho war between Great Britain
and her American colonies, the subject is one which English writers have
for the most part avoided. In the present volume the author has gone to
the accounts of English officers who took part in the conflict, and lads will
find that in no war in which British soldiers have been engaged did they
behave with greater courage and good conduct. The historical portion
of the book being accompanied with numerous thrilling adventures with
the redskins on the shores of Lake Huron, a story of exciting interest is
interwoven with the general narrative and carried tlirough the book.
"Mr. Henty undoubtedly possesses the secret of writing eminently successful
historical tales; and those older than the lads whom the author addresses in his
preface, may read with pleasure a story which combines with the personal adventures
of the youthful hero, an accurate and interesting account of the American War of
Independence "—Academy.
"Mr, G. A. Henty's extensive personal experience of adventures and moving
incidents by flood and field, combined with a gift of picturesque narrative, make his
books always welcome visitors in the home cirele."— Daily News.
"Very superior in every way. The book is almost unique in its class in having
illustrative maps."—Saturday Rtvitw.


Blackie & Son's New Publications.
7
BY G. A. HENTY.
"Mr. Henty's books nerer fail to interest boy readers.*'—Academy.
IN FREEDOM'S CAUSE:
A Story of Wallace and Bruce. By G. A. Hbntt. With 12
full-page Illustrations by Gordon Browne in black and tint
.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6>.
In this story the author relates the stirring tale of the Scottish War of
Independence and of the exploits of Wallace and Bruce. The extraordinary
valour and personal prowess of these historical characters rival the deeds
of the mythical heroes of chivalry Roland and Arthur, and indeed at one
time Wallace was ranked with these legendary personages. The researches
of modern historians have shewn, however, that he was a living, breathing
man—and a valiant champion. The hero of the tale fought under both
Wullaco and Bruce, and while the strictest historical accuracy has been
maintained with respect to public events, the work is full of "hairbreadth
'scapes" and wild adventure.
"Mr. Henty has broken new ground as an historical novelist. His tale of the da; s
of Wallace and Bruce is full of stirring action, and will commend itself to boys."—
AUtenctum.
"It is written in the author's best style. Full of the wildest and most remarkable
achievements, it is a tale of great interest, which a boy, once he has begun it, will
not willingly put on one side."—The Sch»nlmaster.
"Scareely anywhere have we seen in prose a more lucid and spirit-stirring descrip-
tion of Bannockburn than the one with which the author fittingly closes his volume."
-Ihtmfria Standard.
UNDER DRAKE'S FLAG.
A Tale of the Spanish Main. By G. A. Henty. Illustrated by
12 full-page Pictures by Gordon Browne in black and tint.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6s.
A story of the days when England and Spain straggled for the supre-
macy of the sea, and England carried off the palm. The heroes sail as fads
with Drake in the expedition in which the Pacific Ocean was 6rst seen by
an Englishman from a tree-top on the Isthmus of Panama, and in his great
voyage of circumnavigation. The historical portion of the story is abso-
lutely to be relied upon, but this, altheugh very useful to lads, will perhaps
be less attractive than the great variety of exciting adventure through
which the young adventurors pass in the course of their voyages.
"A stirring Look of Drake's time, find just such a book as the youth of this mari-
time country lire likely to prize highly."— Daily Tilet/raph.
"Ned in the coils of the boa-constrictor is a wonderful picture. A boy must be
hard to please if he wishes for anything more exciting."—Pail Mull Gazette.
"It is wtill illustrated, and is a real good story really well told."—Punch.
"A book of adventure, where the hero meets with experience enough one would
think to turn his hair gray."—tlarixr's Monthly Magazine.


8
Blackie & Son's New Publications.
BY G. A. HENTY.
"Among writers of stories of adventure for boys Mr. Henty stands in the very
first rank."—Academy.
FOR NAME AND FAME:
Or, Through Afghan Passes. By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-
page Illustrations by Gordon Browne, in black and tint.
Crown 8ro, cloth elegant, bs.
At a moment when Afghanistan is again the centre of interest, this story
of the last war in that country is especially appropriate. The hero
is apprenticed to a Yarmouth smacksman whose boat is run down in the
North Sea by a ship bound for the East. After being wrecked and going
through many stirring adventures among the Malays, ho finds his way to
Calcutta, and enlists there in a regiment on tho point of going north to
join the army forming at the mouths of the Afghan passes. He accom-
panies the force under General Roberts to the Pei'var Kotal, is wounded,
taken prisoner and carried to Cabul, he is present at the massacre of the
mission, and at the subsequent fights round Cabul. Ho is then transferred
to Candahar, and takes part in the battle of Maiwand, and the final
defeat of the army of Ayoub Khan.
THE DRAGON AND THE RAVEN:
Or, The Days of King Alfred. By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-
page Illustrations by C. J. Staniland, E.I., in black and
tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, bs.
In this story the author gives an account of the desperate struggle
between Saxon and Dane for supremacy in England, and presents a vivid
picture of the misery and ruin to which the country was roduced by tho
ravages of the sea-wolves. The historical incidents of the struggle, as
related by contemporary writers, are faithfully adhered to. The hero of the
story, a young Saxon thane, takes part in all the battles fought by King
Alfred, and the incidents in his career are unusually varied and exciting.
He is driven from his home, takes to tho soa and resists the Danes in their
own element, and being pursued by them up the Seine, is present at tho
long and desperate siege of Paris.
YARNS ON THE BEACH.
By G. A. Henty. With 2 full-page Illustrations. Crown 8vo,
cloth extra, 1*. 6d.
These "yams" of manly prowess and bold adventuro are attractive
because of their liveliness, and the change from one tale of adventure to
another provides something to suit different moods or varying tastes. It
is a capital book for a young reader, or a render who retains a youthful
fancy and a fresh appreciation, and seeks diversion from study or work.


Blackie & Son's New Publications.
9
BY G. A. HENTY.
"Mr. Henty is one of the best of story tellers for young people."—Sptetator
ST. GEORGE FOR ENGLAND:
A Tale of Creasy and Poitiers. By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-
pnge Illustrations by Gordon Browne in black and tint.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, 5*.
No portion of English history is more crowded with great events than that
of the reign of Edward III. Creasy and Poitiers laid France prostrate at
tho feet of England; the Spanish fleet was dispersed and destroyed. Europe
w;is ravaged by the dreadful plague known as the Black Death, and Franco
was the scene of tho terrible peasant rising called the Jacquerie. All these
stirring events are treated by the author in St. George for England. The
hero of the story, although of good family, begins lifo as a London ap-
prentice, but after countless adventures ami penis, becomes by valour and
good conduct the squire, and at lost the trusted friend of the Black Prince.
"Mr. Henty. as a boy's story teller stands in the very foremost rank. With plenty
of scope to work ulujn he has done his work well, producing a strong story at onoe in-
structive and entertaining."—Olatgow Herald.
"A story of very great interest for boys. In his own foreible style the author has
endeavoured to show that determination and enthusiasm can accomplish marvellous
results; that courage is generally accompanied by magnanimity and gentleness, and
that if nut in itself the highest of virtues, it is the parent of nearly all the others,
since hut few of them can be practised without it."—Pall Mall Gazette.
"Mr. Henty has developed for himself a type of historical novel for boys which
bids fair to supplement, on their behalf, the historical labours of Sir Waiter Scott
in the land of fiction."—Standard.
BY SHEER PLUCK:
A Tale of the Ashanti War. By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-page
Illustrations by Gordon Browne in black and tint Crown
8vo, cloth elegant, 5*.
The Ashanti Campaign seems but an event of yesterday, but it happened
when tho generation now rising up were too young to have made them-
selves acquainted with its incidents. Tho author has woven, in a tale of
thrilling interest, all the details of the campaign, of which he was himself
h witness. His hero, after many exciting adventures in the interior, finds
himself at Coomassie just before the outbreak of the war, is detained a
prisoner by the king, is sent down with the army which invaded the British
Protectorate, escapes, and accompanies tho English expedition on their
march to Coomassie.
"Mr. Henty keens up his reputation as a writer of boys' stories. 'By Sheer Pluck'
will be eagerly read '— A th' no?um.
"No one could have done the work better than he has done it. The lad must be
very difficult to satisfy who is not satisfied with this."—Scotsman.
"The book is one which will not only sustain, but add to Mr. Henty'* reputation.
The illustrations are particularly good."—standard.
"Written with a simple directness, foree, and purity of style worthy of Defoe.
Morally, the book is everything that could be desired setting before the boys a bright
and bracing ideal of the English gentleman."—Christian Leader,


10
Blacki e & Son's Ncic Publications.
BY G. A. HENTY.
''The brightest of all the living writers whese office it is to enchant the boys."—
Christian Leader,
FACING DEATH:
Or the Hero of the Vaughan Pit. A Tale of the Coal Mines.
By G. A. Henty. With 8 full-page Illustrations by Gordon
Browne in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, 5*.
"Facing Death " is a story with a purpose. It is intended to show that
n lad who makes up his mind firmly and resolutely that he will rise in life,
and who is prepared to face toil and ridicule and hardship to carry out his
determination, is suro to succeed. The hero of the story, though only a
colliery lad, is a character that boys will delight in. He is a typical British
boy, dogged, earnest, generous, and though " shamefaced " to a degree, is
ready to face death in the discharge of duty. His is a character for imita-
tion by boys in every station.
"The tale is well written and woll illustrated, and there is much reality in the
diameters."—A thmaum.
"If any father, godfather, clergyman, or schoolmaster is on the look-out fur a good
book to give as a present to a boy who is worth his salt, this ia the book «e would
recommend."—Standard.
BY GEORGE MANVILLE FENN.
NAT THE NATURALIST:
Or a Boy's Adventures in the Eastern Seas. By G. Manville
Fenn, author of "The Golden Magnet," 1'Iu the Kings
Name," &c. Illustrated by 8 full-page Pictures by Gordon
Browne in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, bs.
This is a pleasant story of a lad who, though he is brought up in a strictly
quiet fashion by an aunt, has a great desire to go abroad to seek speci-
mens in natural history, and has that desire gratified by an uncle who
comes heme from distant lands, whence he brings a beautiful collection.
The boy Nat and his uncle Dick go on a voyage to the remoter islands of
the Eastern sen**, and their adventures there are told in a truthful and
vastly interesting fashion, which will at once attract and maintain the
earnest attention of young readers. The descriptions of Mr. Ebony, their
black comrade, and of the scenes of savage life, are full of genuine humour.
"Mr. Fenn has hit npou a capital idea. This is among the best of the boys' books
of the season."— The Time$.
"We cnu conceive of no more attractive present fur a young naturalist."—Land
a,id Water.
"This sort of hook encourages independence of character, develops resouree, and
teaches a boy to keep his eyes open."—iSaturtlay RTitw.
"The late Lord Pa liners ton used to say that one use of war was to teach geography:
such books as this teach it in a more harmless and cheaper way."—^1 (A mo-urn.


11
"One of the best issues, if not absolutely the beat, of Defoe's work which haa ever
appeared."— The Standard.
THE LIFE AND SURPRISING ADVENTURES OF
ROBINSON CRUSOE.
BY DANIEL DEFOE.
Beautifully Printed, and Illustrated by above 100 Pictures
Designed by Gordon Browne.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6s.
There have been count-
less editions of 11 Robin-
son Crusoe," and they
have mostly been imper-
fect, inasmuch as they
have been so largely al-
tered from the original
text that tho languago
in many instances has
not been that of Dofoo
but of his revisers. The
present volumo has been
carefully printed from
tho original edition, and
all obsolete or little
known termsand obscure
phrases are explained in
brief foot-notes. The
"Editing"is not a cor-
ruption or pretended im-
provement of Defoe's
great work.
"The best edition I have come across for years. If you know a boy who has not
a 1 Robinson Crusoe.' just glance at any one of the hwn.hr.I illustrations in this
edition and you will go no further afield in seareh of a present for that fortunate
youth."—Truth.
"Of the many editions of Defoe's immortal story that have passed through our
hands in recent years, wo are inclined to rank this the most desirable as a present for
a good boy. Gordon Browne's illustrations satisfy the high expectation we had formed
from his work of last year."—The Academy.
"One may be pardoned for growing enthusiastic over the ideal edition which
Messrs. Hlackie have published this season. Well printed, handsomely bound, and
beautifully illnstrated, the volume may well become the standard edition of Defoe's
evergreen *OTk."—£dinburgk CouruiU.


Blackk & Son's New Publications.
13
GULLIVER'S TRAVELS.
A New Edition, beautifully printed, and illustrated by more
than 100 pictures from designs by Gordon Browne. In
crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 5*.

The wonderful travels of Gulliver " into several remote regions of the
world " are still as fresh and entertaining as when they were first presented
to the public moro than a hundred and fifty years ago. In this edition
the text has been judiciously curtailed by the omission of several passages
quite unsuited for tho perusal of the young or for family reading; and
foot-notes to the text havo been added to explain and throw light on those
allusions, references, obsolete words, &c, which a young reader would
not understand. The numerous vivacious and amusing illustrations by
Gordon Browne greatly add to the attractions of the narrative.


14
Blackie <jk Son's New I'uhlicathins.
BY GEORGE MANVILLE FENN.
"Mr. Mauville Femt may be regarded as the successor in boyhood's affections of
Captain Mayne Reid."— Academy.
BROWNSMITH'S BOY.
By George Manville Fenn. With 12 full-page Illustrations
by Gordon Browne, in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth
elegant, olivine edges, 6s.
The career of Grant Denison (" Brownsmith's Boy") embraces for the
most part the home adventures of an orphan, who, having formed the
acquaintance of an eccentric old gardener, accepts his offer of a home and
finds that there is plenty of romance in a garden, and much excitement
even in a journey now and then to town. In a half-savage lad he finds a
friend who shows his lovo and fidolity principally by pretending to be an
enemy. This boy, however, is always staunch, and saves his companion
from many a peril, and in more than one fierce fight aids him against the
cruel oppression of older lads. In " Brownsmith's Boy" there is abundance
of excitement and trouble within four walls.
BUNYIP LAND:
The Story of a Wild Journey in New Guinea. By G. Man-
ville Fenn. With 12 full-page Illustrations by Gordon
Browne. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6*.
*' Runyip Land" is the story of Joseph Carstairs, son of an eminent
botanist, who, in his seareh for new plants for the London nurserymen,
ventures into the interior of New Guinea. Years pass away, and Professor
Carstairs does not return ; and though he is supposed to be dead, his young
wife and son, who live at a station in Australia, refuse to believe this to bo
the case; and as soon as he is old enough young,Joe goes in search of his
father, accompanied by Jimmy, a native black. They journey into the
interior, which Jimmy believes to be full of the native demons or buuyips,
as he calls them, hence the title Bunyip Land. Their adventures arc many
and exciting, but after numerous perils they discover the professor a
prisoner among the blacks, and bring him home in triumph.
"Mr. Fenn deserves the thanks of everybody for the two books ' Bunyip Land.'
and 'Menhardoc," that be contributes for the gratification of ' our boys' during the
coming holidays, and we may venture to promise that a quiet week may be reckoned
on whilst the youngs ters have such fascinating literature provided for their evenings'
amusement."— Sptctator.
"' Bunyip Land' and 'The Golden Magnet.' are two of the best tales of adventure
produced by any living writer, combining, as they do, the inventiveness of Jules Verne,
and the solidity of character and earnestness of spirit which have made the English
victorious in so many fields of labour and researeh."—Daily Chronicle.


Blaekie & Son's New Publications. 15
BY GEORGE MANVILLE FENN.
There is a freshness, a buoyancy, a heartiness about Mr. Fenn's writings."—Standard.
THE GOLDEN MAGNET:
A Tale of the Land of the Incas. By G. Manville Fenn.
With 12 full-page pictures by Gordon Browne, in black and
tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6s.
'Hie tale is of a romantic lad, who leaves home to seek his fortune in
South America by endeavouring to discover some of that treasure which
legends declare was ages ago hidden to preserve it from the Spanish in-
vaders. He is accompanied by a faithful companion, who, in the capacity
both of comrade and henchman, does true service, and shows the dogged
courage of tho English lad during the strange adventures which bofall thorn.
"Told with admirable foree and strength. Few men other than Mr. Fenn have
the ealiacity for telling such stories as this, and we do not remember to have seen one
of his productions which has exceeded it in merit."—Scotsman.
"There could be no more welcome present for a boy. There is not a dull pago in
the book, and many will be read with breathless interest."—Journal of Education.
IN THE KING'S NAME:
Or the Cruise of the Kestrel. By G. Manville Fenn. Illus-
trated by 12 full-page Pictures by Gordon Browne, in black
and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, olivine edges, 6*.
"In the King's Name" is a spirited story of the Jacobite times, con-
ccrning tho adventures of Hilary Leigh, a young naval officer in the
preventive service off the coast of Sussex, on board the Kestrel. Leigh
in taken prisoner by the adherents of the Pretender, amongst whom is an
early friend and patron who desires to spare' the lad's life, but will not release
him. The narrative is full of pxciting and often humorous incident.
"Mr Manville Fenn has already won a foremost place among writers of stories
for buys 'In the King's Name,' is, we are inclined to think, the best of all his pro-
ductions in this field."—Daily News.
"Told with the freshness and verve which characterize all Mr. Fenn's writings and
put him in the front rank of writers for boys."—Standard.
A TERRIBLE COWARD.
By G. Manville Fenn. With 2 full-page Illustrations in black
and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth extra, 1*. 6d.
The tale of a lad who never bounced, bragged, or bullied, and who, from
his unwillingness to risk his lifo in foolhardy tricks and dangerous frolics,
won for himself the distinction in the Cornish village where he lived of
being called a "terrible coward." When the timo came, hewever, that put
the most venturesome to the test, the coward was found to be tho one who
went to tho front, and distanced all by his cool unflinching English courage.


16
Blackie & Sun's New Publications.
BY GEORGE MANVILLE FENN.
"No one can find his way to the hearts of lads more readily than Mr. Fenn."—
Nottingham Guardian.
PATIENCE WINS:
Or, War in the Works. By G. Manville Fenn. With 8 full-
page Illustrations by Gordon Browne, in black aud tint.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, 5*.
This is a graphic narrative of factory life in the Black country. The
hero, Cob, and his three uncles, engineers, machinists, and inventors, go
down to Arrowfield to set up "a works." They find, however, that the
workmen, through prcjudico and ignorance, are determined to have no
new-fangled machinery. But Cob and his uncles are of the genuine kind
that never know defeat, and war is declared. The workmen attack and
the masters defend tho works by night and by day, in spite of which the
machinery is destroyed, the workshops almost blown up, and endless at-
tempts made to do injury. After a series of narrow escapes and stirring
encounters, in which both, sides get worsted in turn, the workmen by de-
grees find that no malice is borne against them, and at last admiration
takes the placo of hatred. A great business is built up, and its foundation
is laid on the good-will of the men.
MENHARDOC:
A Story of Cornish Nets aud Mines. By G. Manville Fenn.
With 8 full-page Illustrations by C. J. Staniland, RL. in
black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, 5*.
The scene of this story of boyish aspiration and adventure is laid among
the granite piles and tors of Cornwall. Hero amongst the hardy, honest
fishermen and miners the two sons of Mr. Temple meet with Will Marion,
the nephew of a retired purser of the Royal Navy and owner of several
fishing-boats. The London boys are inducted into the secrets of fishing
in the great bay, they learn hew to catch mackerel, pollack, and conger
with the line, and are present at the hauling of the nets, although not with-
out incurring many serious risks. There is a good deal of quaint character
throughout, and the sketches of Cornish life and local colouring are based
upon experience in the bay, whese fishing village is called here Menhardoc.
Tnis is a thoroughly English story of phases of life but little touched upon
in boys' literature up to the present time
*' They are real living boys, with the virtues and faults which generally characterize
the transition stage between boyhood and manhood. The Cornish fishermen are
drawn from life, they are racy of the soil, emit with the sea water, and they stand out
from the pages in their jerseys and sea-boots all sprinkled with silvery pilchard scales.
. . . . Those who buy it as a Christmas gift for their juvenile relatives will find it
a pleasant companion for their own idle hours when the boys have done with it."
—Spictator,
"Mr. Fenn has written many books in his time; he has not often written one which
for genuine merit as a story for young pvople will exceed this."—Srattman.
"A description of Will Marion's iiescent into a flooded mine is excellent. Josh is a
delightfully amusing character. We may cordially praise the illustrations."—Satur-
day Review.


Blackie & Stm's New Publications.
17
BY ASOOTT R. HOPE.
STORIES OF OLD RENOWN.
Tales of Knights and Heroes. By Ascott R. Hope. With
nearly KX) Illustrations by Gordon Browne. Crown 8vo,
clotli elegant, olivine edges, 5s.

"The stories are admirably chosen. It is a book to be coveted by all young
readers."—Scotsman
"One of the best, if Dot the best, boys' book of the season."— Truth.
THE WIGWAM AND THE WAR-PATH:
Stories of the Red Indians. By Ascott R. Hope. With 8
full-page Pictures by Gordon Browne, in black and tint.
Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, 5*.
"Tho Wigwam and the War-path" consists of stories of Red Indians
which are none tho less romantic for being true. They are taken from tho
actual records of those who have boon made prisoners by the red men or
havo lived among them, joining in their expeditions and taking part in
their semi-savage but often picturesque and adventurous life.
M Mr. Hope's volume is notably good: it gives a very vivid picture of life among
the I m. Ii.itn."—Spectator.
"All the stories are told well, in simple spirited language and with a fulness of
detail that makes them instructive as well as interesting."— Journal of Education,


18
BlacMe & Son's New Publications.
BY HENRY FRITH.
THE SEARCH FOR THE TALISMAN:
A Story of Labrador. By Henry Frith. With 6 full-page
Illustrations by John Schonberg, in black and tint. Crown
8vo, cloth elegant, 3a. 6d.
A stirring tale of adventure in Labrador. Four youths and two elder
relatives proceed in search of a "talisman" left by the father of two of the
young explorers when an officer in the Hudson's Bay Company's service.
They get blown out of their course, and are obliged to anchor in an almost
ico-locked bay. On an exploring expedition they aro separated, and
various adventures result until they unito again and land amongst the
Esquimaux. After suffering many vicissitudes they succeed in recovering
the talisman, with which they return to England.
JACK 0' LANTHORN.
A Tale of Adventure. By Henry Frith. With 4 full-page Illus-
trations in black aud tint. Crown 8vo, cloth elegant, 2s. 6d.
This is a story of tho days when George the Third was king, and when
"Jack the Painter" was trying to set fire to the shipping in Government
dockyards. Tho hero gets into certain scrapes, and at the sea-coast makes
the acquaintance of Jack o' Lanthorn, the keeper of a light-ship. The lad
and a companion drifting out to sea in an open boat, discover in a singular
manner the approach of the Spanish fleet, and Jack accompanies the hero
of the talo to report what they have seen. Seized by a press-gang they
are taken off to sea, and eventually take part in the defence of Gibraltar.
"'Jack o' Lanthern ' will hold its own with the beat works of Mr. Henty and Mr.
Manville Fenn,"—Morning Advertise):
''The narrative is crushed full of stirring incident, and is sure to be a prime
favourite with our boys."—Christian Leader.
BY LEWIS HOUGH.
DR. JOLLIFFE'S BOYS:
A Tale of Weston School. By Lewis Hough. With 6 full-page
Pictures in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth extra, 3*. 6d.
A story of school life which will bo read with genuine interest, especially
as it exposes some of the dangers which may beset lads who are ill in-
structed at homo or have been thrown among unscrupulous companions.
Tho descriptions of the characters of the boys at Dr. Jolliffe's are vivid and
truthful. The narrative throughout Is bright, easy, and lighted by touches
of humour.
"Young people who appreciate 'Tom Brown's School-days' will find this story a
worthy companion to that fascinating lunik. There is tho same manline** of tone,
truthfulness of outline, avoidance of exaggeration ami caricature, and healthy mor-
ality as characterized the masterpiece of Mr. Hughes."— Netccastie Journal.


Blacki e & Son's New Publications.
19
BY JOHN C. HUTCHESON.
"Mr. Hutoheson bids fair to take a prominent place among our beet writers of
boys' books."—The Academy.
THE WRECK OF THE NANCY BELL;
Or, Cast Away on Kerguelen Land. By John C. Hutcheson.
Illustrated by 6 full-page Pictures in black and tint. Crown
8vo, cloth extra, 3*. 6d.
This is a book after a boy's own heart. The story narrates the eventful
voyage of a vessel on her way from the port of London to New Zealand,
and the haps and mishaps that befell her, culminating in the wreck of the
ill-fated Nancy Bell on Kerguelen Land. There is no lack of incident.
From the opening chapter, with the cowardly steward's alarm of "a ghost
in the cabin" to the end of the story, which details the rescue of the
shipwrecked passengers, one engrossing narrative holds the attention of
the reader, until he reaches the final page.
"A fall cireumstantial narrative such as boys delight in. The ship so sadly destined
to wreck on Kerguelen Land is manned by a very life-like party, passengers and
crew. The life in the Antaretic Iceland is well treated."—Athenaum.
PICKED UP AT SEA:
Or the Gold Miners of Minturne Creek, and other Stories. By
John C. Hutcheson. With 6 full-page Pictures in tints.
Crown 8vo, cloth extra, 3s. 6d.
The story of a young English lad, rescued in mid Atlantic from a watery
grave, and taken out west by a party of gold-diggers to the wild regions of
the Black Hills in Dakota. Here, after warring with the elements during
months of unceasing toil in their search for the riches of the earth, and
having the result of their indefatigable labour well-nigh torn from their
grasp when on the verge of victory, success at last rewards the efforts of
the adventurous band.
"This is the first appearance of the author as a writer of books for boys, and the
success is so marked that it may well encourage bim to further efforts. The descrip-
tion of raining life in the Far-west is true and accurate."—Standard.
"A capital book; full of startling incident, clever dialogue, admirable descriptions
of sky and water in all their as^iects, and plenty of fun."—SheJJUld Independent.
TOM FINCH'S MONKEY,
And other Yarns. By John C. Hutcheson. With 2 full-page
Illustrations in black and tint. Crown 8vo, cloth extra, Is. 6c/.
This is a collection of sea-stories. "Tom Finch's Monkey" is about a
gallant lieutenant and his pet chimpanzee, and will make many boys
iaagh; while the escape of "The Cranky Jane" will excite their deepest
interest; and as for "Jim Newman's Yarn," the real story of the great
sea-serpent, it will fairly enchant them. Grave and gay alike, these yarns
are suited to almost any taste.


Blackie & Son's New Publications. 25
BY THOMAS ARCHER.
LITTLE TOTTIE,
And Two Other Stories. By Thomas Archer. With 3 full-page
Illustrations by J. J. Proctor. Crown 8vo, cloth extra, 2s.
A thrilling littlo drams of real life, of child life, of the life of a poor
neighbourhood with sordid surroundings, and perhaps fuller of suggestion
than many more pretentious tales. It stirs the emotions by representing
actual scenes and possible people, with the peculiarities and habits that be-
long to them and make them easily recognized.
MISS GRANTLEYS GIRLS,
And the Stories She Told Them. By Thomas Archer. With
2 Illustrations by Gordon Browne. Cr. 8vo, cloth ex., Is. 6d.
The stories that Miss Grantley tells to her girls, during pleasant even-
ings after school, arc such as are likely to provo attractive to the girls in
other schools. They are small romances of real life with a good deal of
genuine pathos and exciting incident in them, and arc eminently suited for
family reading or for talos to tell out of school as Miss Grantley told them.
BY ROSA MULHOLLAND.
HETTY GRAY;
Or Nobody's Bairn. By Rosa Mulholland. With 4 full-page
Illustrations in black and tint. Cr. 8vo, cloth extra, 2s. 6d.
"Hetty Gray " is tho story of a girl who, having been found as an infant
by a villager, is brought up by his wife, and is a kind of general pet, till an
accident causes a rich widow to adopt her. On the death of her adoptive
mother Hetty, who is left unprovided for, is taken by the widow's relatives
to be educated with a view to her gaining her livelihood as a governess,
an event which is prevented by a rather remarkable discovery.
"A pleasantly told story for girls, with a happy ending."—Athenmim.
"A charming story for young folks. Hetty is a delightful creature—piquant,
tender, and true—and her varying fortunes are perfectly realistic."— World.
FOUR LITTLE MISCHIEFS.
By Rosa Mulholland. With 3 full-page Pictures in colours.
Crown 8vo, cloth extra, 2s.
The history of Kitty, Jock, Bunko, and Ba, whe, aftor successfully
weathering the mumps in their London nursery, are sent to the country
to recruit. The book is full of innocent fun, and abounds in attractive and
instructive incident.
"Will be read with absorbing interest by the youngsters."—Land a-ml Water.
"A charming bright story about real children."— W'ntehman.
B


32
Blackie & Son's New Publications.
THE SHILLING SERIES OF BOOKS
FOR YOUNG PEOPLE.
Square 16mo, neatly bound in cloth extra. Each book contains
128 pages and a coloured Illustration.
"The whole of the set will be found admirably adapted for the use of
the young. The books, well printed and elegantly bound in cloth, aro a
marvel of cheapness."—Journal of Education.
"They are unusually good, and are calculated to produce sound, whelo-
somo, moral effects."—Glasgow Herald.
OLIVE MOUNT. By Annie S. Fenn.
A bright and sparkling story about a family of boys and girls left, through
the death of both parents, to the charge of their eldest brother. For a time
the children fairly run riot in the pleasant country-side at Olive Mount;
till the wholesome discipline of sorrow and the gentle influence of Miss
Orpeu their governess, lead them to find enjoyment in doing what is
right.
A LITTLE ADVENTURER. By Gregson Gow.
Tells how little Tommy Treffit started off to search for his father in
Australia. How he hid himself on board a vessel bound for Madeira, and
how, after many adventures, he at last found his father, not in Australia,
but safo at home.
TOM WATKINS' MISTAKE. By Emma Leslie.
Tom Watkins, having given way to the temptation to commit acts of
petty pilfering in the carpenter's shop where he is apprenticed, ultimately
suffers the consequences of his wrong-doing, and not only learns that
honesty is the best policy, but comes to see the sinfulness of his conduct.
TWO LITTLE BROTHERS. By Harriet M. Capes.
This is a pleasant account of some of the incidents which befol two little
brothers, whose home was in a seaside village. It tells of their adventures
on the shore and of the wonderful sights they saw during a trip to London,
and how a kind father taught them to practise at all times self-control
and courtesy.


Blackie & Son's New Publications.
33
THE SHILLING SERIES OF BOOKS FOR YOUNG
PEOPLE—Continued.
THREE LITTLE ONES: Their Haps and Mishaps.
By Cora Langton.
A simple tale of home life. Children are sure to love and admire bright
Mabel, affectionate Eddie, and sad little Lucy, while the story of Mabel's
sin and Lucy's sorrow will teach them truthfulness and obedience.
THE NEW BOY AT MERRITON. By Julia
GODDARD.
"A story of English school life. It is an attempt to teach a somewhat higher codu
of honour than that which prevails among the general run of scheolboys, and the
lesson makes a very good story."—School Board Chronicle.
THE BLIND BOY OF DRESDEN.
"This is a family story of great lwithos. It does not obtrusively dictate its lesson,
but it quietly introduces, and leaves it within the heart."—Aberdeen Journal.
JON OF ICELAND: A True Story.
'"Jon of Iceland' in a sturdy, well-educated young Icelander, who becomes a suc-
cessful teacher. It gives children a clear idea of the chief physical features of the
island, and of the simple and manly character of its iuhabitaut*."—Sd, u»l Gaardian.
STORIES FROM SHAKESPEARE.
"The stories are told in such a way that young people baving read them will desire
to study the works of Shakespeare in their original form."— The School mint ress.
EVERY MAN IN HIS PLACE. The Story of a
City Boy and a Forest Boy.
"This is the history of the son (if a wealthy Hamburg merehant, who wished to
futlow in the steps of Robinson Crusoe. He was put to the test, and became con-
vinced in the end that it is better to live the lite of a wealthy merehant in a great
city than to endure hardship by choice."—School Board Chronicle.
FIRESIDE FAIRIES and FLOWER FANCIES:
Stories for Girls.
"Nine stories are included, all for girl*, encouraging them to try and do their
duty. Young servants would find this book very interesting."—TV Schoolmistress.


34
Blackie & Son's New Publications.
THE SHILLING SERIES—Continued.
TO THE SEA IN SHIPS: Stories of Suffering
and Saving at Sea.
"To the Sea in Ships records several noted disasters at sea, such as the foundering
of the Lowlon and the wreck of the Atlantic. It also oontains narratives of success-
ful rescues. This is a capital boon for boys."—School Guardian.
JACK'S VICTORY: And other Stories about
Dogs.
"Every boy, and some girls, take great delight in reading about dogs. Well. Jack
was a dug; a famous and wonderful oue, too. He became leader of a team in Green-
land, and some rare exploits he took part in. Besides 'Jack's Victory' there an
ten other stories about dogs in this volume."—The Schootmistrtu.
THE STORY OF A KING, Told by one of his
Soldiers.
"This book recounts the boyhood and reign of Charles XII. of Sweden. The ware
in which he was engaged and the extraordinary victories he won are well described,
and equally so are the misfortunes which latterly came on him and his kingdom
through his uncontrollable wilfulness."—Aberdeen Journal.
LITTLE DANIEL: A Story of a Flood on the Rhine.
11 A simple and touching story of a flood on the Rhine, told as well as George
Eliot so graphically wrote of The Mitt on the Flou."—Goxtmeu.
PRINCE ALEXIS: A Tale of Old Russia.
This is a legend wrought into a story, rendering a fiction of Life in
Russia, something more than a hundred years ago; a state of things which,
as the author says, "is now impossible, and will soon become incredible"
SASHA THE SERF: And other Stories of Russian
Life.
The stories in the volume comprise:—The Lifo of Sosha, a poor boy whe
saved the lifo of his lord, and finally rose to wealth and gained his free-
dom,—Incidents of remarkable personal bravery in the Russian army,
&c. &c.
TRUE STORIES OF FOREIGN HISTORY. A
Series of Interesting Tales.
The book contains stories—How Quentin Matsys the Antwerp smith
beesmo a great painter,—The rise and fall of Jean Ango the fisherman of
Dieppe,—The heroism of Casabianca the little French midshipman, Jto. ke.


38 Blackie & Son's New Puhlkulions.
VEEE FOSTER'S DRAWING-BOOKS—Continued.
STUDIES OF TREES,
In Pencil and in Water-Colors.
Eighteen Examples in Colon
pencil. With descriptions o
for Drawing and Painting.
Second Series, cloth elegant.
"Charmingly printed and illustrated
hy chroino-lithography—in which the
art of drawing foliage is very pithily but
neatly set forth. The letterpress de-
scriptions are remarkably well written."
—f'icti/rial World,
By J. Needham. A Series of
rs, and Thirty-three Drawings in
f the Trees, and full Instructions
First Series, cloth elegant,
5s.
"We commend them most heartily to
all persons of taste who may bo wanting
to cultivate the great accomplishment
of Water-color Drawing, or who want a
gift-book for a lail or girl taking up the
study."—SehoohuasU r.
ADVANCED STUDIES IN FLOWER PAINTING.
By Ada Hanbury. A Series of Twelve beautifully finished
Examples in Colors, and numerous Outlines in pencil. With
full Instructions for Painting, and a description of each plant
by Blanche Hanbury. 4to, cloth elegant, 7$. 6d.
"Apart from iU educational value in
art training this is a lovely book: we
have seen nothing to equal the coloured
plutes.'-—Sh'jftdU ImleirtncUut,
"The handsomest and most instruc-
tive volume of the series yet produced."
—Daily Chronicle.
"Coloured sketches of flowers which it
is literally no exaggeration to term ex-
qui site.''—A* nowledi/e.
ILLUMINATING.
Nine examples in Colors and Gold of ancient Illuminating of the
best periods, with numerous Illustrations in Outline, Historical
Notes and full descriptions and instructions by Rev. W. J.
Loftie, b.a., f.s.a. In Four Parts 4to, Is. each; or one
volume, cloth elegant, 6s.
EASY STUDIES IN WATER-COLOR PAINTING.
By R. P. Leitch and J. Callow. A Series of Nine Pictures
executed in Neutral Tints. With full Instructions for draw-
ing each subject, and for sketching from Nature. 4to, cloth
elegant, 6s.
SKETCHES IN WATER-COLORS.
By T. M. Richardson, R. P. Leitch, J. A. Houston, T. L. Row-
botham, E. Duncan, and J. Needham. A Series of Nine
Pictures executed iu Colors. Witli full Instructions for draw-
ing each subject, by an experienced Teacher. 4to, cl. eleg., 6'*.
"To those who wish to become proficient I ter instructoreould be recommended than
in the art of water color painting no bet- [ these two series."—Stucastl e Chroniclt.